Extreme Networks | ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager | User guide | Extreme Networks ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager User guide

Extreme Networks ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager User guide
ExtremeWare™ EPICenter™
Software Installation and
User Guide
Version 3.1
Extreme Networks, Inc.
3585 Monroe Street
Santa Clara, California 95051
(888) 257-3000
http://www.extremenetworks.com
Published: August, 2001
Part number: 100081-00 Rev. 02
©2001 Extreme Networks, Inc. All rights reserved. Extreme Networks and BlackDiamond are
registered trademarks of Extreme Networks, Inc. in the United States and certain other jurisdictions.
EPICenter, ExtremeWare, ExtremeWare Vista, ExtremeWorks, ExtremeAssist, ExtremeAssist1,
ExtremeAssist2, PartnerAssist, Extreme Standby Router Protocol, ESRP, SmartTraps, Alpine, Summit,
Summit1, Summit4, Summit4/FX, Summit7i, Summit24, Summit48, Summit Virtual Chassis,
SummitLink, SummitGbX, SummitRPS and the Extreme Networks logo are trademarks of Extreme
Networks, Inc., which may be registered or pending registration in certain jurisdictions. The Extreme
Turbodrive logo is a service mark of Extreme Networks, which may be registered or pending
registration in certain jurisdictions. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Solaris is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
All other registered trademarks, trademarks and service marks are property of their respective owners.
II
Contents
Preface
Introduction
Terminology
xxiii
xxiii
Conventions
xxiv
Related Publications
1
xxv
EPICenter Overview
Introduction
1-1
Summary of Features
Simple Inventory Management
The Alarm System
The Configuration Manager
Interactive Telnet Applet
The Grouping Manager
The IP/MAC Address Finder
ExtremeView Configuration and Status Monitoring
Real-Time Statistics
Topology Views
Enterprise-wide VLAN Management
The ESRP Manager
Dynamic Reports
Scalable Mode
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
iii
Security Management
EPICenter Stand-alone Utilities
2
iv
1-7
1-8
EPICenter Components
Extreme Networks Switch Management
1-8
1-10
Extreme Networks Device Support
1-10
Third-Party Device Support
1-10
EPICenter Client Requirements
1-11
Installing the EPICenter Software
Installation Overview
2-1
Server Requirements
Windows NT or Windows 2000
Solaris
2-2
2-2
2-3
Client Requirements
2-3
EPICenter Software Licensing
Obtaining an Evaluation License
Obtaining a Permanent License
Upgrading an Evaluation License
Adding a License for an Optional Product
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
Upgrading from a Previous Release
2-6
Installing on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 System
Adding or Updating the License Key
2-6
2-10
Installing on a Solaris System
Required Patches
Local Name Resolution
Installing the EPICenter Server
Adding or Updating a License Key
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-17
Installing the EPICenter Client
2-17
Uninstalling the EPICenter Server
Uninstalling in Windows NT or Windows 2000
Uninstalling in Solaris
2-18
2-18
2-19
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3
4
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
Running the EPICenter Software under Windows
Starting the EPICenter Server
Shutting Down the EPICenter Server Components
Restarting the EPICenter Server Components as Services
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-3
Running the EPICenter Software under Solaris
Starting or Restarting the EPICenter Server
Shutting Down the EPICenter Server Components
3-3
3-4
3-4
Launching the ExtremeWare EPICenter Client
3-4
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
The Navigation Toolbar
Main Applet Frame
The Component Tree
The Status/Detail Information Panel
Moving the Component Tree Boundary
Resizing and Sorting Columns
Applet Function Buttons
Printing from EPICenter
3-11
3-12
3-14
3-16
3-16
3-18
3-18
3-18
3-20
Running the EPICenter Server in Scalable Mode
3-20
Using the Inventory Manager
Overview of the EPICenter Device Inventory
Gathering Device Status Information
4-1
4-2
Displaying the Network Device Inventory
4-3
Viewing Device Status Information
4-5
Discovering Network Devices
4-8
Adding Devices and Device Groups
Adding a Device
Creating a Device Group
4-14
4-15
4-16
Modifying Devices and Device Groups
Modifying a Device
Modifying a Device Group
4-18
4-18
4-19
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
v
5
vi
Deleting Devices and Device Groups from the Database
Deleting a Device
Deleting a Device Group
4-21
4-21
4-23
Updating Device Information
4-24
Finding Devices
4-25
The EPICenter Alarm System
Overview of the EPICenter Alarm System
5-1
The Alarm Log Browser
Acknowledging an Alarm
Deleting Alarms
Viewing Alarm Details
Filtering the Alarm Display
5-2
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
Defining Alarms
Creating New Alarm Definitions
Modifying Alarm Definitions
Deleting Alarm Definitions
5-8
5-10
5-20
5-20
Alarm Categories
Creating a New Alarm Category
Modifying an Alarm Category
Deleting an Alarm Category
5-21
5-21
5-21
5-21
Event Configuration
Creating an Event Rule
Modifying a Rule
Deleting a Rule
Resynchronizing the RMON Rules
Configuring Other SNMP Trap Events
5-22
5-26
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
Setting EPICenter as a Trap Receiver
5-38
Writing Tcl Scripts for Alarm Actions
The Tcl Scripting Environment
5-39
5-39
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6
7
8
Configuration Manager
Overview of the Configuration Manager
6-1
Uploading Configurations from Devices
6-5
Archiving Configuration Settings
6-7
Downloading Configuration Information to a Device
6-8
Downloading an Incremental Configuration to Devices
Creating an Incremental Configuration File
6-10
6-12
Upgrading Device Software Images
6-12
Specifying the Current Software Versions
6-15
Configuring the TFTP Server
6-16
Finding Devices
6-18
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
Overview of the Interactive Telnet Applet
7-1
Using Telnet with Extreme Switches
Running ExtremeWare Command Macros
Running a Telnet Session on an Individual Switch
7-2
7-3
7-8
Using Interactive Telnet with Third-Party Devices
7-11
Finding Devices
7-12
The Grouping Manager
Overview of the Grouping Manager
8-1
Displaying EPICenter Groups and Resources
Resource Details
Grouping Manager Functions
8-4
8-6
8-8
Creating a New Resource
8-9
Deleting Resources
8-11
Adding a Resource as a Child of a Group
8-12
Removing A Child Resource from a Group
8-15
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
vii
9
10
11
viii
Adding Relationships to a Resource
Removing Relationships from a Resource
8-16
8-19
Adding and Removing Attributes
8-19
Searching for a Resource
Setting up a Resource Search
Searching from the Main Toolbar
Searching from the Add Resources or Add Relationship Window
8-23
8-23
8-26
8-27
Importing Resources
Importing from an LDAP Directory
Importing from a File
Importing from an NT Domain Controller or NIS Server
8-28
8-30
8-32
8-36
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
Overview of the IP/MAC Finder Applet
9-1
Tasks List Summary Window
9-2
Creating a Search Task
9-4
Detailed Task View
Exporting Task Search Results to a File
9-7
9-9
Using ExtremeView
Overview of the ExtremeView Application
10-1
Viewing Device Status Information
10-3
Viewing Switch Configuration Information
10-8
Viewing Switch Statistics
10-10
Finding Devices
10-11
Real-Time Statistics
Overview of Real-Time Statistics
11-1
Displaying Multi-port Statistics
11-3
Displaying Statistics For a Single Port
11-7
Changing the Display Mode
11-9
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12
13
14
Setting Graph Preferences
11-11
Taking Graph Snapshots
11-14
Network Topology Views
Overview of EPICenter Topology Views
12-1
Displaying a Network Topology View
Map Elements
Map Element Description Panel
12-2
12-4
12-8
Manipulating Map Views
Creating a New View or a New Map
Adding Elements to the Map
Editing the Map
Map Viewing Functions
12-9
12-9
12-11
12-15
12-19
Device Information Views
Device Alarms
Device Browse
Device Statistics
Device Telnet
Device View
12-26
12-26
12-26
12-27
12-27
12-27
Using the VLAN Manager
Overview of Virtual LANs
13-1
Displaying a VLAN
13-2
Adding a VLAN
13-6
Deleting a VLAN
13-9
Modifying a VLAN
13-10
Adding and Deleting Protocol Filters
13-13
The ESRP Manager
Overview of the ESRP Manager
14-1
Viewing ESRP Detail Information
14-3
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
ix
15
16
x
Administering EPICenter
Overview of User Administration
Controlling EPICenter Access
The EPICenter RADIUS Server
Setting EPICenter Server Properties
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-3
Starting the EPICenter Client for the First Time
Changing the Admin Password
15-3
15-5
Adding or Modifying User Accounts
15-6
Deleting Users
15-7
Changing Your Own User Password
15-8
RADIUS Administration
15-10
Server Properties Administration
Devices Properties
Scalability Properties
SNMP Properties
Topology Properties
Other Properties
15-12
15-13
15-14
15-14
15-15
15-15
Dynamic Reports
Overview of EPICenter Reports
16-1
Network Summary Report
Devices Managed by the Server
Devices Not Responding
Critical Alarms Defined
Critical Alarms for Last 24 Hours
Unacknowledged Critical Alarms
SNMP Unreachable Alarms
Invalid Login Alarms
Authentication Failure Alarms
VLANs Report
16-2
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-6
16-6
16-7
16-7
16-8
16-9
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Dynamic Reports
A
16-9
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
Report Filtering
Server State Summary Report
Device Inventory Report
Device Status Report
VLAN Summary Report
Interface Report
Resource to Attribute Mapping Report
User to Host Mapping Report
Alarm Log Report
Event Log Report
Configuration Management Log Report
16-10
16-10
16-12
16-13
16-14
16-15
16-15
16-16
16-17
16-17
16-19
16-20
Printing EPICenter Reports
16-20
Creating New Reports
Creating or Modifying a Report
Adding a User-Defined Report to the Reports Menu
Debugging
16-21
16-22
16-24
16-24
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Aids
A-1
EPICenter Client Initialization
A-2
EPICenter Server Issues
A-4
VLAN Manager
A-6
Alarm System
A-7
ESRP Manager
A-9
Inventory Manager
A-9
ExtremeView
A-11
Grouping Manager
A-12
Printing
A-12
Topology
A-13
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xi
B
C
D
E
xii
EPICenter Utilities
The DevCLI Utility
Using the DevCLI Commands
DevCLI Examples
B-1
B-2
B-3
Inventory Export Scripts
Using the Inventory Export Scripts
Inventory Export Examples
B-4
B-4
B-6
The SNMPCLI Utility
Using the SNMPCLI Utility
SNMPCLI Examples
B-7
B-7
B-8
Port Configuration Utility
B-9
EPICenter Database Views
Device Report View
C-1
Interface Report View
C-4
Database Event Log View
C-5
Database Alarm Log View
C-7
Event Types for Alarms
SNMP Trap Events
D-1
RMON Rising Trap Events
D-6
RMON Falling Trap Events
D-6
EPICenter Events
D-6
EPICenter Backup
EPICenter Log Backups
E-1
Database Utilities
E-2
The Validation Utility
Using the DBVALID Command-line Utility
Database Connection Parameters
E-2
E-3
E-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The Backup Utility
The DBBACKUP Command-line Utility
Database Connection Parameters
Installing a Backup Database
E-4
E-4
E-5
E-6
Index
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xiii
Figures
1-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
ExtremeWare EPICenter software architecture
1-9
EPICenter start-up page
3-5
ExtremeWare EPICenter login page
3-7
Java Plug-inSecurity Warning
3-8
The Network Summary Report page
3-9
The About EPICenter page
3-11
The EPICenter Home page
3-12
VLAN Manager applet running in a browser window
3-15
Inventory Manager applet
3-17
Pop-up dialog box for adding a VLAN in the VLAN Manager 3-19
The Inventory Manager applet, main page
4-4
Inventory Manager device group summary status
4-6
Inventory Manager device status information
4-7
Inventory Manager information for a 3Com device
4-8
Inventory Manager Device Discovery set up window
4-9
Results of a discovery, with details visible
4-11
Setting default device options for discovered devices
4-12
Message window showing Add Device progress
4-13
Message window showing errors from the Add Device
process
4-14
Add Device window in the Inventory Manager
4-15
Add Device Group window in the Inventory Manager
4-17
Devices tab of the Modify Devices and Device Groups
window
4-18
Device Groups tab of the Modify Devices and Device Groups
window
4-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xv
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
xvi
Devices tab of the Delete Devices and Device Groups
window
4-22
Device Groups tab of the Delete Devices and Device Groups
window
4-23
Synchronize Devices dialog
4-24
Find Devices dialog
4-26
The Alarm Log Browser page
5-3
Detailed view of an Alarm Log entry
5-6
Alarm Log filter definition pop-up window
5-7
Alarm System: Alarm Definition page
5-9
The New Alarm Definition window, Basic definition
5-10
The New Alarm Definition window, Scope definition
5-14
The New Alarm Definition window, Action definition
5-16
Setting up E-mail for EPICenter alarm actions
5-18
The event Configuration window showing RMON rules
5-23
The event Configuration window showing CPU Configuration
rules
5-25
New Configuration window
5-26
A list of MIB variables available for use in RMON rules
5-27
RMON Alarm event generation
5-30
CPU Utilization event generation
5-32
RMON target selection window
5-33
Modify Configuration window
5-36
The Synchronize RMON Rules window
5-37
Configuration Manager showing summary device status
6-2
Configuration and Software status for an individual device
6-4
The Upload Config window
6-5
Schedule Upload Config window
6-7
Download configuration window
6-9
Download incremental configuration window
6-11
Upgrade Image on Devices window
6-13
Configure New Image window
6-16
Configure TFTP Server window
6-17
Find Devices dialog
6-18
The Telnet applet, macro interface
7-2
The Telnet record and play buffer
7-4
Saving a macro to the database
7-7
Loading a macro from the database
7-7
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-5
7-6
7-7
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
10-1
10-2
10-3
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-10
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
11-10
A newly-opened Telnet session
7-9
An open Telnet session showing the pop-up edit menu
7-10
Find Devices dialog
7-12
Resource Details view
8-5
Adding a new resource
8-9
Adding Resources to a Group
8-13
Adding Relationships to a Resource
8-17
Resource attribute display
8-21
Adding attributes to a resource
8-22
Searching for a resource
8-24
Importing resources
8-29
Monitoring the progress of an Import function
8-30
IP/MAC Address Finder main page
9-2
Tasks List summary
9-3
Find Addresses window
9-5
Search in progress
9-7
Address search results in the Detailed Task view
9-8
The ExtremeView applet, main page
10-2
The ExtremeView applet, Status summary
10-3
The ExtremeView applet, switch status
10-5
The ExtremeView applet, port status
10-6
A third-party device with unknown configuration
10-7
The ExtremeView applet, Configuration summary
10-8
The ExtremeView applet, Configuration details
10-9
The ExtremeView applet, Statistics summary
10-10
The ExtremeView applet, Statistics details
10-11
Find Devices dialog
10-12
Real-Time Statistics main page
11-4
Bar chart showing port statistics for a group of ports
11-5
Warning displayed when the EPICenter server cannot retrieve
data
11-6
Utilization data over time for an individual port on a device 11-8
Individual errors in a single-port chart
11-9
Setting 3D graph preferences
11-12
Setting graph color preferences
11-13
Setting data color preferences
11-13
Setting other graph preferences
11-14
Snapshot of Real-Time Statistics graph display
11-15
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xvii
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-11
12-12
12-13
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-11
14-1
14-2
15-1
15-2
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-6
16-1
16-2
16-3
xviii
The Topology View
12-3
Example of device nodes, including an unknown device type 12-4
Example of a submap node
12-5
Example of an L2 cloud node
12-5
Example of hyper node icons representing a device and an L2
cloud
12-6
Example of a decorative node
12-6
Example of a gigabit link showing endpoint connectivity and Up
status
12-7
Adding a new map
12-11
Adding a decorative node to the map
12-13
Adding a link to your map
12-14
Specifying ports for a new link connection
12-15
Finding a node in the current view
12-23
Setting Map Properties for the current map
12-24
VLAN Manager applet, showing devices organized by VLAN13-3
VLAN topology shown by switch
13-4
VLAN member ports on a selected switch
13-5
Switch member ports for a selected VLAN
13-6
Add VLAN dialog, Properties and Ports page
13-7
Add VLAN dialog, IP Forwarding page
13-9
The Delete VLAN page
13-10
The Modify VLAN dialog, Properties and Ports page
13-11
The Modify VLAN dialog, IP Forwarding page
13-12
Protocol Panel dialog box, View/Delete page
13-13
Protocol Panel dialog box, Add Protocol page
13-14
ESRP Manager showing summary ESRP-enabled
VLAN status
14-2
ESRP detail for an individual ESRP-enabled VLAN
14-4
User Administration window
15-4
Edit User window
15-5
New User and Edit User windows
15-6
Change Password window
15-9
Radius Administration page
15-10
Server Properties Configuration page, initial properties list 15-12
Network Summary Report page
16-2
Network Summary Detail report
16-3
Report filter specification
16-11
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-4
16-5
16-6
16-7
16-8
B-1
Device Ports filter specification
Attribute specification for Resource to Attribute Mapping
report
Alarm Log filter specification
Event Log filter specification
Configuration Management Log filter specification
ExtremeWare EPICenter Port Configuration Utility
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-16
16-16
16-18
16-19
16-20
B-10
xix
Tables
1
2
4-1
5-1
5-2
7-1
10-1
11-1
11-2
B-1
B-2
B-3
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
D-1
D-2
E-1
E-2
E-3
E-4
Notice Icons
xxiv
Text Conventions
xxiv
Inventory Manager Device Status Indicators
4-6
EPICenter Alarm Variables
5-12
Command Restrictions in EPICenter Tcl Safe Interpreter
5-40
ExtremeView Macro Variables
7-5
ExtremeView Device Status Indicators
10-4
Definition of RMON Utilization Variable Used in Port Utilization
Displays
11-2
Definition of RMON etherHistory Error Variables for Port Error
Displays
11-2
DevCli command options
B-2
Inventory script command options
B-5
SnmpCli command options
B-8
EPICenter Database Device Report View
C-1
EPICenter Database Interface Report View
C-4
EPICenter Database Event Log View
C-5
EPICenter Database Alarm Log View
C-7
SNMP Trap Events
D-1
EPICenter Events, Detected Through Polling
D-7
dbvalid Command Switches
E-3
Database Connection Parameters for dbvalid Utility
E-4
dbbackup Command Switches
E-5
Database Connection Parameters for dbbackup Utility
E-5
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xxi
Preface
This Preface provides an overview of this guide, describes guide conventions, and lists
other useful publications.
Introduction
This guide provides the required information to use the ExtremeWare EPICenter software.
It is intended for use by network managers who are responsible for monitoring and
managing Local Area Networks, and assumes a basic working knowledge of:
• Local Area Networks (LANs)
• Ethernet concepts
• Ethernet switching and bridging concepts
• Routing concepts
• The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
If the information in the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick Start
Guide shipped with your software differs from the information in this guide, follow
the Release Note.
Terminology
When features, functionality, or operation is specific to the Summit, Alpine, or
BlackDiamond switch family, the family name is used. Explanations about features and
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xxiii
Preface
operations that are the same across all Extreme switch product families simply refer to the
product as the “Extreme device” or “Extreme switch.” Explanations about features that are
the same for all devices managed by EPICenter (both Extreme devices and others) are
simply refer to “devices.”
Conventions
Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide.
Table 1: Notice Icons
Icon
Notice Type
Alerts you to...
Note
Important features or instructions.
Caution
Risk of unintended consequences or
recoverable loss of data.
Warning
Risk of permanent loss of data.
.
Table 2: Text Conventions
Convention
Description
Screen displays
This typeface represents information as it appears on the screen.
Screen displays
bold
This typeface indicates how you would type a particular command.
The words “enter”
and “type”
When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type something,
and then press the Return or Enter key. Do not press the Return or
Enter key when an instruction simply says “type.”
xxiv
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Related Publications
Table 2: Text Conventions (continued)
Convention
Description
[Key] names
Key names appear in text in one of two ways. They may be
■
■
referred to by their labels, such as “the Return key” or “the Escape
key.”
written with brackets, such as [Return] or [Esc].
If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are
linked with a plus sign (+). For example:
Press [Ctrl]+[Alt]+[Del].
Words in bold type
Bold text indicates a button or field name.
Words in italicized type
Italics emphasize a point or denote new terms at the place where they
are defined in the text.
Related Publications
The ExtremeWare EPICenter documentation set includes the following:
• The ExtremeWare EPICenter SE User Guide (the manual you are reading)
• ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick Start Guide
• ExtremeWare EPICenter License Agreement
The two manuals and the Release Note can be found online in Adobe Acrobat PDF format,
in the docs subdirectory of the EPICenter installation directory. You must have Adobe
Acrobat Reader version 3.0 or later (available from http://www.adobe.com free of charge).
Other manuals that you will find useful are:
• ExtremeWare Software User Guide
• ExtremeWare Quick Reference Guide
For documentation on Extreme Networks products, and for general information about
Extreme Networks, see the Extreme Networks home page:
• http://www.extremenetworks.com
Customers with a support contract can access the Technical Support pages at:
• http://www.extremenetworks.com/support/database.htm
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
xxv
Preface
The technical support pages provide the latest information on Extreme Networks
software products, including the latest Release Notes, information on known problems,
downloadable updates or patches as appropriate, and other useful information and
resources.
Customers without contracts can still access manuals and patches at
http://www.extremenetworks.com/support/documentation.asp
xxvi
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1
EPICenter Overview
This chapter describes:
• Features of the ExtremeWare EPICenter™ SE software.
• EPICenter software components.
• Hardware and software requirements.
Introduction
Today's corporate networks commonly encompass hundreds or thousands of systems,
including individual end user systems, servers, network devices such as printers, and
internetworking systems. Extreme Networks™ recognizes that network managers have
different needs, and delivers a suite of ExtremeWare™ management tools to meet those
needs.
EPICenter is a powerful yet easy-to-use application suite that facilitates the management
of a network of Summit™ and BlackDiamond™ switches, as well as selected third-party
switches. EPICenter makes it easier to perform configuration and status monitoring, create
virtual LANs (VLANs), and implement policy-based networking in enterprise LANs with
Extreme Networks switches. EPICenter offers a comprehensive set of network
management tools that are easy to use from a workstation configured with a web browser
and the Java plug-in.
EPICenter leverages the three-tier client/server architecture framework represented by
Java applets, and can be accessed using Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator
with Sun’s Java Plug-in. The EPICenter application and database support two of the most
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1-1
EPICenter Overview
popular operating environments in the marketplace, Microsoft Windows NT and Sun
Microsystems’ Solaris. Integration with HP OpenView and other third-party network
management software products provides additional flexibility.
Summary of Features
In large corporate networks, network managers need to manage systems “end to end.” The
EPICenter software is a powerful, flexible and easy-to-use application for centralizing the
management of a network of Extreme switches and selected third-party devices, regardless
of the network size. The EPICenter software provides the vital SNMP, HTML, and
CLI-based tools you need for network-wide management of Extreme Networks Summit,
Black Diamond, and Alpine switches.
• Network Control. The EPICenter software provides configuration and monitoring of
Extreme Networks' switches and selected third-party devices anywhere on the network
simultaneously.
• Intelligent Management. Extreme SmartTraps™ (patent pending) automatically gather
switch configuration changes and forward them to the EPICenter server, thereby
minimizing network management traffic. EPICenter separates its request “heartbeat”
polling to asses a device’s connectivity from its less frequent and more data-intensive
status polling.
• Hierarchical Displays. Most information, including that found in EPICenter topology
maps, VLAN management, configuration management, and real-time statistics, is
dynamically presented in an easy-to-navigate hierarchical tree.
• Multi-platform capability. The EPICenter Server supports both Sun SPARC/Solaris
and Intel/Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000. Clients running in browsers on either of
these platforms can connect to servers on either platform.
• Support for multiple users with security. Users must log in to the application, and can
be granted different levels of access to the application features.
• Web-based clients. EPICenter clients are web-based, requiring only a web-browser and
Java plug-in to be installed on client machines.
• Manage large numbers of devices. The EPICenter server’s scalability mode lets you
manage up to about 2000 devices with a single installation of the EPICenter software.
Extreme Networks switches and many other MIB-2 compatible devices can be monitored
and controlled from a central web-based interface, without exiting EPICenter to run a
separate program or telnet session. Features such as SmartTraps and the EPICenter alarm
1-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Summary of Features
system further maximize network monitoring capability while maintaining network usage
efficiency.
You can organize your network resources into groups (including groups made up of
selected ports from multiple switches) that you can manage as a single entity. You can set
VLAN configurations across the network without having to log into switches individually.
You can search for individual IP addresses and identify their connections into the network.
You can monitor the status of your network devices either visually, through the
ExtremeView applet, or by setting alarms that will notify you about conditions or events
on your network devices. You can get a high-level overview of the status of your network
devices displayed as a hierarchical topology map.
These features and more are described in more detail in the following sections, and in the
remaining chapters of this manual.
Simple Inventory Management
EPICenter’s Inventory Manager applet keeps a database of all the devices managed by the
EPICenter software. Any EPICenter user can view status information about the switches
currently known to the EPICenter database.
The EPICenter Inventory Management applet provides an automatic discovery function.
Users with the appropriate access can use this feature to discover Extreme and other MIB-2
devices by specific IP address or within a range of IP addresses.
Network devices can also be added to the EPICenter database manually, using the
Inventory Manager Add function. Once a network device is known to the EPICenter
database, you can assign it to a specific device group, and configure it using the VLAN
Manager, the Configuration Manager, or the ExtremeView tool.
The Alarm System
The EPICenter Alarm System provides fault detection and alarm handling for the network
devices monitored by the EPICenter software. This includes Extreme devices and some
third-party devices—those that the EPICenter software can include in its Inventory
database. The Alarm System also lets you define your own alarms that will report errors
under conditions you specify, such as repeated occurrences or exceeding threshold values.
You can specify the actions that should be taken when an alarm occurs, and you can enable
and disable individual alarms.
Fault detection is based on SNMP traps, RMON traps, and some limited polling. The
Alarm System supports SNMP MIB-2 and the Extreme Networks private MIB. When an
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1-3
EPICenter Overview
alarm occurs you can specify actions such as sending e-mail, forwarding a trap, running a
program, running a script, or sounding an audible alert.
The Configuration Manager
The EPICenter Configuration Manager applet provides a mechanism and a graphical
interface for uploading and downloading configuration files to and from managed
devices. It can also download ExtremeWare software images and BootROM images to
Extreme Networks devices.
The Configuration Manager also provides a framework for storing the configuration files,
to allow tracking of multiple versions. Configuration file uploads can be performed on
demand, or can be scheduled to occur at regular times—once a day, once a week, or at
whatever interval is appropriate.
Interactive Telnet Applet
The ExtremeView Telnet feature includes a macro capability that lets you create and
execute scripts of CLI commands repeatedly on multiple devices in one operation. You can
save your macros for reuse at other times.
You can also use the interactive Telnet capability to view and modify configuration
information for Cisco devices as well as for Extreme Networks devices.
The Grouping Manager
One of the powerful features of the EPICenter software is its ability to take actions on
multiple devices or resources with a single user action. The Grouping Manager facilitates
this by letting you organize various resources into hierarchical groups, which can then be
referenced in other applets. YOU can then take actions on a group, rather than having to
specify the individual devices or ports that you want to affect.
You can also create or import named resources such as users and workstations, which can
be mapped through the Grouping Manager to IP addresses and ports. This capability is
especially important in relationship to the optional Policy Manager applet, which takes
advantage of these types of resources to simplify the creation of QoS and Access List
policies.
1-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Summary of Features
The IP/MAC Address Finder
The IP/MAC Address Finder applet lets you search for specific network addresses (MAC
or IP addresses) and identify the Extreme Networks switch and port on which the address
resides. You can also use the IP/MAC Finder applet to find all addresses on a specific port
or set of ports. You can export the results of your search to a file.
ExtremeView Configuration and Status Monitoring
With ExtremeView, any Extreme Networks switch can be monitored and controlled from a
central, web-based platform, without leaving the EPICenter client to invoke another
program or Telnet session.
The ExtremeView applet displays detailed information about the status of Extreme
switches in a number of categories. Any EPICenter user can view status information about
these network devices known to the EPICenter database. Users with the appropriate access
permissions can also view and modify configuration information for those switches using
either the ExtremeWare Vista graphical user interface.
Real-Time Statistics
The Real-Time Statistics feature of the EPICenter software provides a graphical
presentation of utilization and error statistics for Extreme switches in real time. The data is
taken from Management Information Base (MIB) objects in the etherHistory table of the
Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB. You can choose from a variety of styles of charts and
graphs as well as a tabular display.
You can view data for multiple ports on a device, device slot, or within a port group,
optionally limiting the display to the “top N” ports (where N is a number you can
configure). You can also view historical statistics for an individual port. If you choose to
view a single port, the display shows the value of the selected variable(s) over time, and
can show utilization history, total errors history, or a breakdown of individual errors.
In addition, the Real-Time Statistics applet lets you “snapshot” a graph or table as a
separate browser page. You can then save, print, or e-mail the page.
Topology Views
The EPICenter software’s Topology applet allows you to view your network
(EPICenter-managed devices and the links between devices) as a set of maps. These maps
can be organized as a tree of submaps that allow you to represent your network as a
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1-5
EPICenter Overview
hierarchical system of campuses, buildings, floors, closets, or whatever logical groupings
you want.
The Topology applet can automatically add device nodes to your map as devices are added
to EPICenter software’s device inventory. The EPICenter software will also add links that
exist between the devices, and organize them into submaps as appropriate. You can
customize the resulting maps by moving elements, adding new elements, such as links,
“decorative” (non-managed) nodes, and text, and customizing the discovered nodes
themselves.
Finally, from a managed device node on the map, you can invoke other EPICenter
functions such as the alarm browser, telnet, real-time statistics, a front panel view, or
ExtremeWare Vista for the selected device.
Enterprise-wide VLAN Management
A virtual LAN (VLAN) is a group of location- and topology-independent devices that
communicate as if they were on the same physical local area network (LAN).
The ExtremeWare EPICenter VLAN Manager is an enterprise-wide application that
manages many aspects of VLANs on Extreme Network’s Summit and BlackDiamond
switches. Any EPICenter user can view status information about the VLANs currently
known to EPICenter. Users with the appropriate access can create and delete VLANs, add
and remove ports from existing VLANs, and create and modify the protocol filters used to
filter VLAN traffic.
The ESRP Manager
The Extreme Standby Router Protocol (ESRP) is a feature of ExtremeWare that allows
multiple switches to provide redundant layer 3 routing services, as well as layer 2
redundancy, to users. The ESRP Manager displays the status of ESRP-enabled VLANs and
the ESRP-enabled switches in those VLANs. You can view a summary status for all the
ESRP-enabled VLANs being monitored by the EPICenter software. You can also view
detailed information for an individual ESRP-enabled VLAN and the switches in those
VLANs.
Dynamic Reports
EPICenter Reports are HTML pages that can be accessed separately from the main
EPICenter user interface, without logging in to the Java user interface. The Reports module
1-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Summary of Features
can also be accessed from the EPICenter Navigation toolbar. A Summary Report is also
displayed on the main EPICenter “home” page that provides basic information on the
status of EPICenter devices and alarms. From this report you can access other more
detailed reports.
The EPICenter reports are HTML pages that do not require Java capability, and thus can be
accessed from browsers that do not have the ability to run the full EPICenter user interface.
This means reports can be loaded quickly, even over a dial-up connection, and it also
provides the ability to print the reports.
The Reports capability provides a number of predefined HTML reports that present
information from the EPICenter database. You can also create your own reports by writing
Tcl scripts.
Scalable Mode
As the number of devices in your network increases, the effort required on the part of the
EPICenter server to monitor all those devices increases. At some point, EPICenter
performance may become undesirably slow. For a network with a very large number of
devices, therefore, you can run the EPICenter server in “scalable mode.” This lets you
manage a very large number of devices (on the order of 2000 devices) at the expense of the
availability of some of the EPICenter applets, and the ability to manage to the port level.
The following applets are not available in Scalable Mode.
• ExtremeView
• Real-Time Statistics
• Topology
• VLAN Manager
• ESRP Manager
• Policy Manager (an optional, separately-licensed module)
Scalable Mode is implemented through a single property setting in the EPICenter
Administration module.
Security Management
In order to access EPICenter features, a user must log in with a user name and a password.
EPICenter provides three access levels:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1-7
EPICenter Overview
• Monitor—users who can view status information only.
• Manager—users who can modify device parameters as well as view status information.
• Administrator—users who can create, modify and delete EPICenter user accounts as
well as perform all the functions of a user with Manager access.
The EPICenter Admin applet enables configuration of EPICenter as a Remote
Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server. As an alternative, it can be
configured as a RADIUS client, or RADIUS authentication functionality can be disabled.
When EPICenter acts as a RADIUS server, it can be contacted by RADIUS clients (such as
Extreme Networks switches) to configure access permissions for Extreme switches, and to
authenticate user names and passwords. The use of the RADIUS server avoids the need to
maintain user names, passwords, and access permissions in each switch, and instead
centralizes the configuration in one location in EPICenter.
EPICenter Stand-alone Utilities
The EPICenter software provides several stand-alone utilities or scripts that streamline the
process of getting information into and out of the EPICenter database, or facilitate certain
device troubleshooting functions. These are the following:
• The DevCLI utility lets you add devices to and remove devices from the EPICenter
inventory database via command, and supports batch additions and deletions specified
via a file.
• A set of Inventory Export scripts that enable you to export information from the
EPICenter database about the devices that are being managed. The information is
provided in a format suitable for import into other applications, such as a spreadsheet.
• The SNMPCLI utility provides SNMP Get, GetNext, and SNMP walk features that may
be needed to obtain device MIB information for troubleshooting.
EPICenter Components
The EPICenter software is made up of three major functional components:
• The EPICenter Server, which is based on the Tomcat Java server. The server is
responsible for downloading applets, running servlets, managing security, and
communicating with the database.
1-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
EPICenter Components
• A Relational Database Management System (RDBMS), Sybase Adaptive Server
Anywhere, which is used as both a persistent data store and a data cache.
• The EPICenter client applications, which are Java applets that are downloaded from the
server to a client machine on request and executed in a Java-enabled web browser. The
Java Plug-in version 1.3.1 is required.
Figure 1-1 illustrates the architecture of the EPICenter software.
Client system
Browser with Java plug-in
EPICenter applets
TCP sockets
Server system
EPICenter server
Application objects
Relational
database
SNMP
Extreme
device
Telnet
Extreme
device
Third-party
device
XM_021
Figure 1-1: ExtremeWare EPICenter software architecture
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1-9
EPICenter Overview
Extreme Networks Switch Management
The EPICenter software uses SNMP to monitor and manage the devices in the network. To
avoid the overhead of frequent device polling, the EPICenter software uses a mechanism
called SmartTraps to identify changes in Extreme device status and configuration.
When an Extreme switch is added to the EPICenter database, the EPICenter software
creates a set of SmartTraps rules that define what events (status and configuration
changes) the EPICenter server needs to know about. These rules are downloaded into the
Extreme switch, and the EPICenter server is automatically registered as a trap receiver.
Subsequently, whenever a status or configuration change takes place, the ExtremeWare
software in the switch uses the SmartTraps rules to determine if the EPICenter server
should be notified. These changes can be changes in device status, such as fan failure or
overheating, or configuration changes made on the switch through the ExtremeWare CLI
or ExtremeWare Vista.
The EPICenter server does a “heartbeat” check, by default every five minutes, of all the
devices it is managing to determine if the devices are still accessible. It also does a full poll
of each device at longer intervals. This interval for this less frequent status polling can be
adjusted on each individual device. The EPICenter software also gives you the ability to
gather device status at any time using the Sync feature in the Inventory Manager applet.
Extreme Networks Device Support
Extreme Networks devices running the ExtremeWare software version 2.0 or later, are
supported by most features in the EPICenter system, including the VLAN Manager and
the graphical display features of the ExtremeView applet. Some features, such as ESRP, or
the Policy Manager, require more recent versions of the ExtremeWare software.
See the ExtremeWare EPICenter Release Note and Quick Start Guide or the Extreme Networks
web site for the most current information on device support in the EPICenter software.
Third-Party Device Support
Any device running a MIB-2 compatible SNMP agent can be discovered by the EPICenter
Inventory manager, and saved in the Inventory database. All devices in the database can
also appear on a topology map. The EPICenter alarm system can handle SNMP traps from
any device in the inventory database, including RMON traps from devices with RMON
1-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
EPICenter Client Requirements
enabled. The Real-Time Statistics module can display statistics for any device with RMON
enabled, the IP/MAC Finder applet supports all devices running MIB-2 and the Bridge
MIB, with the exception of user mapping, which is specific to Extreme devices.
In the Telnet applet, you can use the Telnet feature with any device that supports a Telnet
interface. In the ExtremeView applet, all Extreme devices and selected third-party devices
(including certain Cisco and 3COM devices) can display a device-specific front panel view
in the Summary view. In addition, vendor-specific generic images are available for
additional devices, such as Sun and Nortel, and a standard generic image can be displayed
for all other “unknown” devices. New device images and configuration description files
may be added over time—check the Extreme Networks web site for information on new
device support.
EPICenter Client Requirements
The EPICenter client requires a monitor that supports 1024x768 resolution, and at least
16-bit color. Your system Display Settings must be set for 65536 colors.
The client may also use large amounts of memory. 128 MB of RAM is recommended for
best performance (256 MB is recommended if you plan to run the client on the same
system as the EPICenter server).
The client can run using the following browsers:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5.0 or version 5.5 with Service Pack 1 on
Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000, with the Java Plug-in 1.3.1.
• Netscape Navigator version 4.7 under SPARC Solaris (2.6, 7, or 8) with the Java
Plug-in version 1.3.1.
See the ExtremeWare EPICenter Release Note and Quick Start Guide shipped
with the software for the latest information about configuration requirements.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
1-11
2
Installing the EPICenter Software
This chapter describes:
• Hardware and software requirements for the EPICenter server and client
• Procedure for obtaining an evaluation or permanent license key for the software
• Install the EPICenter Server software under either Windows NT or Windows 2000
• Set up Internet Explorer for use with the EPICenter client on a Windows system
• Install the EPICenter server software under the Solaris Operating Environment
• Set up Netscape Navigator for use with the EPICenter client on a Solaris system
Installation Overview
The ExtremeWare EPICenter Standard Edition (SE) software includes a set of Java
applications, a Web Server, and database software. The installation process installs all of
these components on a Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 system, or under Solaris 2.6,
Solaris 7, or Solaris 8.
The EPICenter client runs within a web browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer under
Windows or Netscape Navigator under Solaris) with the Java Plug-in version 1.3.1. The
client does not require installation, you just point your browser to the EPICenter server.
See the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick Start Guide for the
most current information on installation requirements.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-1
Installing the EPICenter Software
The ExtremeWare EPICenter server installation process installs two components:
• The EPICenter Database Engine
• The EPICenter Web Server
Under Windows NT/2000 you can run these as services, or just as an application. Running
them as services is recommended.
Server Requirements
The ExtremeWare EPICenter Server can run under Microsoft Windows NT 4.0,
Microsoft Windows 2000, or Sun Microsystems’ Solaris Operating Environment, SPARC
Platform Edition.
Windows NT or Windows 2000
For installation under Windows NT or Windows 2000, the requirements are:
• Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 running on an Intel platform.
• 128 MB RAM (256 MB recommended, especially if you plan to run an EPICenter
client on the same system).
• Disk space depends on the file system used on the disk as well as the number of
items (devices, ports, alarms etc.) that the system must handle:
— 130 MB of disk space for the server installation.
— Up to 150-200 MB for runtime usage (log files, database, user-defined scripts,
reports, and so on).
— If the disk is using the FAT file system, the EPICenter server could use 30% of the
disk (i.e 300MB on a 1 GB disk, 600 MB on a 2GB disk and so on). Installing on a
FAT file system is not recommended.
You can tell the type of file system by looking at the disk properties. Right-click on
the drive letter in the Windows Explorer or My Computer windows.
• 300 Mhz Pentium-compatible processor.
• CDROM drive (for installation).
• A network connection.
2-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Client Requirements
Solaris
For installation under Solaris, the requirements are:
• Solaris Operating Environment 2.6, Solaris 7, or Solaris 8 with required patches
already installed.
• 128 MB RAM (256 MB recommended, especially if you plan to run an EPICenter
client on the same system).
• As much as 300 MB disk space:
— 130 MB of disk space for the server installation
— Up to 150-200 MB for runtime usage (log files, database, user-defined scripts,
reports and so on)
• CDROM drive (for installation)
• A network connection
Both the Solaris 2.6 and Solaris 7 operating environments may require patches for
EPICenter to function properly. Make certain these patches have been installed before you
install the EPICenter server software. See Chapter 3 for more information on obtaining any
needed patches.
For the most current information on required patches, see the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE
Release Note and Quick Start Guide that accompanies your EPICenter software, or check the
Extreme Networks web site at www.extremenetworks.com.
Client Requirements
The EPICenter client requires a monitor that supports 1024 x 768 resolution, and at least
16-bit color. Your system Display Settings must be set for 65536 colors.
The client can also use large amounts of memory. 128 MB of RAM is recommended for
best performance (256 MB is recommended if you plan to run the client on the same
system as the EPICenter server).
The EPICenter client user interface is a Java-based application that runs within a web
browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
• Under Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000, install Internet Explorer 5.0, or Internet
Explorer 5.5 with Service Pack 1, and the Java 1.3.1 plug-in.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-3
Installing the EPICenter Software
• On a Solaris system, install Netscape Navigator 4.7 or later, with the 1.3.1 Java plug-in.
See the ExtremeWare EPICenter Release Note and Quick Start Guide shipped
with the software for the latest information about configuration requirements.
EPICenter Software Licensing
In order to log in to the EPICenter server from an EPICenter client, the product must be
configured with a valid license. Optional products such as the Policy Manager also require
their own license keys.
An evaluation license allows you to run the product for 45 days. A permanent license has
no time limit. You can install the software without a license key, but you will not be able to
connect to it from an EPICenter client. (If you need to install the product without a license
key, you can add the key at a later time using a license key upgrade utility.)
You must obtain both evaluation and permanent license keys from the Extreme Networks
licensing web site. The license key should be sent to you as e-mail within minutes of
submitting your request.
Both evaluation and permanent license keys are 14-character keys that start with EP and
are followed by 12 additional characters that are a combination of upper- and lower-case
case alphabetic characters, numbers, and special characters such as “+”
If you have purchased the product, you should have received an activation key, found on
the License Agreement included in your software package. This key starts with “AC,” and
can be used to obtain a permanent license key. You do not need an activation key to obtain
an evaluation license key.
See the ExtremeWare EPICenter Release Note and Quick Start Guide shipped with
the software for the latest information about obtaining a license key.
Obtaining an Evaluation License
To obtain an evaluation license key, use your browser to connect to the license page at
http://www.extremenetworks.com/go/epickey.htm.
Select the option to obtain an evaluation license key. You will be asked to enter your name,
company information, and other similar information, and an e-mail address to which your
license key should be sent.
2-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
EPICenter Software Licensing
You license key will be sent to you by return e-mail.
Obtaining a Permanent License
To obtain a permanent license key, use your browser to connect to the license page at
http://www.extremenetworks.com/go/epickey.htm.
Select the option to obtain a permanent license key.
Fill in the requested information, and enter your activation key. The activation key is a
14-character key that starts with “AC” and is found on the License Agreement included
with your software package.
Your permanent license key will be sent to you by return e-mail.
Upgrading an Evaluation License
To update an evaluation license of the ExtremeWare EPICenter to a permanent license, use
the instlic utility.
In Windows, run the instlic command using the Run command from the Windows Start
menu, or from an MS-DOS command window. From Solaris, run the command from a
command shell. The instlic utility is found in the EPICenter install directory, by default
epc3_1 in Windows, or /opt/epc3_1 on a Solaris system.
Enter the command followed by the 14-character license key, as follows:
instlic <license_key>
See “Adding or Updating the License Key” on page 2-10 (for Windows) or “Adding or
Updating a License Key” on page 2-17 (for Solaris) for further instructions.
Adding a License for an Optional Product
When you purchase a product option such as the EPICenter Policy Manager, you receive a
separate key to enable the optional module. If you purchase the optional module at the
same time as the main ExtremeWare EPICenter software, you can use the use the optional
module key when you do the EPICenter installation, and it will enable both the EPICenter
software and the additional module.
However, if you purchase the additional module at a later time, you must update your
license key to enable the new module.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-5
Installing the EPICenter Software
To add a license key for an optional EPICenter product module, use the instlic utility.
In Windows, run the instlic command using the Run command from the Windows Start
menu, or from an MS-DOS command window. From Solaris, run the command from a
command shell. The instlic utility is found in the EPICenter install directory, by default
epc3_1 in Windows, or /opt/epc3_1 on a Solaris system.
Enter the command followed by the 14-character license key, as follows:
instlic <license_key>
See “Adding or Updating the License Key” on page 2-10 (for Windows) or “Adding or
Updating a License Key” on page 2-17 (for Solaris) for further instructions.
Upgrading from a Previous Release
If you have the previous software release installed, the installation script can also migrate
your database information to the new EPICenter software version. The installation process
will upgrade only the previous release of the software—for the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE
release 3.1, you can upgrade from ExtremeWare EPICenter 3.0, but not from any earlier
versions of the ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager software. If you are running one of the
older versions (ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, or 2.1) you must do a new
install of the EPICenter 3.1 software.
There is one caveat concerning the upgrade:
• Server-side configuration changes (specifically, edits you’ve made to
extreme.properties file) are not copied. The extreme.properties file has been
removed in EPICenter 3.1, and the server configuration settings are now handled
through the EPICenter client in the Administration module. You must re-enter any
configuration changes through the Server Properties page in the Administration applet.
Installing on a Windows NT or Windows 2000
System
The following sections assume that Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 is already
running.
2-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Installing on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 System
For information on installing and running Windows NT or WIndows 2000, refer to
the documentation supplied with your Microsoft Windows software.
To install the EPICenter software components under Windows NT you must have
Windows NT administrator privileges on that system.
If you have the previous software release installed, the installation script will also migrate
your database information to the new EPICenter software version.
If you are running an evaluation version of the EPICenter software, DO NOT
REINSTALL the EPICenter software to upgrade to a permanent license if you want
to retain the information in your EPICenter database. Using the license installation
utility will preserve the contents of the database.
To update an evaluation copy of the EPICenter server to a licensed copy without
reinitializing the database, follow the update procedure described in “Adding or Updating
the License Key” on page 2-10.
To install the ExtremeWare EPICenter server, follow these steps:
1 Close any open applications.
2 Insert the CDROM into the CDROM drive.
3 In most cases, the ExtremeWare EPICenter Welcome screen appears automatically. If it
does not:
a Open My Computer or Windows Explorer, and go to your CDROM drive.
b Open the nt directory, and start setup.exe.
The ExtremeWare EPICenter Welcome screen appears.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to progress through the Welcome screen.
5 If you are running EPICenter 3.0, you are notified that the services will be stopped in
order to install the EPICenter 3.1 software. If this is acceptable, click Yes.
6 Click Yes to accept the license agreement.
7 Enter your company information.
8 Enter your license key.
The license key is a case-sensitive string starting with “EP” and followed by 12
characters (a mixture of uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and special
characters) that you obtained from the Extreme Networks web site.
The license key is NOT the same as the activation key, which starts with “AC,” and
found on the License Agreement shipped with your purchased product. You use the
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-7
Installing the EPICenter Software
activation key to obtain a permanent license key from the Extreme Networks web site
at http://www.extremenetworks.com/go/epickey.htm
See Chapter 1 of this manual or the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick
Start Guide for details on obtaining an evaluation or permanent license key.
If you have purchased the EPICenter software and an additional module such as the
Policy Manager, you can use the key you received for the optional module here. It will
enable both the EPICenter software and the additional module.
If you do not yet have a key, you can still install the product, and then update the key
later using the instlic.exe utility. See “Adding or Updating the License Key” on
page 2-10.
— To skip entering a key, leave the field blank and click Next.
— A warning box pops up; click OK to continue.
9 In the Destination dialog box, choose one of two options:
— Accept the default target drive and folder displayed in the Destination Directory
box.
— Click Browse and select or enter a new folder, a new drive, or both.
If you are installing on a disk that uses the FAT file system rather than the NTFS file
system, a warning message pops up when you click Next. This is because under the
FAT file system, the EPICenter software can take up as much as 20% of your partition,
regardless of the size of the partition.
10 Accept the default program folder, EPICenter 3.1, or enter a different program folder
name, and click Next.
11 In the Database Server Information dialog box, enter a number into the Port field for the
TCP port that the EPICenter Web Server will use to communicate with the database, or
accept the default (2638). You can use any port number (a number between 1024 and
9999 is recommended) except a port number already in use by another process.
12 In the Get HTTP Port dialog box, you are asked for two ports that the EPICenter Web
Server will use:
— The HTTP Port for communication with clients (default 80).
— The Admin Port used by the EPICenter web server (default 8007).
Accept any or all of the default port numbers, or enter different port numbers.
You can use any port number (a number between 1024 and 9999 is recommended)
except:
— The port number you just entered for the database TCP port.
— Any port number already in use by another process.
2-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Installing on a Windows NT or Windows 2000 System
13 If there are any ExtremeWare EPICenter or ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager servers
running as services, a notice appears advising you that the services are being shut
down. <
The installation software then copies the EPICenter program files from the CD to your
system.
14 When the files have been copied, the Install as a Service dialog box asks if you want to
install the ExtremeWare EPICenter database and web server components as Windows
NT services.
— Click Yes to install the EPICenter components as services. This is strongly
recommended. If the EPICenter components run as services, they will be started
automatically on system boot, and will persist across user logins and logouts.
You must have NT Administrator privileges to install the EPICenter components
as services.
In addition, if you want to be able to import user and host information from a Windows
NT Domain Controller, the EPICenter server must run with permissions that allow it to
get user information from a Domain Controller.
— Click No if you do not want to install the components as services.
15 If you are upgrading from the previous release of the EPICenter software, you are asked
whether you want to copy the database and other persistent data to the new
installation. Click Yes to copy the data, or No to continue without doing so.
If you answer Yes, an MS-DOS window will appear briefly while the database contents
are dumped from the old database and loaded into the new database.
For the EPICenter 3.1 release, this installation utility will upgrade the database
from ExtremeWare EPICenter 3.0. Database upgrades from ExtremeWare
Enterprise Manager versions are not supported.
16 The installation procedure now installs the license key. An MS-DOS window will
appear briefly while this occurs.
If the license key you entered is invalid, an error window pops up. If you did not enter
a license key, a warning pops up. In either case, you can use the instlic utility to enter
a valid license key after you have completed your installation.
17 In the final dialog box, EPICenter Setup Complete, you can do the following.
— Click the checkbox to indicate you want to view the Readme file
— If you have installed the EPICenter components as services, click the second
checkbox to indicate you want your system to be restarted. If you choose not to
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-9
Installing the EPICenter Software
restart your system at this time, you must either restart the server or start the
services manually before you can log in to the EPICenter server from a client.
— Click Finish to complete the installation process.
Adding or Updating the License Key
To update an evaluation license of the ExtremeWare EPICenter to a permanent license, or
to install a license key after the original installation is complete, use the instlic utility
provided.
DO NOT reinstall the software if you have any data or configurations of value in the
EPICenter database. Re-installation will re-initialize the database.
To update your license key, follow these steps:
1 Select Run... from the Start menu, or start an MS-DOS command window.
Because you must enter the license key on the command line, you cannot run
this utility from a Windows Explorer or My Computer window.
2 Enter the command <EPICenter_install_dir>\instlic <key>
<EPICenter_install_dir> is the directory (path) where you installed the EPICenter
components. If you installed in the default directory, the path is
c:\EPC3_1\
<key> is the 14-character license key, starting with “EP,” that you obtained from
Extreme Networks. Type the key exactly as it is shown in the e-mail you received from
Extreme Networks. The key is case sensitive.
For example: c:\EPC3_1\instlic EP1a2B3c4D5+eF
If the license update is successful, the message “License Installed” is displayed.
If the update is not successful, the message “Invalid argument key : <key>” is
displayed. <key> is the license key you entered with the instlic command. Verify that
you typed the key exactly as shown in the e-mail you received from Extreme Networks.
Installing on a Solaris System
The EPICenter server software, version 3.1, is supported under Solaris 2.6, Solaris 7, and
Solaris 8. See “Server Requirements” in Chapter 1 for the hardware requirements. Also,
2-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Installing on a Solaris System
check the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick Start Guide for any additional
issues.
Required Patches
Both the Solaris 2.6 and Solaris 7 operating environments require patches for the EPICenter
software to function properly. Make certain these patches have been installed before you
install the EPICenter server software.
For the most current information on required patches, see the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE
Release Note and Quick Start Guide that accompanies your EPICenter software, or the
Extreme Networks web site at www.extremenetworks.com.
Sun Microsystems makes these patches available on the Java download site in the form of
tar files. They can be found at:
http://www.sun.com/software/solaris/jre/download.html
On this page, select Java 2 Standard Edition (J2SE) 1.3.0_03 Production Release for Solaris,
English, SPARC Edition. The patches listed for this release apply to the 1.3.1 Plug-in as
well.
You must register or log in, and then you will be presented with the download page that
includes Solaris patch bundles.
Local Name Resolution
The Solaris system on which EPICenter is installed must be able to resolve both its own
local name and its domain name. For example if you install EPICenter on a system named
system1, then it must be able to resolve both system1 and its domain name, such as
system1.company.com. You can test for this by attempting to ping the system using both
the local name and the domain name. If there are problems resolving either of these names,
make sure the etc/hosts file contains the correct information.
Installing the EPICenter Server
The instructions that follow assume that you are running in a command shell or Xterm
window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-11
Installing the EPICenter Software
You can install the EPICenter components without being logged in as root, as long as you
do not use port numbers less than 1024 (for example, port 80 for the EPICenter web server,
which is the default).
When you install the EPICenter Server, it initializes the database. If you attempt to
re-install the server once you have installed it, the installation process reinitializes
the database, and your existing data and configurations will be lost.
To update an evaluation copy of the EPICenter software to a licensed copy without
reinitializing the database, follow the update procedure described in the section
“Adding or Updating a License Key“ on page 2-17.
To install the EPICenter server software, follow these steps:
1 Insert the CDROM into the CDROM drive.
2 If you are running CDE, the contents of the CDROM are displayed in the File Manager.
Go to the sol directory.
To run from an Xterm window:
cd /cdrom<x>/sol
where <x> is your CDROM drive number (e.g. cdrom0). The volume label of the
installation CD is epc31b<xx>, where <xx> is the build number, for example epc31b49.
3 Run the installation script:
./install.sh
The EPICenter Welcome message appears as follows:
******************************************************************
Welcome to the Extreme Networks ExtremeWare EPICenter
install program. This program will install:
ExtremeWare EPICenter version 3.1.0 on this system.
******************************************************************
Please review the following software license terms
and conditions. You will need to accept this license
to continue the installation. Press space to page
through the license.
Press <enter> to view the license:
2-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Installing on a Solaris System
4 When you press [Enter], the text of the license is displayed. You can use the space bar
to page through it. When you reach the end, you are asked:
Do you agree to the above conditions? (Y/N):
5 Enter Y if you agree and want to proceed. Enter N to terminate the installation process.
This question does not have a default, you must enter Y or N.
6 Next, you are prompted for the directory where the EPICenter server software should
be installed:
Please enter the directory in which the software will be installed.
The default directory is /opt/epc3_1, but the product may be installed
anywhere.
Install Directory [/opt/epc3_1]:
Enter the directory or accept the default (/opt/epc3_1).
If you specify a directory that does not exist, you are asked whether it should be
created:
/opt/epc3_1: No such directory.
Do you wish to create it? (y/n)[y]
Assuming you want to create the directory, accept Y as the default. If you answer N, the
script will assume the directory already exists.
7 The installation script now copies and installs the EPICenter files:
Installing EPICenter files...
After copying a number of files, the following message appears:
File copy complete.
Configuring Installation.
At this point additional files are copied and the EPICenter installation tree is created,
and filled out. This will take several minutes.
When the files are complete, you are asked for a set of configuration information.
To configure EPICenter, we will need to ask you for some information.
In most case the default answers will work correctly.
8 First you are asked whether you want to upgrade from a previous installation of
ExtremeWare EPICenter. You can upgrade from EPICenter 3.0.
*** Upgrade Parameters
If there is a previous installation of EPICenter installed,
you may import the database from the previous
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-13
Installing the EPICenter Software
installation. If there is no previous install, or you would
like to start from scratch, select new installation.
Would you like to upgrade from a previous install? (Y/N) [N]:
Answer Y to upgrade.
If you answer Yes, the install script asks for the location of the previous version of
ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager.
Old install directory [/opt/epc_30]:
Accept the default or enter the actual location (full path name).
9 Next, you are asked for a license key.
*** License Key
Please enter the license key for the product.
This will be a string starting with EP followed by 12 characters.
To obtain a license (evaluation or permanent) visit the web site
http://extremenetworks.com/go/epickey.htm
Refer to the product release notes for more information on obtaining
a license key. Enter s to skip and install the license later.
Please enter the license key:
The license key is NOT the same as the activation key, which starts with “AC,” and is
found on the License Agreement shipped with your purchased product. You use the
activation key to obtain a permanent license key from the Extreme Networks web site
at http://www.extremenetworks.com/go/epickey.htm
See Chapter 1 or the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick Start Guide for
details on obtaining an evaluation or permanent license key.
If you do not yet have a key, you can still install the product, and then update the key
later using the instlic.exe utility. See “Adding or Updating a License Key” on
page 2-17.
If you have purchased the EPICenter software and an additional module such as the
Policy Manager, you can use the key you received for the optional module here. It will
enable both the EPICenter software and the additional module.
10 Next, you are asked to enter a port for communication between the Web server and the
database server:
*** Database Parameters
EPICenter will run an SQL database server on this machine.
2-14
The database
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Installing on a Solaris System
needs the name of this machine and an unused port to listen on.
Please enter the port for the database: [2638]
Accept the default (2638) for the TCP port that the EPICenter Web Server will use to
communicate with the database, or enter a different port number. You can use any port
number (a number between 1024 and 9999 is recommended) except a port number
already in use by another process.
11 You are now asked for three ports that the EPICenter Web Server will use.
*** Web Server Parameters
EPICenter runs as a web server and by default accepts HTTP requests
on port 80. You may specify an alternative. Additionally EPICenter needs
two other unused ports , one for a web administrative server and
one for internal usage. If you are not sure what to enter, the defaults
should be acceptable.
Please enter the http port for the web server: [80]
Please enter the http port for the admin web server: [8007]
Accept any or all of the default port numbers, or enter different port numbers.
You can use any port number (a number between 1024 and 9999 is recommended)
except:
— The port number you just entered for the database TCP port.
— Any port number already in use by another process.
12 Finally, you are asked to confirm the configuration parameters:
*** Configuration
Please review the following items.
Upgrade
License
Database Port
HTTP Port
HTTP Admin Port
=
=
=
=
=
NO
<the
<the
<the
<the
key you entered or “s”>
port you entered or 2638>
port you entered or 80>
port you entered or 8007>
Are these correct? (Y to accept / N to re-enter) [N]:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-15
Installing the EPICenter Software
13 If you accept the parameters by entering Y, the installation script will finish with the
following messages:
Installing License...
License installed.
Done.
Updating ./extreme/WEB-INF/web.xml
Updating ./tomcat/conf/server.xml
If you are upgrading from an earlier version of ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager, you
will also see the following:
*** Database Upgrade
Upgrading Database...
Upgrading from
Generating sql files...
Dumping data from tables in old database ...
Loading data into tables in new database ...
Database Upgrade Complete.
Next, the installation process creates a script and some symbolic links.
Adding EPICenter to /etc/init.d
Adding link from rc3.d to /etc/init.d/
Adding link from rc2.d to /etc/init.d/
14 Finally, you are given the opportunity to have the EPICenter server started for you.
Would you like to start the server now? (Y/N): n
Answer Yes to start the server immediately, or No if you want to start it at a later time.
The final messages are:
The EPICenter software installation is complete.
Once the server is running, you can run the client in
a supported web browser with the following URL:
http://<host>:<port>/
2-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Installing the EPICenter Client
INSTALL COMPLETE
<host> is the name of the system you’ve just installed on, and <port> is the HTTP port
you entered (or 80 if you accepted the default).
Adding or Updating a License Key
To update an ExtremeWare EPICenter evaluation license to a permanent license, or to
install a license key after the original software installation is complete, use the instlic
utility provided.
DO NOT reinstall the software if you have any data or configurations of value in the
EPICenter database. Re-installation will re-initialize the database.
◆ Run the installation script found in the EPICenter installation directory:
<install_dir>/instlic <key>
<install_dir> is the directory (path) where you installed the EPICenter components.
<key> is the 14-character license key, starting with “EP,” that you obtained from
Extreme Networks. Type the key exactly as it is shown in the e-mail you received from
Extreme Networks. The key is case sensitive.
For example, if you installed in the default directory, enter:
/opt/epc3_1/instlic EP1a2B3c4D5+eF
You must have write permission for the EPICenter install directory.
If the license update is successful, the message “License Installed” is displayed in the
xterm or command window.
If the update is not successful, the message “Invalid argument key : <key>” is
displayed. <key> is the license key you entered with the instlic command. Verify that
you typed the key exactly as shown in the e-mail you received from Extreme Networks.
Installing the EPICenter Client
In order to run the EPICenter client, web browser software must be installed. An
EPICenter client can run on a system with a different operating system than the EPICenter
server.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-17
Installing the EPICenter Software
• Under Windows NT, or Windows 2000, install Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 with the
Java Plug-in version 1.3.1, or Internet Explorer 5.5 with Service Pack 1 and the Java
Plug-in.
To download the latest version of Internet Explorer, go to
http://www.microsoft.com/ie/
• Under Solaris, install Netscape Navigator version 4.7x and the Java 1.3.1 plug-in.
Navigator is included in Netscape Communicator, can be downloaded from Netscape
Communications. Go to the Netscape web site at http://home.netscape.com/browsers/ for more
information. From there you can find links to download the Netscape 4.76 browser
software.
If you do not have the required Java plug-in installed when you start the EPICenter client,
you will be prompted to download it, and will be led through the brief installation process.
This obtains the plug-in from the Sun Microsystems web site, and requires Internet access.
You can also install the Java Plug-in directly from the EPICenter client Start-up page. See
Chapter 2 in the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Software User Guide for details on starting the
client and obtaining the plug-in, if needed.
Uninstalling the EPICenter Server
To uninstall the EPICenter software, you must first shut down the server components
(database and web server). Then you can remove the program components from your
system.
Uninstalling in Windows NT or Windows 2000
Under either of these Windows OPerating Systems versions, you can run the EPICenter
server components as services, or as regular applications. The uninstall procedure is
slightly different for these two situations.
To uninstall the EPICenter server software, do the following:
1 Shut down the EPICenter components if they are still running.
If they are running as services:
a From the Start menu, highlight Settings, pull right, and click on the Control Panel.
This displays the Control Panel folder.
b Double-click on Services to display the Services Properties window.
2-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
Uninstalling the EPICenter Server
c
Stop the EPICenter 3.1 Server.
d Stop the EPICenter 3.1 Database Engine.
If they are running as applications:
a Select Run... from the Start menu, or start an MS-DOS command window.
b Enter the command <EPICenter_install_dir>\stopserv.exe
<EPICenter_install_dir> is the directory (path) where you installed the
EPICenter components. If you installed in the default directory, the path is
c:\EPC3_1\
2 Display the Control Panel folder if you have not already done so. From the Start menu,
highlight Settings, pull right, and click on the Control Panel.
3 From the Control Panel folder, double-click Add/Remove Programs. This displays the
Add/Remove Program Properties window (Add/Remove Programs window under
Windows 2000).
4 From the list of installed programs, select EPICenter 3.1 and click Add/Remove (or
Change/Remove in Windows 2000). Follow the instructions to remove the component.
5 If the Add/Remove utility is not able to remove all the files, it will inform you of that
fact. You must delete them manually.
Uninstalling in Solaris
To remove the EPICenter server software from a Solaris host, stop the server using the
stopserv command, then remove the all the files in the installation directory.
To remove the EPICenter server software, follow these steps:
1 Run the stopserv command found in the root installation directory.
The installation directory is the directory (path) where you installed the EPICenter
components.
For example, if you installed in the default directory, enter:
/opt/epc3_1/stopserv
This shuts down the EPICenter server if it is running.
2 Make the parent of the installation directory the current directory, and remove all files
from the directory and its sub-directories.
For example, if you installed using the default directory path, /opt/epc3_1, enter:
cd opt
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
2-19
Installing the EPICenter Software
3 Remove all files from the installation directory tree.
For example, if you installed using the default directory path, enter:
rm -rf epc3_1
This removes all the EPICenter components, including the database, from the system.
4 The EPICenter installation created a script, EPICenter, in the /etc/init.d directory,
and links to /etc/init.d in the /etc/rc2.d and etc/rc3.d directories. You should
remove these as well:
cd /etc/init.d
rm EPICenter
cd /etc/rc2.d
rm K10EPICenter
cd /etc/rc3.d
rm S90EPICenter
The EPICenter software is now completely uninstalled.
2-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide
3
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
This chapter describes:
• Starting the ExtremeWare EPICenter Server.
• Launching an EPICenter Client.
• Navigating the EPICenter pages.
When you log in for the first time after installing the EPICenter server software, there are
only two user accounts enabled—an Administrator account “admin,” and a user account
“user” with Monitor access privileges. Neither account has a password. Follow the
instructions in Chapter 15 to change the admin password and to create additional
EPICenter user accounts.
Running the EPICenter Software under Windows
The following instructions assume that the Windows NT operating system is already
running, and that the ExtremeWare EPICenter server software is already installed.
If you have installed the EPICenter components as services under Windows NT, the
EPICenter Server and database component will start automatically when you boot the
server. This is the recommended method of installing EPICenter.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-1
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
Starting the EPICenter Server
If you have not installed the EPICenter server components as a service, you must start the
server manually after you boot your server system. You can do this from the Windows NT
Start menu.
The EPICenter Server consists of two components:
• The EPICenter Database Engine
• The EPICenter Web Server
Both components must be running in order to run the EPICenter client applets.
To start the EPICenter Server and database components, follow these steps:
1 Click Start.
2 Highlight Programs to display the Programs menu.
3 Highlight EPICenter 3.1 in the Programs menu to display the EPICenter menu.
4 Click EPICenter 3.1 Server. This runs runserv.exe, a program that starts the two
components in the required order.
Two windows are displayed briefly as the EPICenter Server starts up:
• Sybase Adaptive Server Anywhere. An icon representing this window is placed on the
right side of the Windows task bar.
• A MS-DOS window that shows the processes being started.
Shutting Down the EPICenter Server Components
There may be occasions when you need to shut down the EPICenter server, such as to
upgrade a license key from an evaluation to a permanent license, or to add an optional
module license.
If the EPICenter server components are running as services, follow these steps to shut
them down:
1 From the Start menu, highlight Settings, pull right, and click on the Control Panel. This
displays the Control Panel folder.
2 From the Control Panel folder, double-click Services. This displays the Services
Properties window. You must have NT Administrator privileges to access this function.
3 From the list of installed programs select EPICenter 3.1 Server and click Stop.
3-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Running the EPICenter Software under Solaris
4 Repeat the same actions for the EPICenter 3.1 Database Engine.
If the EPICenter server components are running as applications, follow these steps to shut
them down:
1 Select Run... from the Start menu, or start an MS-DOS command window.
2 Enter the command <EPICenter_install_dir>\stopserv.exe
<EPICenter_install_dir> is the directory (path) where you installed the EPICenter
components. If you installed in the default directory, the directory is epc3_1.
Restarting the EPICenter Server Components as Services
If you have installed the EPICenter server components as services, follow these steps to
restart them:
1 From the Start menu, highlight Settings, pull right, and click on the Control Panel. This
displays the Control Panel folder.
2 From the Control Panel folder, double-click Services. This displays the Services
Properties window. You must have NT Administrator privileges to access this function.
3 From the list of installed programs select EPICenter 3.1 Database Engine and click
Start.
4 Repeat the same action for the EPICenter 3.1 Server
5 If you want to change the start-up parameters, click Startup... instead of Start.
One situation where you might want to do this is the following: in order to import users
from an NT Domain Controller, the EPICenter 3.1 Web Server must be running with
permissions that enable it to get user information from the Domain Controller. If you do
not have those permissions as you are currently logged on, you can specify a different
log on account for the Web Server as a start-up parameter:
— In the Log On As: section of the Startup... pop up window, enter the account name
and password for a user that has the appropriate permissions to access the Domain
Controller.
Running the EPICenter Software under Solaris
The following instructions assume that you are using a command or Xterm window
running the C shell.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-3
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
Starting or Restarting the EPICenter Server
To run the EPICenter Server:
1 Set the current directory:
cd <install_dir>
<install_dir> is the directory (path) where you installed the EPICenter components.
If you installed in the default directory, the path is /opt/epc3_1.
2 Invoke runserv to start the two EPICenter components in the required order.
runserv &
Shutting Down the EPICenter Server Components
To shut down the EPICenter Server:
1 Set the current directory:
cd <install_dir>
<install_dir> is the directory (path) where you installed the EPICenter components.
If you installed in the default directory, the path is /opt/epc3_1
2 Invoke stopserv to shut down the EPICenter components in the required order.
stopserv &
This shuts down the EPICenter server if it is running.
Launching the ExtremeWare EPICenter Client
The EPICenter client user interface is a Java-based application that runs within a web
browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
• Under Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000, install Internet Explorer 5.0, or Internet
Explorer 5.5 with Service Pack 1, and the Java 1.3.1 plug-in.
• On a Solaris system, install Netscape Navigator 4.7 or later, with the 1.3.1 Java plug-in.
3-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Launching the ExtremeWare EPICenter Client
To run the EPICenter client interface:
1 Launch your web browser.
2 Enter the following URL:
http://<host>:<port>/
In the URL, replace <host> with the name of the system where the EPICenter server is
running. Replace <port> with the TCP port number that you assigned to the EPICenter
Web Server during installation.
If you used the default web server port, 80, you do not need to include the port
number.
The EPICenter Start-up page appears. Figure 3-1 shows the Start-up page in Internet
Explorer under Windows NT. The Start-up page in Netscape Navigator looks similar.
Figure 3-1: EPICenter start-up page
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-5
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
From the Start-up page you can run the EPICenter client interface, view the online
documentation, or log into the EPICenter reports module.
• To launch the EPICenter client interface, click the Launch EPICenter link. This requires
that the Java Plug-in version 1.3.1 be installed in your browser.
If the required version of the plug-in is not installed, you will be prompted to download
it, and will be led through the brief installation process. This obtains the plug-in from
the Sun Microsystems web site, and requires Internet access.
You can also install the Java Plug-in directly, if you know you do not have the correct
version installed, or if you encountered problems downloading it. Click the Get Java
PlugIn link, which will install the required version from the EPICenter server
installation. This requires access to the system where the EPICenter server is installed,
and does not require Internet access.
The EPICenter Login page appears, as shown in Figure 3-2.
• You can view a variety of reports about EPICenter devices and functions, without
requiring the Java Plug-in. Click the View Reports link to log into the EPICenter
Reports applet, which provides a number of HTML-based reports. See Chapter 12,
“Viewing Dynamic Reports,” for more information on using these reports.
• Click the View Documentation link to display the online ExtremeWare EPICenter
Software User Guide. This requires that you have a copy of Adobe’s Acrobat Reader
(version 3.0 or later) installed.
If you do not have the Acrobat Reader installed, you can download it free of charge
from Adobe’s web site, at http://www.adobe.com.
3-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Launching the ExtremeWare EPICenter Client
Figure 3-2: ExtremeWare EPICenter login page
There are two default user accounts—the Administrator account “admin,” and the
user account “user.” Initially, those accounts have no password. “User” has Monitor
access privileges.
Chapter 15, “Administering EPICenter” describes how an EPICenter Administrator
can create additional EPICenter user accounts.
To log into EPICenter:
1 If you already have an EPICenter user account, type your EPICenter user name in the
User Name field.
— If you are the network administrator logging in to the EPICenter server for the first
time since it has been installed, log in as “admin.”
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-7
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
You will be able to change the admin password (strongly recommended) and to create
additional user accounts.
— If you are a new user without your own account on the EPICenter server, type
“user” as the User Name. You will be able to view information in the various
modules, but will not be able to change any configurations.
2 Type your password in the Password field.
Both default names (“user” and “admin”) initially have no password, so you can leave
the field blank.
3 Click Login.
If you are using an evaluation copy of the EPICenter, a dialog box appears notifying
you how much longer the copy is valid.
Click OK.
The HTML Network Summary Report page appears.
4 If you are loading the client for the first time, a Java Plug-in Security Warning pop-up
will appear, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3: Java Plug-inSecurity Warning
This allows you to specifically accept loading of the EPICenter java applets on your
system.
If the browser appears to freeze after the Network Summary Report Page
appears, but before any applet icons appear in the left-hand column, check to
see if the security warning window is hidden behind the browser.
To allow the EPICenter applets to be loaded, click one of the Grant buttons:
3-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Launching the ExtremeWare EPICenter Client
— Grant this session will allow the installation of the applets for this browser session
only. You will have to grant permission for every applet every time you run the
client.
— Deny will prevent the EPICenter applets from being loaded. You will still be able to
view the Network Summary Reports, but will not be able to access any EPICenter
applets.
— Grant always indicates that you always want to load the EPICenter applets. This
warning will not be displayed in the future.
Assuming you grant the session, the Navigation buttons for the EPICenter applets will
appear in the left-hand panel alongside the Network Summary Report page, as shown
in Figure 3-4.
If you have problems with the client display the first time you try to run EPICenter
after installing it, try clearing all browser cache (both memory and disk), then closing
and re-opening the browser.
Figure 3-4: The Network Summary Report page
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-9
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
This page displays a simple HTML report with some basic statistics on the status of your
network. Click on the values in the right-hand column to display a detail report about a
specific status item. From this summary report you can view the following reports:
• Summary status of all the devices known to the EPICenter server.
• Summary status of the devices known to the EPICenter server that are not responding.
• A summary of alarm definitions that include severity levels of Critical or Major.
• A summary of critical alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours.
• A summary of critical alarms in the last 24 hours that have not been acknowledged.
• A summary of SNMP Unreachable alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours.
• A summary of Invalid Login alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours.
• A summary of Authentication Failure alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours.
• Summary information on all VLANs being managed by the EPICenter server.
The Network Summary Report can also be accessed from the Reports applet. See
Chapter 16, “Dynamic Reports” for a more detailed discussion of these reports.
From the bottom of the Network Summary Report panel you can navigate to the About
EPICenter page.
The About EPICenter page, shown in Figure 3-6, provides information about the version
of EPICenter that you are running. This information may be needed if it becomes necessary
for you to contact Extreme Networks’ Technical Support.
3-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
Figure 3-5: The About EPICenter page
From this page you can do the following:
• Access the online ExtremeWare EPICenter Software User Guide.
• Send e-mail to Extreme Networks’ technical support organization.
• Return to the Network Summary Report page.
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
The EPICenter client consists of two frames, as shown in Figure 3-6:
• The Navigation Toolbar, from which you can access the EPICenter applets
• The Main Applet frame, where the currently active applet runs.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-11
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
Navigation Toolbar
Main applet frame
Figure 3-6: The EPICenter Home page
The Navigation Toolbar
The Navigation Toolbar, on the left, displays a set of buttons you can use to access various
EPICenter modules. The buttons that appear in this Toolbar may be a subset of those listed
here, depending on whether you have licensed additional modules, such as the EPICenter
Policy Manager, or are running in scalability mode, which disables certain modules.
• Home returns you to the Network Summary Report display shown in Figure 3-6. From
this page, you can access the About EPICenter page.
3-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
• Inventory runs the Inventory Manager, where you can discover devices on your
network, and set up device groups and port groups so you can manage network
elements in sets rather than individually.
• Alarm runs the Alarm Manager, where you can view and browse alarms that have
occurred on your network devices, as well as define alarms and the actions that should
occur when an alarm happens. This button also indicates that a new alarm has been
received by displaying its label in red text instead of black text.
• Config runs the Configuration Manager, where you can upload and download switch
configuration files, and download ExtremeWare software to your switches.
• Telnet runs an interactive Telnet application where you can create and run
command-line macros on multiple devices in one operation. You can also establish
telnet sessions with individual switches, both Extreme Networks and third-party
devices.
• Group runs the Grouping applet.
• Find IP/MAC runs the IP/MAC Address Finder applet, where you can search for the
ports associated with one or more MAC or IP addresses, or identify the IP or MAC
addresses connected to a set of ports.
• EView runs the ExtremeView applet, where you can view status and statistics about
your managed devices, and do Extreme device configuration through Extreme
Networks’ interactive web-based device interface, ExtremeView Vista.
• RT Stats runs the Real Time statistics applet, that provides graphs of various device and
port statistics. This applet is not available in scalability mode.
• Topology runs the Topology applet, which gives you a hierarchical, logical map-based
view of your network topology. This applet is not available in scalability mode.
• VLAN runs the VLAN Manager, where you can set up and manage VLANs.
• ESRP runs the ESRP Manager, which lets your view the status of your ESRP-enabled
switches and VLANs.
• Admin runs the Administration module, where a user with Administrator access can
administer EPICenter user accounts and the RADIUS server. Other users can change
their own password using this applet.
• Reports runs the Dynamic Reports module, where you can run a number of
pre-defined HTML-based reports from data in EPICenter’s inventory database. You
can also define your own reports.
• Logoff ends your session and returns you to the Login display.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-13
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
Note that you must have Administrator or Manager access in order to use most of
the functions of these applets. Users with Monitor access will be able to view status,
statistics etc., but will not be able to set up or change EPICenter or device
configurations.
In addition to the applets described above, the Navigation Toolbar may include icons for
other optional applications that have been integrated into the EPICenter server. These
modules or products are typically purchased separately, and enabled via special license
keys. Documentation for these modules is provided separately from the main EPICenter
documentation. These include:
• Policy runs the EPICenter Policy Manager, where you can define QoS policies and
access list rules for implementation on Extreme Networks and Cisco devices. This
applet is an optional module that is licensed separately. It requires the installation of a
separate license key.
• ServiceWatch runs the EPICenter ServiceWatch software within the EPICenter client
browser. ServiceWatch is not an EPICenter module, but a separate product. You can
enable the integration into the EPICenter Navigation Toolbar through the Server
Properties pages in the EPICenter Administration applet.
Main Applet Frame
The main applet frame is used to display the active EPICenter applet. For example, in
Figure 3-7, the VLAN Manager is displayed in the main applet frame.
3-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
Applet
function
buttons
Component Tree
Component status/detail
Figure 3-7: VLAN Manager applet running in a browser window
EPICenter applets use a two-panel display within the main applet frame. The two panels
are:
• The Component Tree.
• A component status/detail information panel.
In addition, some applets provide an applet-specific set of buttons at the top of the main
applet frame. These provide access to specific applet functions, such as adding, deleting, or
configuring components managed by the applet.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-15
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
The Component Tree
The left side panel shows the Component Tree. The Component Tree is a nested tree that
displays the components known to the EPICenter database that are relevant to the active
module. The Component Tree displays different sets of components depending on which
EPICenter module you are viewing.
For example, in the Inventory Manager, the Component Tree shows all the Extreme and
third-party devices known to the EPICenter. In the VLAN Manager, the Component Tree
displays VLANs, as shown in Figure 3-7. In the Topology view, the Component Tree shows
the nested maps within a topology view.
If a component in the tree has a plus sign to its left, that means there are subcomponents
nested below it. For example, if the component is a VLAN, then it has Extreme switches as
subcomponents. The switches, in turn, have ports as subcomponents.
◆ Click on the plus sign to display the nested subcomponents.
The plus sign changes to a minus sign.
◆ Click on the minus sign to hide the subcomponent list.
The Status/Detail Information Panel
The right side panel displays information about the component selected in the tree on the
left. For example, Figure 3-8 shows the Inventory Manager applet, with basic information
about the devices known to the EPICenter.
3-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
Column
heading
separators
Figure 3-8: Inventory Manager applet
◆ Click on a component in the Component Tree to display information about that
component.
In Figure 3-8, the selected component is the Default device group. The component
status/detail panel displays summary status information about each device in this device
group.
A red circle with the white “S” next to a device indicates that the device is not reachable
through SNMP. This indicator may appear in any of the applets where a list of switches is
displayed.
The buttons and frame contents change depending on which applet you are viewing, and
also on the permissions associated with your user account.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-17
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
Moving the Component Tree Boundary
You can move the boundary between the Component Tree panel and the main applet panel
by following these steps:
1 Place the cursor over the line separating the panels.
2 Click and hold the left mouse button to “grab” the panel separator.
3 Drag the separator until the panels are the desired widths.
Resizing and Sorting Columns
In a wide columnar display such as shown in Figure 3-8, you can resize the widths of each
column. To do this, follow these steps:
1 Place the cursor over the line separating the column you want to resize from the column
to its right.
2 Click and hold the left mouse button to “grab” the column separator.
3 Drag the separator until the column is are the desired width.
You can sort the rows of a columnar display according to the contents of any individual
column.
◆ To sort the rows, click on the column heading you want to use as the sort criteria. Click
once to sort in ascending order; click a second time to reverse the sort order.
In most applets, the column that is currently being used as the sort criteria is indicated with
a small triangle in the cell with the column heading. The direction of the triangle (facing up
or facing down) indicates whether the sort is ascending or descending.
Applet Function Buttons
For most EPICenter applets, stand-alone buttons at the top of the applet frame provide
access to the functions provided by the current applet. Each button invokes a pop-up
dialog box for the function, as shown in Figure 3-9.
If you have Monitor access, some or all of the buttons in a given applet are not
available to you. For example, in the VLAN Manager, a user with Monitor access
can view information about the components in the Component Tree, but cannot
Add, Delete, or Modify VLANs, or perform any port configurations.
3-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Navigating the EPICenter Applications
Figure 3-9: Pop-up dialog box for adding a VLAN in the VLAN Manager
A dialog box can contain the following types of fields:
• Page tabs, such as the Properties & Port and IP Forwarding tabs in Figure 3-9. These are
used when there are multiple pages of settings for a specific function. Clicking a tab
displays its page.
• Text fields, such as the VLAN Name field in Figure 3-9. Enter text or numbers by
clicking in the field and then typing.
To clear a value from a text field, highlight the value with the cursor and press the Del
or Backspace key on the keyboard. You can also highlight the value and just type a new
value over the old one.
• Drop-down menu fields, such as the Protocol Filter field in Figure 3-9. Click in the field to
drop down a menu of choices, then click on your selection to enter the value into the
field.
• List box fields, such as the Available Switches field in Figure 3-9. Click to highlight a
value in the field. Click again to unselect a value.
If there are more entries in the list than can be displayed in the box, a scrollbar is
provided at the right side of the field.
Some list boxes allow multiple selections. Simply click on multiple items to select them.
You can also use [Shift]-click to select the first and last items in a group of contiguous
items; all the items between your first and last selection will be highlighted.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-19
Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter
To have the settings you’ve entered take effect, many dialog boxes provide an Apply
button. This saves the settings on the page you are viewing, but the dialog box remains
open so you can make additional changes or change the settings on one of the other pages.
For example, you can specify a new VLAN on the Properties & Ports page as shown in
Figure 3-9, click Apply to commit those settings, then display the IP Forwarding settings
and make changes on that page.
Other dialog boxes may provide a button that executes the function of the dialog, such as
Add, or Delete. Like the Apply button, these often perform the function but leave the
dialog box open so you can perform additional operations.
Most dialog boxes also provide a Close button you can use to exit the dialog box when you
are finished.
In addition, most dialog boxes provide a Reset button. This typically restores the dialog
box to the state it was in when it was invoked, clearing any selections on the screen and
resetting the data to the current information from the EPICenter database.
Printing from EPICenter
Printing is not supported in most of the EPICenter applets. The exceptions are the RT Stats
and Topology applets, which each provide a print function, and the HTML-based reports
(the Network Summary report and the Reports described in Chapter 15.
You can print the HTML reports using the browser print button. However, you should
click in the panel where the report is displayed to ensure that only that panel will be
printed. If you print without doing this, the Navigation Toolbar may not be refreshed, and
you will need to refresh the client manually.
Running the EPICenter Server in Scalable Mode
Scalable mode allows you to manage a very large number of devices using the EPICenter
server while still maintaining reasonable response and performance. The trade-off is that
some of the EPICenter applets described later in this chapter will not be available in
Scalable Mode. These include:
• ExtremeView
• Real-Time Statistics
• Topology
3-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Running the EPICenter Server in Scalable Mode
• VLAN Manager
• ESRP Manager
• Policy Manager (an optional, separately-licensed module)
To set EPICenter into Scalable Mode, you must log into the client, set the Scalable Mode
property to enable scalability (it is disabled by default), and then stop and restart the
EPICenter server. The steps to do this are as follows:
1 Launch the ExtremeWare EPICenter client, following the instructions in the section
“Launching the ExtremeWare EPICenter Client” on page 3-4.
2 Click the Admin button in the Navigation Toolbar to launch the Admin applet.
3 Click the Server Properties tab, then select Scalability from the pull-down menu (for
more detailed instructions, see Chapter 15, “Administering EPICenter.”
4 Click the checkbox to enable Scalable Mode.
5 From the Navigation Toolbar, click Logoff to exit the EPICenter client.
6 Follow the instructions in the sections earlier in this chapter on shutting down and
restarting the EPICenter server.
For Windows NT or 2000, see “Shutting Down the EPICenter Server Components” on
page 3-2 and “Starting the EPICenter Server” on page 3-2. If you are running the
EPICenter server components as services, see “Restarting the EPICenter Server
Components as Services” on page 3-3.
For Solaris, see “Shutting Down the EPICenter Server Components” on page 3-4 and
“Starting or Restarting the EPICenter Server” on page 3-3.
When the EPICenter server restarts, it will be running in Scalable Mode, and the icons will
be greyed out in the Navigation Toolbar for the applets that are not supported in Scalable
Mode.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
3-21
4
Using the Inventory Manager
This chapter describes how to use the ExtremeWare EPICenter Inventory Manager applet
for:
• Viewing the EPICenter device inventory
• Discovering network devices
• Adding network devices to the EPICenter database
• Modifying device contact parameters
• Deleting a device from the EPICenter database
• Updating device information in the database
• Finding specific network devices in the database
Overview of the EPICenter Device Inventory
The Inventory Manager applet keeps a database of all the network devices managed by
EPICenter. EPICenter can discover any devices running MIB-2 compatible agents. It can
manage Extreme switches, and a number of third-party devices.
The EPICenter software provides an automatic discovery function. This feature can
discover Extreme and MIB-2 compatible devices by specific IP address or within a range of
IP addresses.
You can also add network devices to the EPICenter database manually, using the Inventory
Manager Add function. Once a network device is known to the EPICenter database, you
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-1
Using the Inventory Manager
can assign it to a specific device group, and configure it using the Inventory Manager,
VLAN Manager, Configuration Manager, Interactive Telnet, ExtremeView, or the optional
Policy Manager. You can receive alarms about faults on the device, and you can view a
hierarchical topology layout of the devices known to the Inventory Manager.
Any EPICenter user can view status information about the network devices currently
known to EPICenter. Users with Administrator or Manager access can run Discovery, and
add devices to or delete devices from the list of managed devices in the database. These
users can also explicitly refresh the information in the database related to the devices that
the EPICenter is managing.
Device Groups
Devices in the EPICenter are organized into one or more device groups. A device group is a
set of network devices that have something in common, and that can be managed as a
group. For example, devices might be grouped by physical location (Building 1, Building
2, first floor, second floor) or by functional grouping (engineering, marketing, finance) or
by any other criteria that makes sense within the managed network environment.
An individual device must belong to one, and only one, device group. All devices become
members of a device group when they are added to the EPICenter database, either through
Add Devices or as a part of the Discovery process. By default, devices are added to the
device group “Default,” if you do not specify otherwise. A device may then be moved to
another device group as appropriate.
Gathering Device Status Information
The EPICenter retrieves information about the devices it manages in several ways:
• EPICenter uses SNMP polling for the IP addresses specified in a Discovery request to
retrieve the status information needed by the various EPICenter applets.
• When a switch is added manually to the EPICenter database, EPICenter uses SNMP to
retrieve status information needed by the various EPICenter applets.
• Extreme switches send SmartTraps to EPICenter whenever a change occurs in a switch
status variable in which the EPICenter has registered interest. These include changes to
operating variables as well as configuration changes made through other management
entities such as the switch command line interface or ExtremeWare Vista.
These traps are based on a set of SmartTraps rules that the Inventory Manager creates
on the switch when it is added to the switch inventory. The rules tell the switch what
events or changes EPICenter wants to be notified about. The rules are created on the
4-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying the Network Device Inventory
switch using SNMP. EPICenter also adds itself on the switch as a trap receiver. The
switch uses the SmartTraps rules to determine what traps to send to EPICenter.
When EPICenter receives a trap from a switch, it then polls the switch for detailed
status information.
• EPICenter polls every network device periodically (approximately every five minutes
by default) to update basic switch status, which is a subset of the status and
configuration information kept in the database. This poll interval is set globally for all
devices being managed by the EPICenter server, and can be changed through the
Server Properties settings in the Administration applet. See “Server Properties
Administration” in Chapter 15.
• The EPICenter server polls each device periodically for detailed status information.
This is done much less frequently than the basic status polling—by default, once every
30 minutes for core (chassis) devices, and once every 90 minutes for edge devices. This
poll interval can be set individually for devices through the Modify Device interface in
the Inventory applet (see the discussion “Modifying a Device” on page 4-18).
• A user with Administrator or Manager access can use the Sync command from the
Inventory Manager. Sync is a manual update of the regular data gathering
mechanisms, for use when the users believes that the device configuration or status is
not correctly reported in EPICenter applets. Sync causes EPICenter to poll the switch
and update all configuration and status information. During a Sync operation the
SmartTraps rules are also reset in case the user has accidentally deleted the trap receiver
or any SmartTrap rules.
Displaying the Network Device Inventory
When you click the Inventory button in the Navigation Toolbar, the main Inventory
Manager page appears as shown in Figure 4-1.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-3
Using the Inventory Manager
Figure 4-1: The Inventory Manager applet, main page
You must add network devices to the database using Discovery or the Add Devices
function in order to make them “known” to the EPICenter. Until this is done, no
devices are displayed in the Inventory Manager.
The Device Groups currently defined in the EPICenter database are displayed in the
Component Tree in the left panel.
The panel on the right shows the All Device Groups page, a list of the currently defined
device groups with their descriptions.
The first time you run EPICenter, there is only one device group, Default. You cannot
delete or change the name of the Default device group.
4-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Device Status Information
Click on the plus sign to the left of a Device Group name to display the list of switches that
are members of that group.
A red circle with a white “S” next to a device indicates that the device is not reachable
through SNMP.
The buttons at the top of the page provide the following functions:
• Discover lets you find network devices by IP address or range of addresses
• Add lets you add individual devices and device groups to the database
• Delete removes a device or device group from the database
• Modify lets you change the members of a device group, or update a device’s contact
parameters in the database
• Sync updates the EPICenter database with current device configuration and status
information
• Find searches for devices by name, IP address, or device type, and returns information
such as the device group to which the device belongs.
• Help displays an on-line help page for the Inventory Manager
Viewing Device Status Information
When you select a device group in the Component Tree, the panel on the right displays a
summary status of the devices in the selected device group (see Figure 4-2).
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-5
Using the Inventory Manager
Figure 4-2: Inventory Manager device group summary status
• The status “lights” show the status of each device as detected by EPICenter.
Table 4-1: Inventory Manager Device Status Indicators
Status Light
Green
Yellow
Red
4-6
Device Status
Device is up and OK
Device is responding, but reports an error condition such as a fan or
power supply failure, or excessive temperature
Device is not responding to EPICenter status queries. This may mean
that the device is down, that it is unreachable on the network, or that the
SNMP community strings have changed and EPICenter can no longer
contact the switch.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Device Status Information
• The name and type of the device are detected by EPICenter.
• The IP address and read/write community strings are also detected by the EPICenter
discovery, or are those entered into the EPICenter database manually if the switch was
added using the Add command.
Select a switch in the Component Tree on the left to display detailed configuration and
status information, as shown in Figure 4-3. This display shows additional information that
EPICenter has gathered from the switch agent.
Figure 4-3: Inventory Manager device status information
The information displayed in Figure 4-3 is for an Extreme switch. The ExtremeWare
software running in the switch provides comprehensive status information through the
Extreme MIB. Figure 4-4 show the information displayed for a Cisco device—a subset of
the information available for an Extreme device.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-7
Using the Inventory Manager
Figure 4-4: Inventory Manager information for a 3Com device
You can select a device group or a device in the Component Tree, then right-click to display
a pop-up menu that contains the Modify, Delete, and Sync commands. These perform the
same functions as the buttons at the top of the page, but with the appropriate device or
device group displayed.
Discovering Network Devices
EPICenter provides an automatic Discovery function that lets you discover network
devices by IP address.
To discover network devices, do the following:
4-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Discovering Network Devices
1 Click the Discovery button at the top of the Inventory Manager main window.
The Discover Devices window, shown in Figure 4-5, is displayed.
Figure 4-5: Inventory Manager Device Discovery set up window
2 Click the appropriate boxes to select the types of devices you want to include in the
discovery. You can discover Extreme devices only, or all devices with MIB-2 compatible
agents.
3 Specify the device address range you want to discover. You may specify the range in
one of two ways:
— As an IP Address with Wildcards (such as 10.203.10.* or 10.203.?.??)
Valid wildcard characters are *, ?, and - (dash):
* acts as a wildcard for the entire octet (0-255)
? is a wildcard for a single digit (0-9)
- lets you specify a range for any octet. You can use this in more than one octet
You cannot combine the dash with another wildcard in the same octet.
You can also use the IP Address with Wildcards field to specify a single IP address.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-9
Using the Inventory Manager
Examples:
IP Address Specification
Addresses Generated
10.203.0.*
polls 10.203.0.0 through 10.203.0.255
10.203.?.??
polls 10.203.0.0 through 10.203.9.99
0.203.0.1? or 10.203.0.10-19
both specify the same range: 10.203.0.10 through
10.203.0.19
10.203.0-2.10-30
polls
10.203.0.10 through 10.203.0.30
10.203.1.10 through 10.203.1.30
10.203.2.10 through 10.203.2.30
— As an IP address Range (such as 10.203.10.20 to 10.203.10.45)
There are certain IP addresses that are reserved. You should not include these
addresses in your discovery.
• Class A networks: 0 and 127 are reserved.
• Class D networks: 224 - 239 are reserved for multicasting.
• All addresses above 239 are reserved.
• 255 is reserved for broadcast datagrams for either the host or network
portion of the IP address.
In addition, certain host addresses may be interpreted as broadcast
addresses, depending on the subnetting of your network.
IP addresses are processed prior to starting the discovery, and IP addresses
that contain 255's in the host portion are eliminated. This is based on the IP
address as well as the subnet mask.
4 Specify (or verify) the Subnet Mask size as appropriate. The value in the Subnet Mask
field is the number of bits to be masked, starting from the high-order (left-hand) octet.
The default subnet mask of 24 will mask the three high-order octets.
5 Specify (or verify) the SNMP Read Community string so that EPICenter will be able to
retrieve information from any devices it discovers.
6 Click the New button to add the range into the Device Discovery Criteria list.
7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to specify any additional device addresses or ranges for the
discovery.
4-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Discovering Network Devices
8 If necessary, you can remove an address range from the Device Discovery Criteria list
at any time before you initiate the discovery by selecting the range and clicking the
Remove button.
You can remove all address ranges using the Reset button at the bottom of the page.
9 Click the Discover button at the bottom of the window to initiate the discovery.
If the discovery criteria results in a discovery of more than 1500 devices, a dialog
appears informing you of the number of items in your search request, and asking you
for confirmation. Click Yes to proceed or No to refine the discovery criteria.
If a discovery request is too large, your browser may not have sufficient memory
resources available to handle it. It is recommended that you break a large
discovery task into multiple separate tasks.
A Discovery Results window is displayed as soon as the discovery process begins, as
shown in Figure 4-6. The panel at the bottom of the window shows the progress of the
discovery and displays status messages for each device it finds as it works through the
set of IP addresses you have specified.
Figure 4-6: Results of a discovery, with details visible
— Click the Hide Details button at the bottom of this window to hide the detail
display.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-11
Using the Inventory Manager
— Click View Details to re-display the discovery details.
When the discovery has completed, the set of discovered devices is listed in the top
panel of the Discovery Results window.
These devices are NOT automatically entered into the EPICenter database. You
must explicitly select and add devices to the database.
10 To add devices to the ExtremeWare EPICenter database, select individual devices or a
range of devices in the Results list, and click the Add button at the bottom of the
window.
If you select multiple devices, make sure the devices you select are similarly
configured. As part of the Add process, you will be asked for a single password
that will apply to all the selected devices. If the password is specified incorrectly
for any of these devices, the add will fail for those devices.
11 A window pops up where you must set additional device options such as a write
community string, the device group to which the devices should be added, and a
default device login and password (see Figure 4-7). If there are Cisco devices among the
set being added, you must also enter a Cisco enable password.
Enter or make changes to any of these fields. These options will apply to the entire set
of devices you are adding.
Make sure the device passwords are correct for the selected devices. If you are
adding multiple devices in one operation, make sure the passwords you specify
are correct for each device. A device cannot be added if the password is not
correct.
Figure 4-7: Setting default device options for discovered devices
4-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Discovering Network Devices
12 Click OK to proceed with the Add process.
A message window (shown in Figure 4-8) pops up to show you the progress of the Add
command.
Figure 4-8: Message window showing Add Device progress
Devices are listed followed by a small purple rotating clock icon
is in progress.
while the add function
• When a device has been successfully added, the clock turns into a green checkbox
• If the device cannot be added, the clock turns into a red X in the checkbox
device name is displayed in red.
.
and the
The indicators just below the tree area of the window show the number of devices
currently in each state.
To see the messages related to an Add function (either successful or unsuccessful), select a
device in the list. The messages related to the device are displayed as lines under the device
node, as shown in Figure 4-9.
• Click the plus sign at the left of the device name to display server messages related to
adding the device.
• Click the minus sign at the left of the device to hide the server messages.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-13
Using the Inventory Manager
• The up and down arrow buttons let you move up and down the device tree, displaying
the server messages associated with each device.
• If you check the Errors Only box, the up and down arrow buttons will expand only
devices that had errors.
• The Collapse All button collapses all the device nodes, hiding all the server messages.
Figure 4-9: Message window showing errors from the Add Device process
If you close the Discovery Results window without adding devices, the results for
devices not already in the ExtremeWare EPICenter database are lost. You must
perform a discovery again to regenerate information on those devices.
After the Add has finished, the Discovery Results window is re-displayed. You can select
more devices and specify a different set of Inventory Device Options, and add those
devices to the Inventory Manager.
Adding Devices and Device Groups
Users with Administrator or Manager access can add devices to the EPICenter database,
and create Device Groups. If you have Monitor access only, you may not use this function.
4-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding Devices and Device Groups
Adding a Device
1 Click the Add button at the top of the Inventory Manager main window.
Select the appropriate tab to display the Add Device window, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10: Add Device window in the Inventory Manager
2 Enter the device IP address, community strings, device login and password into the
appropriate fields. These are the parameters that EPICenter uses to access the switch.
You may also enter a DNS-resolvable host name in place of the Switch IP address.
3 Select the device group to which this device should belong. It can belong to only one
device group. Default is the default group for managed devices.
4 To clear the contents of the fields and reset them to their default values, click Reset.
5 To add the new device into the database, click Add.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-15
Using the Inventory Manager
When you click Add, the Inventory Manager adds the devices to the database. It makes a
set of SNMP requests to retrieve data that is needed from the devices by EPICenter applets.
If the device is an Extreme switch, it also creates a set of SmartTraps rules that tell the
switch what status and configuration changes are of interest to EPICenter.
Creating a Device Group
Device groups are sets of managed network devices that have something in common, and
that can be managed as a group. For example, devices might be grouped by physical
location (Building 1, Building 2, first floor, second floor), by department (engineering,
marketing, finance), or by any other criteria that makes sense within the managed network
environment.
Every device belongs to one, and only one, device group. All devices become members of
a device group when they are added to the EPICenter database, either through Add
Devices or as a part of the Discovery process. A device may then be moved to another
device group as appropriate.
One device group may contain a maximum of 100 devices.
To create a new device group, follow these steps:
1 Click the Add button at the top of the Inventory Manager main window.
Select the appropriate tab to display the Device Groups window, as shown in
Figure 4-11.
4-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding Devices and Device Groups
Figure 4-11: Add Device Group window in the Inventory Manager
2 Type a name for the device group into the Device Group Name field, and a description
(optional) into the Device Group Description field.
3 To add a device to the selected device group, select the device in the Available Devices
list and click Add ->. To add all devices in the Available Devices list, click Add All ->.
4 To remove a device from the device group, select the device in the Included Devices list,
and click <- Remove. The device will be moved from the selected device group to the
Default device group. To return all devices in the Included Devices list to the Default
device group, click <- Remove All.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have included all the devices that should be members of
this device group.
6 To add the list of newly created device groups to the database, click the Add button at
the bottom of the window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-17
Using the Inventory Manager
Modifying Devices and Device Groups
You can use the Modify function to modify the access parameters for an individual device,
or to add and delete members of a device group. Users with Administrator or Manager
access can modify device contact information and device groups.
If you have Monitor access only, you cannot use this function.
Modifying a Device
You can begin the modify function using the Modify button on the toolbar, or by selecting
a device in the Component Tree, right-clicking to display the pop-up menu, and selecting
Modify Device.
To modify the contact information for a managed device in the database, do the following:
1 Click the Modify button at the top of the Inventory Manager main page.
Select the appropriate tab to display the Modify Device window, as shown in
Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12: Devices tab of the Modify Devices and Device Groups window
4-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Modifying Devices and Device Groups
2 Select the device for which you want to change contact information.
3 Enter the changed information in the appropriate fields.
The Device Login and Device Contact Password are the login and password needed in
order to Telnet to the device or to use ExtremeWare Vista.
The Device Poll Interval lets you specify how frequently the EPICenter server should
poll the for detailed device information, such as software version, bootrom version, and
so on. This also includes EDP and ESRP information for non-”i” series devices. To avoid
a potentially large amount of polling traffic, this detailed polling is only done every 30
minutes for core (chassis) devices, and every 90 minutes for edge devices. You can
change this detailed polling interval by entering a different value in this field.
Note that the Device Poll Interval set here is different from the global Poll Interval
you can set in the Administration applet. The global poll interval controls the
basic status polling needed to ensure SNMP reachability, and is typically done
much more frequently than detailed device polling.
4 Click Modify to add the changed information to the ExtremeWare EPICenter database.
5 Click Cancel to cancel the Modify process.
If you change the community string for a device so that it no longer matches the
string configured in the device, EPICenter will no longer be able to communicate
with the device. For Extreme devices, EPICenter will display an error message, but
it will not necessarily do so for third-party devices. To avoid this problem, change the
community string on the device first, then change it in EPICenter.
Modifying a Device Group
Devices are always a member of a device group; devices not explicitly assigned to another
device group are members of the Default device group. This has two effects related to
modifying device groups:
• When devices are removed from a device group, they are automatically added to the
Default device group
• Devices cannot be removed from the Default device group using the Remove button in
the Modify dialog. To remove a device from the default device group, you must add it
to another device group.
You can begin the modify function using the Modify button on the toolbar, or by selecting
a device group in the Component Tree, right-clicking to display the pop-up menu, and
selecting Modify Device Group.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-19
Using the Inventory Manager
To add or remove devices in a device group, do the following:
1 Click the Modify button at the top of the Inventory Manager main page.
Select the appropriate tab to display the Modify Device Group window, as shown in
Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13: Device Groups tab of the Modify Devices and Device Groups window
2 Select the device group you want to modify. The Included Devices list displays the
devices that are currently members of this group. The Available Devices list displays
the other devices known to EPICenter, and their current device group membership.
3 To change the name or description of the group, type the new text into the Device
Group Name and Description fields.
4 To add a device to the selected device group, select the device in the Available Devices
list and click Add ->. To add all devices in the Available Devices list, click Add All ->.
5 To remove a device from the device group and return it to the Default device group,
select the device in the Included Devices list, and click <- Remove. The device will be
moved from the selected device group to the Default device group. To return all devices
in the Included Devices list to the Default device group, click <- Remove All.
4-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Deleting Devices and Device Groups from the Database
Because devices not otherwise assigned are members of the Default device group, you
cannot remove devices from the Defeat device group. Devices are removed from the
Default device group only when they are added to another device group.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have included all the devices that should be members of
this device group.
The Reset button will undo all your add and remove actions, and return both the
Available Devices and Included Devices lists to the state they were in when you
started the Modify command.
7 To replace the modified device group in the database, click the Modify button at the
bottom of the window.
Moving a device from one device group to another requires two steps. First, remove it from
its current device group (returning it to the Default group). Then select the new device
group, and move the device from the Default device group to the new group.
Deleting Devices and Device Groups from the
Database
Users with Administrator or Manager access can delete devices and device groups from
the EPICenter database. If you have Monitor access only, you cannot access this function.
Deleting a Device
You can begin the delete function using the Delete button on the toolbar, or by selecting a
device in the Component Tree, right-clicking to display the pop-up menu, and selecting
Delete Device.
To delete a device from the EPICenter database, follow these steps:
1 Click the Delete button at the top of the Inventory Manager main page.
Select the appropriate tab to display the Delete Devices window (see Figure 4-14).
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-21
Using the Inventory Manager
Figure 4-14: Devices tab of the Delete Devices and Device Groups window
2 To select a device from a specific device group, select the device group from the
pull-down list in the Filter by Device Group field. Select All to view the list of all
devices from all device groups.
3 Select one or more devices in the Devices list, and click Delete.
4 Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the device information from the database.
Deleting a device removes the information about the device from the EPICenter database.
This means that the device can no longer be monitored and managed from the EPICenter
application. If the device is an Extreme switch, deleting it removes any SmartTraps rules,
both from the database and the switch change table. It also removes all information about
VLANs, QoS Policy, and Virtual Chassis connections associated with this switch from the
EPICenter database.
Deleting a device from EPICenter has no effect on the configuration of the device
itself.
4-22
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Deleting Devices and Device Groups from the Database
Deleting a Device Group
You can begin the delete function using the Delete button on the toolbar, or by selecting a
device in the Component Tree, right-clicking to display the pop-up menu, and selecting
Delete Device Group.
To delete a device group from the EPICenter database, follow these steps:
1 Click the Delete button at the top of the Inventory Manager main page.
Select the appropriate tab to display the Delete Device Groups window (see
Figure 4-15).
Figure 4-15: Device Groups tab of the Delete Devices and Device Groups window
2 Select one or more device groups in the Device Groups list, and click Delete.
3 Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the device group information from the
database.
The devices in the deleted device group automatically become members of the Default
device group.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-23
Using the Inventory Manager
Updating Device Information
Occasionally, you may want to update the configuration and status information for one or
more devices in the EPICenter database. The Sync operation is a manual update you can
use if you believe that the device configuration is not correctly represented in EPICenter
applets. It updates all information for a selected set of devices, except for the contact
information.
If you have Administrator or Manager access to EPICenter, you can perform a Sync. If you
have Monitor access only, you can not use this function.
You can begin the synchronize function using the Sync button on the toolbar, or by
selecting a device or device group in the Component Tree, right-clicking to display the
pop-up menu, and selecting the Sync command.
To refresh the configuration and status information, follow these steps:
1 Click Sync at the top of the Inventory Manager page.
The Synchronize Devices dialog, shown in Figure 4-16, is displayed, listing the devices
in the EPICenter database.
Figure 4-16: Synchronize Devices dialog
4-24
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Finding Devices
2 To select a device from a specific device group, select the device group from the
pull-down list in the Filter by Device Group field. Select All to view the list of all
devices from all device groups.
3 Select one or more devices in the Device list.
4 Click Reset at any time prior to initiating the Sync to deselect all device selections and
start over.
5 Click Sync to initiate the synchronization process.
The Inventory Manager uses SNMP to retrieve configuration and status information
from each selected switch, and updates the database with that information.
6 The Sync function displays a dialog box with status or error information. Click OK to
continue.
Finding Devices
You can search for a device in the EPICenter database by name, by IP address, or by type
of device. This may be useful if you have a large number of devices in your inventory.
To search for a device, follow these steps:
1 Click Find at the top of the Inventory Manager page.
The Find Devices dialog, shown in Figure 4-17, is displayed.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-25
Using the Inventory Manager
Figure 4-17: Find Devices dialog
2 Enter your search criteria:
You can search for devices by name or by IP address. You can limit the search to a
specific device group, or to a specific type of Extreme device. Search criteria can
include:
— A device name. Click the Device Name button, and enter a complete or partial name
in the Search: field.
— An IP address. Click the IP Address button and enter a complete or partial IP
address in the Search: field. You can use the wild card characters * or ? in your
search criteria.
* acts as a wildcard for an entire octet (0-255)
? is a wildcard for a single digit (0-9)
— A device group. Select the device group from the drop-down menu in the device
group field. If you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices
in the device group you select will be found.
— A device type. Select the device type from the drop-down menu in the type field. If
you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices of the type
you select will be found.
4-26
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Finding Devices
3 Click Find to search for devices that meet the criteria you have specified. All devices
found are listed in the center panel. Information includes the device group in which the
device can be found, its name, IP address, and the type of device.
4 Double-click on a device in the results table to highlight the device in the Component
Tree, and to display the associated status information for that device (see “Viewing
Device Status Information” on page 4-5).
5 Click New Search to clear all search criteria.
6 Click OK to close the search window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
4-27
5
The EPICenter Alarm System
This chapter describes how to use the ExtremeWare EPICenter Alarm System applet for:
• Viewing the alarms that have occurred
• Defining new alarms and modifying current alarm definitions
• Configuring RMON and CPU utilization trap conditions on devices
• Configuring EPICenter as a trap receiver
Overview of the EPICenter Alarm System
The EPICenter Alarm System provides fault detection and alarm handling for the network
devices monitored by EPICenter. This includes Extreme devices and some third-party
devices—those that EPICenter can include in its Inventory database. The Alarm System
provides a set of predefined, enabled alarms that will immediately report conditions such
as authentication or login failures, device problems such as power supply or fan failures,
reachability problems, or device reboots.
The Alarm System also lets you define your own alarms that will report errors under
conditions you specify, such as repeated occurrences or exceeding threshold values. You
can specify the actions that should be taken when an alarm occurs, and you can enable and
disable individual alarms.
Fault detection is based on Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, and
some limited polling. The Alarm System supports SNMP Management Information Base-2
(MIB-2), the Extreme Networks private MIB, Remote Monitoring (RMON) traps, and
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-1
The EPICenter Alarm System
selected traps from other MIBs. When an alarm occurs you can specify actions such as
sending e-mail, running a program, running a script, or sounding an audible alert.
Extreme Networks devices are configured automatically by EPICenter to send traps
to the EPICenter server. To receive traps from non-Extreme devices, you must
manually configured the devices send traps to the EPICenter server.
Not all trap events are supported in older versions of the ExtremeWare software.
Please refer to Appendix D for information on the switch software required for specific
traps.
The Alarm Log Browser
Click the Alarm button in the Navigation Toolbar to run the Alarm System applet and
view the Alarm Log Browser. If the Alarm button (icon) is displayed in red instead of
black, it indicates that a new alarm has occurred.
You can also invoke the Alarm Log Browser from the Topology view.
The Alarm Log Browser page appears, as shown in Figure 5-1.
5-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The Alarm Log Browser
Predefined filters
Alarm System module tabs
New alarm
indicator
Current filter definition
Alarm summary
Acknowledged
alarms
Figure 5-1: The Alarm Log Browser page
The Alarm Log Browser page displays a summary of the alarms that have occurred,
optionally filtered based on criteria you can specify. An alarm can be generated due to an
SNMP or RMON trap, or based on the results of a poll.
By default, the Alarm System provides a set of predefined alarms that generate alarm log
entries when the following events occur:
• Authentication failure (SNMP MIB-2 trap)
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-3
The EPICenter Alarm System
• Invalid login (Extreme proprietary trap)
• Redundant Power Supply alarm condition (Extreme proprietary trap)
• ESRP state change (Extreme proprietary trap)
• SNMP unreachable (EPICenter event)
• Configuration upload failure for an upload attempted from the EPICenter system
(EPICenter event)
• Overheat (EPICenter event)
• Fan failure (EPICenter event)
• Device reboot (EPICenter event)
Therefore, you may see alarm log entries the first time you run the Alarm System, even if
you have not defined any alarms of your own.
The Alarm Log Browser summary displays the following information for each alarm
instance:
• ID (an integer number assigned by the EPICenter Alarm System based on the order in
which the alarm occurred)
• Name (provided when the alarm is defined)
• Category (an optional user-defined classification that defaults to “Default”)
• Severity (the severity level associated with the alarm when it was defined)
• Source (the IP address of the device that generated the trap or responded to a poll)
• Time (the date and time at which the alarm was received)
• Message (the message generated by the alarm)
• Acked (a green check will be present if the alarm has been acknowledged)
The summary is initially sorted by ID in descending numerical order, so that the most
recent alarm appears at the top of the list.
You can sort the display by the contents of any column by clicking on the column heading.
Click the heading a second time to reverse the sort order based on that column.
5-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The Alarm Log Browser
Acknowledging an Alarm
To acknowledge an alarm:
1 Select the alarm or alarms you want to acknowledge.
2 Click the Acknowledge (Ack) button at the top of the page.
This sets the state of the selected alarms to “acknowledged,” and places a green check in
the Acked field of the selected alarm log entries.
When you acknowledge the most recent alarm, the state of the Alarm button in the
EPICenter Navigation Toolbar also returns to black.
You can “unacknowledge” alarms, if needed, by selecting the alarms and clicking the
Unack button.
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm:
1 Select the alarm or alarms you want to delete.
2 Click the Delete button at the top of the page.
This removes the Alarm Log entry entirely from the ExtremeWare EPICenter database.
Viewing Alarm Details
To view the details of an individual alarm:
1 Select the alarm you want to view.
2 Click the Detail button at the top of the page,
in the log.
or double-click on the alarm entry
The Alarm Log Detailed View is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-3.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-5
The EPICenter Alarm System
Figure 5-2: Detailed view of an Alarm Log entry
This displays detailed information for the selected alarm.
From this window you can view details for other alarms:
• Enter or select an Alarm ID in the Go to alarm field.
• Click the Next button to view the next alarm down in the list (the next earlier alarm
based on the default sorting order).
• Click the Previous button to view the next alarm higher in the list (the next later alarm
based on the default sorting order).
Filtering the Alarm Display
The alarms you see in the Alarm Log browser are displayed based on a filtering criteria
you can set. The default criteria is to display the last 300 alarms from ExtremeWare
EPICenter’s database (assuming you invoked the Alarm browser from EPICenter’s
Navigation Toolbar). You can select a number of other filters from the pull-down field at
5-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The Alarm Log Browser
the top of the alarm summary display. The predefined filters are based on time: last one
hour, last two hours, yesterday, and so on.
If you invoke the Alarm Browser from the Topology applet (using the pop-up menu for a
specific node) the default filter is set to filter on the Source IP of the node you selected.
To specify your own filter, click the Filter button at the top of the page.
The Define Alarm Log Filter pop-up window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3: Alarm Log filter definition pop-up window
To create your own filter, do the following:
1 If the “Default Filter: view last 300 alarms” check box is checked, the remaining fields
will be greyed-out. Uncheck the check box to enable the other fields.
2 Select the parameter you want to use as a filter criterion from the pull-down menu in
the Field field.
3 Select an operator using the pull-down menu in the Operator field.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-7
The EPICenter Alarm System
4 Enter the value (or values) against which the parameter should be tested. If you have
chosen the Between operator (available for Log ID, Source IP, and Port IfIndex) you will
be asked to enter two values.
Some parameters (those that take text string values) provide a “Contains” operator, that
lets you match against a portion of text that should be contained in the parameter value.
5 Click the Add/Modify Filter button to add this specification to the filter definition.
You can create a multi-criteria specification using more than one parameter, as shown
in Figure 5-3, as long as each parameter is different. You cannot filter using multiple
specifications of the same parameter.
For example, in order to find alarms for IP addresses 10.205.0.55 and 10.205.0.61, you
must use the Between operator to test for any Source IP address between these two IP
addresses. You cannot create a filter that includes both Source IP = 10.205.0.55 and
Source IP = 10.205.0.61.
6 To remove an individual criteria, select it in the current filter list and click the Remove
Filter(s) button. You can select and remove multiple filter criteria.
7 When your filter definition is complete, click OK.
To restore the default filter definition, click the Default Filter: view last 300 alarms check
box and click OK.
Defining Alarms
For convenience, the EPICenter Alarm System provides a number of predefined alarms.
These alarms are enabled and will be active when you run the EPICenter server. These
predefined alarms include:
• Authentication failure (SNMP MIB-2 trap)
• Invalid login (Extreme proprietary trap)
• Redundant Power Supply alarm condition (Extreme proprietary trap)
• ESRP state change (Extreme proprietary trap)
• SNMP unreachable (EPICenter event)
• Configuration upload failure for an upload attempted from the EPICenter system
(EPICenter event)
• Overheat (EPICenter event)
• Fan failure (EPICenter event)
5-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Defining Alarms
• Device reboot (EPICenter event)
By default these alarms are all enabled, and will generate an alarm log entry upon
occurrence. No other actions are specified in the predefined alarms.
You can define additional alarms based on a fairly large number of events.
To view the current alarm definitions, to create new definitions, or to modify existing
definitions, click the Alarm Definition tab at the top of the page. The Alarm System:
Alarm Definition page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4: Alarm System: Alarm Definition page
To view the settings for an individual alarm, just select the alarm. Its definition will appear
in the fields below the alarm list. For a definition of the fields in the top portion of the alarm
definition, see the section “The Basic Alarm Parameters” on page 5-11.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-9
The EPICenter Alarm System
Alarm Actions: Initially the predefined alarms have no actions defined for them. An alarm
action is a specified function that the alarm system can execute when an alarm occurs, in
addition to logging the occurrence of the alarm. Alarm actions can include sending e-mail,
sounding an audible alert, running a program or executing a script. For the predefined
alarms, an alarm event will create an entry in the Alarm Log, but no other actions will
occur. You can define additional actions for any of these alarms.
Alarm Scope: The predefined alarms are all initially scoped to the Default device group.
Alarm scope defines which devices can trigger an alarm. Thus, a trap occurring on any
device in the Default device group will trigger the corresponding alarm. You can modify
the scope of any of these alarms.
Creating New Alarm Definitions
To create a new alarm, click the Add button at the top of the page.
The New Alarm Definition window appears, as shown in Figure 5-5, and displays the
Basic page of the three-page alarm definition.
Figure 5-5: The New Alarm Definition window, Basic definition
There are three parts to an alarm definition: the Basic definition, the Scope definition, and
the Action definition. Each is represented on its own page in the New Alarm Definition
window.
5-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Defining Alarms
Use the tabs at the top of the window to move between the three pages. When you are
finished with your alarm definition, click OK, and the alarm will be entered into the Alarm
Definition List.
The Basic Alarm Parameters
On the Basic page, you define the event-related parameters of the alarm: its name, severity,
the event that will trigger it, and so on. The fields in this window are defined as follows:
• Name: The name of the alarm as it will appear in the alarm log and (optionally)
elsewhere. This defines the variable alarmName
• Enabled: Indicates whether the alarm is “turned on” or not. If you uncheck this box, the
alarm will remain defined but will not be operational
• Category: The category assigned to this alarm. Select the category using the pull-down
menu at the end of the field (see the section “Creating a New Alarm Category” on
page 5-21 for more information). This defines the variable alarmCategory.
• Severity: The severity of the alarm. Select one of the five severity levels from the
pull-down menu (normal, warning, minor, major, critical). This defines the variable
alarmSeverity. The severity level also determines the sound that will be played as an
audible alert.
• Event Type: The type of event (SNMP trap, RMON Rising trap, RMON Falling trap, or
an EPICenter event). This determines the list of events you can select in the Event Name
field.
An EPICenter event is generated by EPICenter based on the results of its periodic
polling. In some cases, an EPICenter event may result from the same condition that
could also generate an SNMP or other trap. An EPICenter event has the advantage that
it guarantees that the condition will eventually be detected by polling even if the
corresponding trap is missed.
See Appendix Dfor a description of the EPICenter and SNMP events from which you
can choose.
Certain SNMP events require configuration on the switch in order to enable specific
trap conditions.
You define RMON events and CPU Utilization events through the Event Configuration
page of the EPICenter Alarm System. RMON events can only be configured on
switches running ExtremeWare 6.1 or later. CPU Utilization rules can only be
configured on switches running ExtremeWare 6.2 or later.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-11
The EPICenter Alarm System
For certain other events, you must do the configuration on the switch using an SNMP
configuration tool such as SNMPc. See “Configuring Other SNMP Trap Events” on
page 5-38 for more information.
The event type is concatenated with the event name to define the variable
eventTypeName.
• Event Name: The specific event (trap) that should trigger this alarm. Select the event
from the pull-down list provided. For RMON Rising or RMON Falling trap types, the
RMON rule name is used as the event name. The full-down list includes the configured
RMON rule names. See Appendix D for a description of the EPICenter and SNMP
events from which you can choose.
The event name is concatenated with the event type to define the variable
eventTypeName.
• Message: A message you specify that will be transmitted whenever the alarm occurs.
By default, this field contains the variable eventTypeName. You can delete this
variable, add other variables as provided in the variable pop-up list, and add your own
text.
• Variables...: A pop-up list that provides a list of variables you can select to include in
the Message field. See Table 5-1 for a definition of the Alarm System variables you can
use in the message field.
• Repetitive occurrence specification: The required number of repeated occurrences of
the event that must occur before an alarm is generated. You can specify both the
number of times the event must occur, and the time frame within which these events
must occur. This lets you define alarms that will filter out short-lived or non-repeatable
events, and will only take action if the triggering event occurs repeatedly within a
sufficiently short time frame.
Table 5-1: EPICenter Alarm Variables
Variable Name
Description
alarmID
An integer number assigned by the EPICenter Alarm
System based on the order in which the alarm
occurred
alarmName
The name of the alarm as defined in the Name field
alarmCategory
The user-defined alarm category assigned to the
alarm
alarmSeverity
The severity level assigned to the alarm
alarmRepeatTimes
The number of times the event must occur before an
alarm is generated
5-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Defining Alarms
Table 5-1: EPICenter Alarm Variables
Variable Name
Description
alarmRepeatPeriod
The time frame within which the repeated events
must occur for the alarm to be generated
alarmSourceDeviceName
The name of the device on which the event(s)
occurred (taken from the EPICenter database)
alarmSourceIP
The IP address of the device on which the event(s)
occurred
alarmSourceIfIndex
The interface on the device on which the event(s)
occurred
alarmGMTTime
The time at which the alarm occurred, in Geenwich
Mean Time
alarmLocalTime
The time at which the alarm occurred, in local time
alarmMessage
The message defined for the alarm
alarmActions
The list of actions defined for the alarm
eventLogID
The ID of the alarm in EPICenter’s event log
eventTypeName
The type of event (SNMP Trap, RMON Rising Trap,
RMON Falling Trap, or EPICenter event)
concatenated with the Event Name (the SNMP trap
name, RMON rule name, or EPICenter event name).
eventGenericType
The SNMP Generic Type number of the trap
eventSpecificType
The SNMP Specific Type number for an
enterprise-specific trap
eventTypeStr
The event description
eventEnterprise
The Enterprise portion of the Object ID (OID) of the
event
eventData
The data associated with the trap
The Alarm Scope
To define a scope for the alarm, click the Scope tab. The Scope definition page is displayed,
as shown in Figure 5-6.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-13
The EPICenter Alarm System
Figure 5-6: The New Alarm Definition window, Scope definition
In this window you define the scope of the alarm—the set of devices that can trigger the
alarm. You can define the scope as a set of individual devices, one or more device groups,
as a set of individual ports, or as one or more port groups.
To define the alarm scope, you select a Source Type (and Device Group, if appropriate),
select individual devices, ports, device groups, or port groups, and add them to the
Selections list.
The fields and buttons in this window are defined as follows:
• Source Type: The source of the scoping definition (Device, Device Group, Port, or Port
Group). Select the type you want from the pull-down list.
Selecting Device Group or Port Group will scope the alarm on all members of the
selected group. To scope the alarm on individual devices or ports, select Device or Port.
For events that originate from a device port (such as link down) the scope will
determine whether the alarm will be generated based on an event from a single port, or
on events from any port on a device, or from any port on any device in a device group.
For example, if you want to define an alarm that is fired for any port on device A, you
can scope the alarm as “Device,” select the appropriate device group, and select Device
A. If you want to define the alarm only to be fired on selected ports on Device A, then
you would scope the alarm as “Port,” select Device A, and then select the individual
5-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Defining Alarms
ports. You could also define a port group for the specific ports of interest, the scope the
alarm as Port Group and select the appropriate group.
• Select Group: If you select Device or Port as the Source Type, you must select a Device
Group to indicate what set of devices (and ports) you want to see in the Source List.
• Source list (Device/DeviceGroup/Port Group): The list of components of the specified
type. The field label changes based on the Source Type. It is labeled Device when you
select either Device or Port as the Source Type.
• ifIndex: The list of ports available on the device selected in the Devices Source list. This
list appears only if you have selected Port as the Source Type. Select a device from the
Device list, and the appropriate set of ports for the device appears.
• Selection: The devices, ports, device groups, or port groups that are currently included
in the scope.
• Add->: Adds the selected Device(s), Port(s), Device Groups or Port Groups to the
Selections list, for inclusion in the scope of this alarm.
• Add All->: Adds all the components in the Source list to the Selection list.
• <-Remove: Removes the selected components from the Selection list.
• <-Remove All: Removes all the components from the Selection list.
The Alarm Actions
To define actions for the alarm, click the Actions tab. The Action definition page is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-7.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-15
The EPICenter Alarm System
Figure 5-7: The New Alarm Definition window, Action definition
In this window you define the actions for the alarm—the functions that should be
performed when the alarm occurs. You can have the alarm perform any or all of the actions
defined here.
The fields and buttons in this window are defined as follows:
• Sound Alert: Click the check box to have the alarm system play an audible alert on the
client computer when the alarm occurs. The alarm will sound on all EPICenter clients
currently connected to the EPICenter server. The sound that is played will depend on
the severity level of the alarm.
The alert sound files are kept on the EPICenter server in the directory
<epicenter_installdir>\extreme, and are named according to the severity level
they represent (normal.wav, warning.wav and so on). <epicenter_installdir> is the
directory where EPICenter is installed, by default epc3_1 in the Windows operating
environment, or /opt/epc3_1 on a Solaris system.
• Email to: Click this check box to indicate that e-mail should be sent, then enter the
e-mail address(es) of the recipients for the e-mail. E-mail addresses in a list can be
separated by commas, semicolons, or spaces.
If this box is greyed out, you must first configure your e-mail settings. See
“Setting Up E-mail for the Alarm System” for details.
5-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Defining Alarms
• Forward Trap to: Click this checkbox to forward the trap event that caused this alarm.
Specify the forwarding instructions in the fields to the right of the check box as follows:
— Host: Enter the host name or host IP address of the system to which the trap should
be forwarded.
— Port: Enter the port on which the specified host receives traps.
— Community String: Enter the community string for the specified host.
• Run program: Click the check box to have the Alarm System run a program when this
alarm occurs. Enter the command string for the program you want to run. You can
include Alarm System variables as arguments by clicking the Variables... button and
selecting the variables you want.
On a Windows NT or WIndows 2000 system, if you are running the EPICenter
server as a service, and you specify a program that does output to the desktop,
that program will not run unless you specify that output to the desktop is allowed
when you start the server service. You can solve this problem by restarting the
EPICenter server and specifically allowing interaction with the desktop. Refer to the
Alarm System section in Appendix A, Troubleshooting, for instructions on restarting the
EPICenter server service with this option enabled. If you are running the EPICenter
server as a regular program, this is not a problem.
If you want to specify a batch file that does output to the desktop, you must
specify the “.bat” file within a DOS “cmd” command, as follows:
cmd /c start <file.bat>
where <file.bat> is the batch file you want to run.
• Execute script: Click the check box to have the Alarm System execute a Tcl script when
this alarm occurs. Enter the script commands into the window provided.
You can write your own scripts that access selected EPICenter database variables. See
“Writing Tcl Scripts for Alarm Actions” on page 5-39 for more information.
Setting Up E-mail for the Alarm System
Before you can use the e-mail action, you must configure the e-mail capability. Until you
do so, the Email To field and check box will not be available. To configure the e-mail
capability, do the following:
1 Click the Settings... button on the Action page.
This displays the Email Settings window, as shown in Figure 5-8.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-17
The EPICenter Alarm System
Figure 5-8: Setting up E-mail for EPICenter alarm actions
2 Enter your outgoing mail server name (or IP address) into the SMTP Host: field.
3 Enter into the Sent By: field the e-mail address that should be used as the sender of the
e-mail
4 If your mail server authenticates the user before sending out e-mail, check the My
server requires authentication check box, and enter the user name and password of an
account that the SMTP server will accept. Usually this will be the account you use to log
into your network.
If you don’t know whether your server requires authentication, you can go ahead and
enter the authentication information—it will be ignored if it is not actually needed.
Alarm Definition Examples
Example 1: Define an alarm that will page “Joe” at “4083236789@paging.com” if port 10 on
device “switch8” goes down.
1 Bring up the New Alarm Definition dialog. On the Basic page, do the following:
a Type a name for the alarm (for example, WAN Link Down) in the Name field.
b Make sure the Enabled checkbox is checked.
c
Select a category (e.g. “Default”) in the Category field.
d Select “SNMP Trap” in the Event Type field.
e Select “Link Down” in the Event Name field.
2 Click the Scope tab, and do the following:
a Select “Port” in the Source Type field.
b Select “switch8” from the Device list.
c
5-18
Select “10” from the ifIndex list.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Defining Alarms
d Click the Add button to add port 10 to the Selection list.
3 Click the Action tab, and do the following:
a Click the Email to: check box to turn on the check.
b Type 4083236789@paging.com in the text field next to the checkbox.
4 Click OK to finish the alarm definition.
Example 2: Define an alarm that will page “Joe” at “4083236789@paging.com” if any port
on device “switch8” goes down.
1 Bring up the New Alarm Definition dialog. Fill in the fields on the Basic page just as
you did in Example 1.
2 Under the Scope tab, do the following:
a Select “Device” in the Source Type field, instead of “Port.”
b Select “switch8” from the Device list as in Example 1.
c
Click the Add button to add switch8 to the Selection list. No ifIndex list will be
displayed.
3 Click the Action tab, and enter Joe’s paging information as you did in Example 1.
4 Click OK to finish the alarm definition.
Example 3: In a Windows NT environment (where both the EPICenter server and client are
running under Windows), define an alarm that will pop up a message on the Windows
client system “joe” if the port utilization on port 10 on device “switch8” exceeds 15 percent.
This alarm requires an RMON rule with a Rising Threshold of 15 percent for port
utilization. You can define the RMON rule either before or after you define the alarm. See
“RMON Rule Configuration Example” on page 5-34 for an example of how to create the
RMON rule.
To create the alarm definition:
1 Bring up the New Alarm Definition dialog. On the Basic page, fill in the Name and
Category fields, and check the Enabled checkbox, just as you did in Example 1.
a Select “RMON Rising Trap” in the Event Type field.
b Enter the RMON rule name in the Event Name field:
If you have already created the RMON rule, you can select it from the pull-down
menu in the Event Name field. For example, if you named the rule “WAN Link
15%”, that name should appear in the pull-down menu.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-19
The EPICenter Alarm System
If you have not yet created the RMON rule, type in a name for the rule (for example,
“WAN Link 15%”). You will need to use this name for the rule when you create it.
See “RMON Rule Configuration Example” on page 5-34 for an example of how to
create the RMON rule.
2 Click the Scope tab, and enter the port information as you did in Example 1:
a Select “Port” in the Source Type field.
b Select “switch8” from the Device list.
c
Select “10” from the ifIndex list.
d Click the Add button to add port 10 to the Selection list.
3 Click the Action tab, and do the following:
a Click the Run Program checkbox to turn on the check.
b Type net send joe "$alarmName" in the text field next to the checkbox.
This program is only available on the Windows NT platform.
4 Click OK to finish the alarm definition.
Modifying Alarm Definitions
To modify an alarm, select the alarm in the Alarm Definition List, and click the Modify
button at the top of the page.
The Modify Alarm Definition window is displayed. This window, and its Basic, Scope and
Action pages, are identical to the New Alarm Definition window, except that the current
information for the alarm you selected is filled in.
To modify the alarm, make any changes you want, then click OK. For definitions of the
various fields, see the section “Creating New Alarm Definitions.” on page 5-10.
Deleting Alarm Definitions
To delete an alarm definition, select the alarm in the Alarm Definition List, and click the
Delete button at the top of the page.
5-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Alarm Categories
After you verify that you want to delete the alarm, the definition is removed from the
Alarm Definition List and from ExtremeWare EPICenter’s database. You must remove
alarm definitions one at a time.
Alarm Categories
Alarm categories are arbitrary collections of alarms that you can define as appropriate to
your needs, and then assign to specific alarm definitions. For example, you might use
categories to designate alarms from individual buildings, floors, or workgroups. An ISP
might define categories for alarms from a specific customer’s equipment.
By default, all alarms are assigned to the category named Default. This category can be
renamed, but it cannot be deleted.
Creating a New Alarm Category
To create a new alarm category, click the Add button at the top of the window.
A small pop-up window appears into which you can enter the name of the new category.
Click OK to enter the new category into the Category List.
Modifying an Alarm Category
To rename an alarm category, click the Modify button at the top of the window.
A small pop-up window appears and displays the current name of the category. Modify
the name and click OK to enter the revised category into the Category List.
When an alarm category is renamed, all alarms assigned to that category are updated to
use the new category name.
Deleting an Alarm Category
To delete an alarm category, select the category from the Category List, then click the
Delete button at the top of the window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-21
The EPICenter Alarm System
Deleting a category also deletes all the alarm definitions that are assigned to that
category. If you do not want to delete those alarm definitions, you must first modify
the alarm definitions to use a different alarm category before you delete the
category.
A warning message appears to let confirm that you want to delete the category and the
alarm definitions that are assigned to it. Click OK to delete the category and the alarms
from the EPICenter database.
The Default category cannot be deleted.
Event Configuration
The Event Configuration page lets you define the conditions or rules that will cause certain
trap events to occur, and specify the devices on which these rules should be configured. In
EPICenter 3.1, you can use this page to define how RMON and CPU utilization events
should be generated.
In the case of both RMON utilization and CPU utilization, events (traps) can be generated
based on comparing a sample value to a threshold value. The rules you set up specify what
these threshold values should be. Once these rules are in place, you can use them in your
EPICenter alarm definitions to create alarms that will take actions when a sample value
crosses one of the thresholds you’ve defined.
There are several other SNMP traps supported by the EPICenter Alarm System that also
require conditions to be set on the switch to define when a trap should occur. See
“Configuring Other SNMP Trap Events” on page 5-38 for additional information.
In addition to specifying the conditions under which trap events should be generated, you
also use this page to define the target devices on which the event rules should be
configured.
Creating the rules that control trap (event) generation is only the first of the two
steps required to create EPICenter alarms for these events. Even though you have
set up these rules, the trap events generated as a result will be ignored by the Alarm
System until you define alarms that take actions on those events. See “Defining Alarms” on
page 5-8 for more information.
To view the current RMON and CPU Utilization rules, and to create new rules or modify
existing rules, click the Configuration tab at the top of the page. The Alarm System:
5-22
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
Configuration page is displayed. Figure 5-9 shows the Alarm System Configuration page
as it appears when displaying RMON rules.
Figure 5-9: The event Configuration window showing RMON rules
The Configurations tree shows the existing RMON event definitions as nodes in the tree,
with the devices to which they are applied shown as subnodes. The main panel shows the
definition for the selected rule on each target device.
CPU Utilization rules are shown under a separate node. Devices on which a CPU
utilization rule is configured are shown as subnodes of the CPU Utilization node. There
can be only one CPU utilization rule per device.
Click the small plus next to an RMON Rule node or the CPU Utilization node to display in
the tree the devices associated with that rule.
To display the definition of a rule click the rule node.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-23
The EPICenter Alarm System
RMON Rule Display
For RMON rules, the display shows the following for each device targeted by that rule:
• Device: The name of the device
• Variable: The MIB variable being monitored
• Sample Type: Absolute or Delta
• Sample Interval: The time between samples, in seconds.
• Rising Threshold: A threshold value that will trigger an event when the value of the
variable increments past this value.
• Falling Threshold: A threshold value that will trigger an event when the value of the
variable decreases past this value.
• Startup: The condition that will cause the initial event (Rising, Falling, or
RisingOrFalling).
• Index, the device index as obtained by the EPICenter server from the device.
For a detailed definition of these parameters, see “RMON Rule Configuration” on
page 5-27.
CPU Utilization Rule Display
To display the CPU Utilization rules, click the CPU Utilization node in the Configurations
tree.
Figure 5-9 shows the Alarm System Configuration page as it appears when displaying
CPU Configuration rules.
5-24
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
Figure 5-10: The event Configuration window showing CPU Configuration rules
For each device targeted by that rule, the CPU Utilization rule display shows the
following:
• Device: The name of the device
• Variable: The MIB variable being monitored (always
extremeCpuUtilRisingThreshold.0)
• Rising Threshold: A threshold value that will trigger an event when the CPU
Utilization value (a percentage) increments past this value.
This value is also used to calculate a Falling Threshold value, which is to be 90% of the
Rising Threshold value.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-25
The EPICenter Alarm System
For a detailed definition of these parameters, see “CPU Utilization Rule Configuration” on
page 5-31.
Creating an Event Rule
To create a new event rule, click the Add button at the top of the page.
The New Configuration Rule window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11: New Configuration window
There are two parts to an event rule; the rule configuration itself, and the association of the
rule to its target devices.
The New Configuration window comes up with the Configuration page displayed.
In the Configuration Type field, select the type of rule you want to create (RMON Event
or CPU Utilization) from the drop-down list.
CPU Utilization is only supported on switches running ExtremeWare 6.2 or later.
When you finish entering the configuration and target information, click the Apply button,
and the new rule is added to the Configurations tree. For RMON rules, the rule name is
included as a “folder” and each target device for the rule appears as a separate component
under that rule. The rule name will also appear in the Event Name list.
5-26
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
For CPU Utilization rules, each target device for a CPU utilization rule appears as a
separate component under the CPU Utilization “folder” in the Configurations tree.
RMON Rule Configuration
If you select RMON Event as the Configuration Type, the remaining fields and buttons in
this window are defined as follows:
• Name: The name for this rule.
• MIB Variable: The MIB variable that the rule will monitor.
Type in the complete OID, or click the Look Up... button to bring up a list of variables
that are available, organized by MIB groups, as shown in Figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12: A list of MIB variables available for use in RMON rules
Click on a variable group to display the individual variables within the group. You can
use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the list.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-27
The EPICenter Alarm System
You can also type the beginning of a variable name into the MIB Variable field, then
type a space, and the Alarm System will attempt to match your typing to the variable
list and auto-complete your entry.
MIB variables that apply to the entire device will have the suffix “.0” appended to them
to create the complete OID. MIB variables that apply per port will be combined with the
port ifIndex to generate the OID.
The MIB variable list displays only the MIBs that were shipped with the
EPICenter software. It does not display table variables if the table is indexed by
an index other than (or in addition to) ifIndex.
If the MIB variable you want to monitor does not appear in the MIB Variable lookup
list, you can still use the variable by typing its complete OID into the MIB Variable field.
Enter the OID in its numeric form, ending in .0 if it is a per device variable, or in the
specific index if it is a per-port variable. If it is a table variable, you may need to enter
each index and apply it to each target device one by one.
• Description: The description of the MIB variable. This description should specify the
units of measure for the variable, needed in order to correctly specify the Rising
Threshold and Falling Threshold values.
• Rising Threshold: A threshold value that will trigger an event when the value of the
variable increments past this value. An event will be generated when the sample value
meets the following conditions:
— When the sample value becomes greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold for
the first time after the alarm is enabled, if the Startup Alarm condition is set to
Rising or RisingOrFalling
— The first time the sample value becomes greater than or equal to the Rising
Threshold, after having become less than or equal to the Falling Threshold
• Falling Threshold: A threshold value that will trigger an event when the value of the
variable decreases past this value. An event will be generated when the sample value
meets the following conditions:
— When the sample value becomes less than or equal to the Falling Threshold for the
first time after the alarm is enabled, if the Startup Alarm condition is set to Falling
or RisingOrFalling
— The first time the sample value becomes less than or equal to the Falling Threshold,
after having become greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold
• Sample Type: The method used to compare the variable to the threshold. Specify the
type as follows:
— Absolute to use the actual sample value of the variable
5-28
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
— Delta to calculate the difference between the current sample value and the previous
sample value of the variable, and use the difference in the comparison
• Sample Interval (seconds): The interval, in seconds, over which the data is sampled
and compared to the rising and falling thresholds.
• Startup Alarm: The condition that should be met to cause the initial occurrence of this
event. Select from the following:
— Rising: an event will be generated the first time the sample value becomes greater
than or equal to the Rising Threshold value. No events will be generated related to
the Falling threshold until after this has occurred.
— Falling: an event will be generated the first time the sample value becomes less than
or equal to the Falling Threshold value. No events will be generated related to the
Rising threshold until after this has occurred.
— RisingOrFalling: an event will be generated the first time the sample value becomes
either greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold value, or less than or equal to the
Falling Threshold value.
It is important to understand that, except for the initial occurrence of the alarm, an RMON
alarm event will be generated only the when the sample value of the variable crosses one
of the thresholds for the first time after having crossed the other threshold.
The following diagram, shown in Figure 5-13, shows how alarms are generated for an
RMON rule using Delta values, where the startup alarm condition is set to “Rising” or
“RisingOrFalling.”
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-29
The EPICenter Alarm System
Sampled
variable
value
Initial
sample
value
B
Rising
threshold
Falling
threshold
E
C
A
D
Time (sample intervals)
= alarm event generated
XM_022
Figure 5-13: RMON Alarm event generation
Because the initial sample value of the variable is greater than the value of the Rising
threshold, an RMON rising threshold trap is generated. A second trap occurs at the next
sample interval (point A) because the sample variable value is now less than the Falling
Threshold. At point B the value again passes the Rising Threshold, and another trap event
is generated. However, no trap occurs at point C, even though the value of the variable
again becomes greater than the Rising Threshold, because the value has not yet become
less than the Falling threshold. Another Rising threshold trap event cannot occur until
after a Falling threshold alarm has occurred, as happens at point D.
Note that in order to have any of these trap events cause an alarm in the EPICenter Alarm
System, you need to define an alarm that responds to a RMON Rising Threshold or RMON
Falling Threshold event.
• If you define an alarm based on the RMON Rising Threshold event, then EPICenter
alarms will occur at the initial sample, and at points B and E. Because the alarm is
defined to respond to RMON Rising Threshold events, the falling threshold trap events
that occur at points A and D do not trigger an EPICenter alarm.
• If you also define an alarm based on an RMON Falling Threshold event, then EPICenter
alarms would also be generated at points A and D.
5-30
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
For a more detailed discussion of Remote Network Monitoring alarm behavior, refer to a
book such as SNMP, SNMPv2, SNMPv3, and RMON 1 and 2, Third Edition, by William
Stallings (Addison-Wesley, 1999).
CPU Utilization Rule Configuration
CPU Utilization is only supported on switches running ExtremeWare 6.2 or later.
If you select CPU Utilization as the Configuration Type, the remaining fields and buttons
in this window are defined as follows:
• Name: CPU Utilization, the name for this rule. There can only be one rule of this type
on a device, so the name is predefined.
• MIB Variable: extremeCpuUtilRisingThreshold.0, the MIB variable that this rule
will monitor. This is also predefined.
• Description: The description of the extremeCpuUtilRisingThreshold MIB variable.
• Rising Threshold: A threshold value, in percent, that will trigger an event when the
CPU utilization rises past this value. This value is also used to compute a falling
threshold, which is defined as 90% of the rising threshold.
Although you can define only a Rising Threshold value for CPU Utilization, you
can define alarms for both CPU Utilization Rising Threshold events and CPU
Utilization Falling Threshold events. The Alarm Definition process lets you
create two separate alarms related to CPU Utilization, based on this one rule.
If you define an alarm for CPU Utilization Rising Threshold events, an alarm will be
generated each time the sample value meets the following conditions:
— When the sample value becomes greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold for
the first time (including the initial sample) after the alarm is enabled.
— The first time the sample value becomes greater than or equal to the Rising
Threshold, after having become less than or equal to the Falling Threshold (90% of the
Rising threshold).
If you define an alarm for CPU Utilization Falling Threshold events, an event will be
generated each time the sample value meets the following conditions:
— The first time the sample value becomes less than or equal to 90% of the Rising
Threshold, after having become greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold.
Several of the values you can set for an RMON event are predefined in the Extreme switch
agent for CPU utilization. These are:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-31
The EPICenter Alarm System
• Startup Alarm: The Startup condition is predefined to be Rising.
• Sample Interval: The sample interval for a CPU Utilization alarm is also predefined,
and is set to 3 seconds.
• Sample Type: The sample value (a percentage) is always an absolute value.
It is important to understand that, except for the initial occurrence of a Rising Threshold
alarm, a CPU Utilization alarm will be generated only the when the sample value of the
variable crosses the target threshold for the first time after having crossed the other
threshold.
The diagram shown in Figure 5-14 illustrates how CPU Utilization trap events will occur
once you have configured a CPU Utilization rising threshold. The startup condition for a
CPU Utilization event is always predefined to be Rising.
Sampled
CPU
utilization
value
Initial
sample
value
B
C
A
Rising
threshold
Falling
threshold
(90% of
rising)
Z
Y
X
Time (sample intervals)
= alarm event generated
XM_023
Figure 5-14: CPU Utilization event generation
The first CPU Utilization trap occurs at the initial sample value, since the value is above the
CPU Utilization Rising threshold. If the initial value were below the Rising threshold, no
event would occur.
The second event occurs at point X, because the sample value has fallen below the falling
threshold, which is defined as 90% of the rising threshold value. The third event occurs at
point A because the sample value is again above the Rising Threshold after having fallen
5-32
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
below the Falling threshold. At point B the value again passes the Rising Threshold, but no
alarm is generated because the value has not yet become less than the Falling threshold.
Another Rising threshold alarm cannot occur until after a Falling threshold event has
occurred, which happens at point Y. The next Rising threshold event happens at point C.
Note that in order to have any of these events cause an alarm in the EPICenter Alarm
System, you need to define an alarm that responds to a CPU Utilization Rising Threshold
or CPU Utilization Falling Threshold event.
• If you define an alarm based on the CPU Utilization Rising Threshold event, an
EPICenter alarm will occur at the initial sample, and at points A and C. Because the
alarm was defined to respond to CPU Utilization Rising Threshold events, the falling
threshold trap events that occur at points X and Y do not trigger an EPICenter alarm.
• If you also define an alarm based on a CPU Utilization Falling Threshold event, then
EPICenter alarms would be generated at points X and Y.
Configuration Rule Target
Click the Target tab to display the New Configuration Target page, as shown in
Figure 5-15.
This page lets you specify which devices should be configured to generate the event you
have defined.
Figure 5-15: RMON target selection window
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-33
The EPICenter Alarm System
The fields and buttons in this window are defined as follows:
• Source Type: The source of the RMON rule targets (Devices, Device Groups, Ports, or
Port Groups). Select the type you want from the pull-down list. The choices you have
are determined by the variable you selected for the rule. For example, if the variable
you have selected to monitor is applied per port, you will be able to select by Port or
Port Group.
• Source List (Device/DeviceGroup/Port Group): The list of components (devices or
groups) of the specified type. The field label changes based on the Source Type. It is
labeled Device when you select either Device or Ports (a second Port field is provided
for port selection).
Note that when you leave your cursor on a device for a moment, a pop-up displays the
IP address of the device.
• Source List (Port): The list of ports available on the device selected in the Devices
Source list. This list appears only if you’ve selected Ports as the Source Type. Select a
device from the Device list, and the appropriate set of ports for the device appears.
• Selection: The devices, ports, device groups, or port groups that are currently targets
for the RMON rule.
• Add->: Adds the selected Device(s), Port(s), Device Groups or Port Groups to the
Selections list, for inclusion as a target for this rule.
• Add All->: Adds all the components in the Source list to the Selection list
• <-Remove: Removes the selected components from the Selection list.
• <-Remove All: Removes all the components from the Selection list.
RMON Rule Configuration Example
Example: Create an RMON rule that will cause an RMON Rising Trap when port
utilization on port 10 of device “switch8” exceeds 15%.
1 Bring up the New Configuration dialog. On the Configuration page, do the following:
a Type a name for the rule in the Name field (for example, “WAN Link 15%”).
If you have already created an alarm definition that will use this rule, make sure the
name matches the name you entered in the alarm definition.
b Click the Look up... button to display the Select MIB Variable dialog.
c
5-34
Expand the Extreme folder, select the extremeRtStatsUtilization variable, and
click OK to enter it into the MIB Variable field.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
d Type “1500” in the Rising Threshold field. Note that for this variable the value must
be in hundredths of a percent.
e Type a smaller value, for example “1450” in the Falling Threshold field.
f
Leave the Sample Type as “Absolute” and the Sample Interval at the default value
(15).
g Select Rising for the Startup Alarm field.
2 Click the Target tab and do the following:
a Select Port as the Source Type
b Select “switch8” from the Device list
c
Select 10 from the ifIndex list
d Click Add to add the port to the Selection list
3 Click the Apply button to configure the rule on device switch8.
A message window will appear with the device configuration results.
4 Verify that no switch configuration errors have been reported, and click OK to dismiss
the window.
5 Click Close to dismiss the New Configuration dialog.
Modifying a Rule
Once a set of RMON rules have been created, they must be modified individually. To
modify a RMON rule do the following:
1 Select the rule folder or the individual rule name in the Configurations tree to display
the rule details in the main panel of the window.
2 Select the individual rule you want to modify
3 Click the Modify button at the top of the page.
The Modify Configuration window is displayed for the target you selected.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-35
The EPICenter Alarm System
Figure 5-16: Modify Configuration window
The window shows the same information as the Configuration page of the New
Configuration window, but with the information for the current target filled in.
See “RMON Rule Configuration” on page 5-27 for a definition of the fields on this page.
Note that if you change the name of this rule, the new rule will be added as a “folder” in
the Configurations tree, and this specific rule target will be moved under the new rule.
Deleting a Rule
To delete an RMON or CPU Utilization rule, do the following:
1 Select the rule folder or the individual rule name in the Configurations tree to display
the rule details in the main panel of the window.
2 Select the individual rule or rules you want to delete
3 Click the Delete button at the top of the window.
4 When the warning asking you to confirm that you want to delete is displayed, click Yes
to delete the rule(s) or No to cancel the action.
When you delete a rule, the alarm definition that references the rule is not deleted.
5-36
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Event Configuration
Resynchronizing the RMON Rules
To resynchronize EPICenter’s database with the RMON rules in place on a switch, do the
following:
1 Click the Sync button at the top of the window.
The Synchronize RMON Rules window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17: The Synchronize RMON Rules window
You can resynchronize individual devices or all devices in a device group.
2 To select a device group, select Device Group from the pull-down list in the Source
Type field. A list of device groups will be displayed.
To select individual devices, select Devices in the Source Type field. A list is displayed
showing all the Extreme Networks devices managed by EPICenter.
3 To add a device or device group to the Selection list, select the device or device group
and click Add ->. To add all devices or device groups in the list, click Add All ->.
4 To remove a device or device group from Selection list, select the item and click
<- Remove. To remove all devices or device groups, click <- Remove All.
5 Click Synchronize to initiate the synchronization process.
The Alarm Manager uses SNMP to retrieve configuration and status information from
each selected switch, and updates the database with that information.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-37
The EPICenter Alarm System
6 The Synchronize function displays a dialog box with status or error information. Click
OK to continue.
7 Click Close to exit the Synchronize RMON Rules window.
Configuring Other SNMP Trap Events
There are a number of SNMP events that require configuration on the switch before they
can be used in EPICenter alarm definitions. If the configuration is not done on the switch,
no trap events are generated, and therefore no EPICenter alarms for those events will
occur. The Ping and OSPF traps fall into this category.
To configure the switch to send one of these traps, you must use a tool that allows you to
set the value of the appropriate SNMP variable. Tools such as SNMPc can be used to
perform this function. The following information assumes that you have a thorough
understanding of SNMP and an appropriate SNMP utility.
Refer to the appropriate MIBs for details of the variable settings:
• Ping MIB: pingmib.mib (RFC 2925)
• OSPF v2 MIB: RFC 1850 or RFC 1850t
Setting EPICenter as a Trap Receiver
When Extreme devices are added to the EPICenter inventory, they are automatically
configured to send traps to the EPICenter server. However, third-party devices are not
automatically configured to do so.
If you want alarms to function for third-party devices, you must manually configure the
devices to send traps to the EPICenter server.
The information required to set up EPICenter as a trap receiver is the following:
• The IP address of the system where the EPICenter server is running.
• The EPICenter server trap port. By default this is 10550. (This is set in the properties file
extreme.properties, found in the <epicenter_installdir>/extreme
subdirectory).
• The EPICenter server community string. This is a string in the form:
ST.<value of IP address>.<value of trap port>
The value of the IP address is the decimal equivalent of the hex value of the IP address.
5-38
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Writing Tcl Scripts for Alarm Actions
For example, if the IP address of the EPICenter server is 10.0.4.1, you would calculate
the decimal equivalent by doing the following:
a Convert each quad of the IP address to its hex equivalent:
Decimal
10
0
4
1
Hex
a
00
04
01
b Convert the hex value a000401 into a decimal value, in this case 167773185
c
Put the three components together to form the community string:
ST.167773185.10550
You can find and verify the value of the community string by using Telnet to log into an
Extreme Networks device that is being managed by ExtremeWare EPICenter, and using
the ExtremeWare CLI command show management to display the list of trap receivers
configured for that device. The EPICenter server, and its community string, should be
included in this list.
To receive RMON traps, you need to ensure that RMON is enabled on the device. For
Extreme devices, you can do this through the ExtremeWare CLI with the command enable
rmon.
Writing Tcl Scripts for Alarm Actions
An EPICenter alarm can call a Tcl function as an alarm action. This Tcl function can be a
user-defined Tcl script that is executed in the EPICenter server.
There is an example script in the <epicenter_install_dir>/user/alarms directory
called example.tcl that you can use as a guide to writing a Tcl function for an alarm
action.
You can access the EPICenter alarm variables for use in your script, as demonstrated in the
example script. These variables are defined in Table 5-1 on page 5-12.
The Tcl Scripting Environment
The scripting environment for alarm actions is a fully operational Tcl environment. In this
environment, a Tcl action script can save states across multiple alarms using global
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-39
The EPICenter Alarm System
variables, access alarm instance data, access event log data, and access other EPICenter
server-side data. In order to protect the EPICenter server from malicious or erroneous
alarm action scripts, the alarm script execution environment uses the “safe interpreter”
ability of the Tcl system.
The safe interpreter is a slave of the main EPICenter server-side Tcl interpreter (master
interpreter). The functions of the safe interpreter are restricted so that it cannot do harm to
the overall EPICenter server. A safe interpreter creates a private “sandbox” in which the
alarm action scripts executes. The master interpreter hides certain functions from the
scripts inside the sandbox. The master interpreter performs some other functions on behalf
of the slave interpreter. By performing functions for the slave, the master has a chance to
check to see if the slave’s request is valid. If not, the master rejects the slave’s request.
The following table summarizes the Tcl commands that are deemed dangerous for use by
a Tcl alarm action script. Some of these commands are removed entirely from the Alarm
Tcl environment. Others are aliases so that the master interpreter can intercept the
command call to provide restricted operations.
Table 5-2: Command Restrictions in EPICenter Tcl Safe Interpreter
Tcl
Command
Hidden in Explicit
Safe
Hide by
Interp
EPICenter
Alias in
Master
Description
cd
✔
file
✔
pwd
✔
Not allowed
exec
✔
Not allowed
glob
✔
✔
Full functions
socket
✔
✔
No server-side socket, client socket is opened
in async mode; the opened client socket is
placed in nonblocking mode using the default
buffer size; the number of open socket is
restricted
exit
✔
Not allowed
load
✔
Not allowed
5-40
Not allowed
✔
Only allow: attime, attributes (read-only),
dirname, executable, exists, extension,
isdirectory, isfile, join, lstat, mtime,
nativename, owned, pathtype, readable,
readlink, rootname, size, split, stat, tail, type,
volume, writable
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Writing Tcl Scripts for Alarm Actions
Table 5-2: Command Restrictions in EPICenter Tcl Safe Interpreter
source
✔
✔
Only from standard $tcl_library and
user/alarm directory, and subdirectories
fconfigure
✔
✔
All channels are non-blocking by default,
cannot set channel to blocking; cannot set
channel buffer size
open
✔
✔
Can only open file in user/alarm and its
subdirectories; file is opened in nonblocking
mode using the default buffer size; number of
open file is restricted
vwait
✔
encoding
✔
not Allowed
✔
after
puts
✔
Cannot change system encoding scheme
✔
Cannot do “after ms”, which does not respond
to events
✔
puts data to stdout
The following table outlines the EPICenter server side commands that available in the
slave through aliases.
EPICenter
Command
Alias in
Master
extr::query
✔
Description
Retrieve server-side data from the database. Syntax:
extr::query {} ?-raw? sql ?arg arg ...?
{}
The first argument must be {}. Using {} signals the
command to retrieves data from the EEM server, in
which the alarm action scripts are executing.
-raw
(Optional) If specified, the result of the query is
returned unparsed as a string containing the data in
the XML format.
sql
The sql query
arg ... Arguments to the sql query for variable substitution
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
5-41
The EPICenter Alarm System
extr::sendMail
✔
Sends e-mail through the EPICenter server. Syntax:
extr::sendMail toList from subject body
?smtpHost? ?login? ?password?
toList
A list of recipient’s email addresses
from
The email address of the sender
subject
body
The subject of the email
The text of the email
smtpHost (Optional) The host ip address of the SMTP host. If
not specified, use the default as defined in the alarm
system.
login
(Optional) The login name to the SMTP host
password (Optional) The password to the SMTP host
extr::postEvent
✔
Log an event to the server’s event log. The event time is logged.
Syntax:
extr::postEvent message
message - the message of the event
5-42
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6
Configuration Manager
This chapter describes how to use the EPICenter Configuration Manager applet for:
• Uploading configuration settings from one or more devices to EPICenter, on demand
or at a predefined (scheduled) time.
• Downloading configuration settings from EPICenter to a device.
• Downloading an incremental configuration to a device.
• Downloading a new ExtremeWare image to one or more devices.
• Downloading a BootROM image to one or more devices.
• Specifying an ExtremeWare software image as the “recommended” image. The
Configuration Manager will compare the image currently running in a switch to
determine if the switch is running the recommended or most current image.
• Specifying and configuring the TFTP server to be used for uploading and downloading
configuration settings and software images.
• Searching for a specific device or group of devices.
Overview of the Configuration Manager
The EPICenter Configuration Manager applet provides a graphical interface for uploading
and downloading files to and from managed devices. The Configuration Manager also
provides a framework for storing the configuration files, to allow tracking of multiple
versions. Configuration file uploads can be performed on demand, or can be scheduled to
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-1
Configuration Manager
occur at regular times—once a day or once a week. The Configuration Manager supports
Extreme Networks and Cisco devices.
To start the Configuration Manager applet, click the Config button in the EPICenter
Navigation Toolbar. The Configuration Manager applet appears (see Figure 6-1).
When the applet initially appears, it shows the status of the Device Group(s) defined in
EPICenter. Click a device group name in the Component Tree to display the summary
status for the devices in the group, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1: Configuration Manager showing summary device status
This display shows a summary of the upload and download activity for each managed
device, as follows:
6-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Overview of the Configuration Manager
• Status: the status of the most recent configuration activity. A green check
indicates
that the activity was successful. A red X
means that the activity (upload or
download) did not complete successfully.
• Name: the device name.
• Current S/w: The version of the ExtremeWare software that is currently running in the
device.
• Current BootROM: The version of the bootROM currently running in the device.
• Next Scheduled Upload: The date and time for the next Archival upload, if one is
scheduled.
• Last Activity: The last activity (upload or download of a configuration file, software
image, or BootROM) that has taken place through the EPICenter Configuration
Manager for this device.
• Last Activity Schedule: The date and time that the activity occurred.
• Last Activity FilePath: The name and path of the configuration file or image file that
was involved in the last activity.
You can display the upload and download status of the configuration information,
software, and BootROM by clicking on an individual device in the Component Tree in the
left-hand panel of the window. This displays a status window for the device similar to the
one shown in Figure 6-2.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-3
Configuration Manager
Figure 6-2: Configuration and Software status for an individual device
The device status window displays the following information:
• The success status, timestamp, and file name and location for configuration uploads
and downloads. If archiving is scheduled, it also displays the time of the next scheduled
archive.
• The success status, timestamp, and versions for software downloads, as well as version
information for both the primary and secondary software stores.
• BootROM version information (at the bottom of the scrollable window, not visible in
Figure 6-2).
6-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Uploading Configurations from Devices
Uploading Configurations from Devices
To upload the configuration information from one or more devices, click the Upload
button at the top of the window.
The Upload config from devices window appears, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3: The Upload Config window
To upload device configurations to EPICenter, do the following:
1 Select a Device Group in the Device Groups field. The devices that belong to this group
are displayed in the Available Devices list.
2 From the Available Devices list, select the devices from which you want to upload
configuration information, then click the Add-> button.
If you want to upload from all the devices in the Device Group, click the Add All->
button.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-5
Configuration Manager
The devices you select will be moved to the Devices for Upload list.
To remove devices from the Devices to Upload list, select the devices and click the
<-Remove button. This moves the selected devices back to the Available Devices list.
Click <-Remove All to move all the devices in the Devices for Upload list back to the
Available Devices list.
3 Specify where the uploaded information should be stored:
a Select Archive to create files for each upload under the ExtremeWare EPICenter
Configs directory, in a subdirectory hierarchy organized by year, month, and day.
The form of the fully-qualified file names for these files is:
<tftp_root>\configs\<year>\<month>\<day>\<device_address>_<time>.txt
where <tftp_root> is the location of your TFTP server. By default, <tftp_root> is
<EPICenter_install_dir>\user\tftp.
<EPICenter_install_dir> is the EPICenter installation directory, by default by
default epc3_1.
For example, a file uploaded from device Summit24 (10.205.0.25) on September 1,
2000 at 8:06 am, would be saved as follows:
EPC3_1\user\tftp\configs\2000\Sept\01\10.205.0.25_0806.txt
If you have reconfigured your TFTP root directory (see “Configuring the TFTP
Server” on page 6-16), the configs subdirectory will be found directly below (as
a child of) your TFTP root directory.
b Select Specify to specify your own directory structure and file naming convention
relative to the TFTP root’s configs subdirectory. The structure will be of the form:
<tftp_root>\configs\<file_location>\<device_address>_<filename_trailer>.txt
In the File Location field, specify the <file_location> path where the files should
be stored, starting from the configs subdirectory. DO NOT include
<tftp_root>\configs as part of the path; just include the remaining path.
In the FileName Trailer field, you can specify a string to be appended to the device
address to create a file name. For example, if you specify a file name trailer of
“week_8_backup” then the filename for the device Summit24 would be
10.205.0.25_week_8_backup.txt.
4 Click Upload to start the upload process.
The Reset button restores all the fields to their initial state.
6-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Archiving Configuration Settings
Archiving Configuration Settings
You can schedule the uploading (archiving) of configuration information so that it is done
automatically, either once a day or once a week.
A device, a set of devices, or one or more device groups can be scheduled for archive
individually and independently of other device upload schedules.
To schedule device configuration archive uploads, click the Archive button at the top of the
window.
The Schedule Upload Config on devices window appears, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4: Schedule Upload Config window
To schedule the upload of device configurations, do the following:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-7
Configuration Manager
1 Select a Device Group in the Device Groups field. The devices that belong to this group
are displayed in the Available Devices list.
2 From the Available Devices list, select the devices for which you want to schedule the
upload of configuration information, then click the Add-> button.
If you want to create the same schedule for all the devices in the Device Group, click the
Add All-> button.
The devices you select will be moved to the Devices for Scheduling list.
To remove devices from the Devices to Scheduling list, select the devices and click the
<-Remove button. This moves the selected devices back to the Available Devices list.
Click <-Remove All to move all the devices in the Devices for Scheduling list back to
the Available Devices list.
3 Specify the schedule you want:
No Schedule will remove any schedule associated with the selected device(s).
Repeat Every Day indicates that the upload should be done every day at the specified
time. When you select this option, you will be able to specify the time of day (the hour
and minutes) at which the upload should be done.
Repeat Every Week indicates that the upload should be done every week at the
specified day and time. When you select this option, you will be able to specify the time
of day (the hour and minutes), and the day of the week at which the upload should be
done.
4 Click Apply to have the upload schedule set for these devices.
Click the Reset button to return the schedule to its state when you initiated this
window.
Downloading Configuration Information to a
Device
Downloading a configuration does a complete configuration download, resetting the
current switch configuration and replacing it entirely with the new downloaded
configuration. The switch will be rebooted automatically after the download has
completed.
To download saved configuration information to a device, click the Download button at
the top of the window.
6-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Downloading Configuration Information to a Device
The Download Config to a device window appears, as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5: Download configuration window
To download a configuration to a device, do the following:
1 Select the device from the device list presented. You can only download to one device
at a time.
If configuration information has been uploaded from the device, the file where it was
saved is listed in the Last Uploaded Config column.
2 In the File Location field, type the location and name of the file you want to download,
or click the Show Uploaded Configs button and select the file to be downloaded.
The Browse pop-up displays the list of uploaded files for the selected device.
3 To start the download, click the Download button.
When the download completes, the switch will be rebooted.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-9
Configuration Manager
The EPICenter software does not save the configuration on the device after the reboot.
You can use the Telnet applet to open a telnet session on the affected devices and
execute a save configuration command.
Downloading an Incremental Configuration to
Devices
You can create or designate a set of configuration information to be used as a baseline
configuration for devices running ExtremeWare 6.0 or later. Using an incremental
download to execute a baseline configuration provides a known, “standard” configuration
that you can use to ensure that devices are configured into a known state. For example, if
you want to set a group of devices to the same basic configuration, you can first set
individual IP addresses on each device, and then use the incremental configuration
download feature to set all other configuration settings on all devices to a common state.
An incremental configuration download executes only the commands specified in the
incremental download file. It does not reset the switch configuration or replace any other
configuration settings that may exist in the device. No reboot is necessary. The EPICenter
incremental download does not save the configuration; you must do so
Incremental downloads are supported on Extreme Networks devices running
ExtremeWare 6.0 or later.
To download an incremental configuration to a device, click the Incremental button at the
top of the window.
The Download Incremental Config To Devices window appears, as shown in Figure 6-6.
6-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Downloading an Incremental Configuration to Devices
Figure 6-6: Download incremental configuration window
From this window, do the following:
1 Select a Device Group in the Device Groups field. The devices that belong to this group
are displayed in the Available Devices list.
2 From the Available Devices list, select the devices for which you want to download the
baseline configuration, then click the Add-> button.
If you want to download the baseline configuration to all the devices in the Device
Group, click the Add All-> button.
The devices you select will be moved to the Apply Incremental Config to: list.
To remove devices from the Apply Incremental Config to: list, select the devices and
click the <-Remove button. This moves the selected devices back to the Available
Devices list. Click <-Remove All to move all the devices in the Apply Incremental
Config to: list back to the Available Devices list.
3 Select the baseline configuration you want to download from the pull-down list in the
Available Incremental Configs field.
4 Click Apply to start the baseline download to the selected device.
The EPICenter software does not save the configuration on the device after the
download. You can use the Telnet applet to open a telnet session on the affected
devices and execute a save configuration command.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-11
Configuration Manager
The Configuration Manager will display an error if you attempt an incremental
download on a switch running a version of ExtremeWare prior to 6.0.
Creating an Incremental Configuration File
The purpose of a incremental configuration is to provide a set of known, standard
configuration settings you can download to a device to restore it or initialize it to a known
software state.
To create an incremental configuration, you can start with a configuration file you have
uploaded, or one of the standard configuration. You can edit it, if needed, to reflect the
basic configuration settings you want to use as your baseline configuration, and to remove
settings you don’t want changed.
Incremental configuration files must be stored in the <tftp_root>\baselines directory,
where <tftp_root> is the location of your TFTP server. By default, <tftp_root> is
<EPICenter_install_dir>\user\tftp.
<EPICenter_install_dir> is the EPICenter installation directory, by default epc3_1.
Thus, if you installed the EPICenter server under Windows NT using the default
installation path, your incremental configurations must be in
epc3_1\user\tftp\baselines, unless you have reconfigured your TFTP root directory.
You can name an incremental configuration file any way you want.
If you have reconfigured your TFTP root directory (see “Configuring the TFTP
Server” on page 6-16), the baselines subdirectory will be found directly below (as a
child of) your TFTP server root directory.
Upgrading Device Software Images
The ExtremeWare software image contains the executable code that runs on the switch. An
image comes pre-installed from the factory on every switch. You can upgrade this image
by downloading a new version through the Configuration Manager. You can download
the image into either the primary or secondary image, and specify whether the switch
should be rebooted to use the new image.
The BootROM software initializes certain important switch variables during the switch
boot process.
6-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Upgrading Device Software Images
If a BootROM upgrade does not complete successfully, it could prevent the switch
from booting.
To download a new ExtremeWare software or BootROM image to an Extreme device, click
the Upgrade button at the top of the window.
The Upgrade Image on Devices window appears, as shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7: Upgrade Image on Devices window
To download a new software image to one or more Extreme Devices, do the following:
1 Select a device group or All Devices from the drop-down menu in the Device Groups
field.
The devices that belong to this group are displayed in the Available Devices list.
Click the Show Devices with Outdated Images button to show only devices with
images that differ from the image you specified in the Versions window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-13
Configuration Manager
The entries in the Current Image, New Image, and Image Status columns let you
determine which switches have outdated software images.
— The Current Image shows the image currently running in the device.
— The New Image information comes from the information you provide in the
Versions window for devices of this type (see “Specifying the Current Software
Versions” on page 6-15). If you have not specified a software version in the Versions
window, this will be blank.
— Image Status shows the status of the image compared to the version shown in the
New Image column. A green check
indicates that the version running in the
device and the New Image version are the same. A red X indicates that the image
running in the device differs from the New Image version. The status is also shown
as a red X if the New Images column is blank.
— The BootROM column shows the version of the BootROM running on the device.
2 From the Available Devices list, select the devices you want to upgrade, then click the
Add-> button.
If you want to upgrade the images on all the displayed devices, click the Add All->
button.
The devices you select will be moved to the Upgrade Image on Devices list.
To remove devices from the Upgrade Image on Devices list, select the devices and click
the <-Remove button. This moves the selected devices back to the Available Devices
list. Click <-Remove All to move all the devices in the Upgrade Image on Devices list
back to the Available Devices list.
3 In the Image Options box select the type of upgrade you want to perform:
— Click the Image Download button to specify a software image upgrade.
— Click the BootROM Download button to specify a BootROM upgrade.
4 For a software image upgrade do the following:
a Select the software image you want to download from the drop-down menu in the
Available Images field.
Note that there are different images for Summit devices and the “i” Series
devices. If you try to download an incompatible image, you will receive an error
message.
Standard images as shipped by Extreme Networks are provided in the directory
<EPICenter_install_dir>\user\tftp\images directory (by default
epc3_1\user\tftp\images in the Windows operating environment, or
/opt/epc3_1/user/tftp/images on a Solaris system).
6-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Specifying the Current Software Versions
You can check the Extreme Networks web site for the availability of newer software
releases.
b Select the download target in the Download Image To field: Current, Primary, or
Secondary.
5 For a BootROM upgrade, select the BootROM image you want to download from the
drop-down menu in the Available BootROMs field.
Standard BootROM images are provided in the directory
<EPICenter_install_dir>\user\tftp\bootrom directory (by default
epc3_1\user\tftp\bootrom in the Windows operating environment, or
/opt/epc3_1/user/tftp/bootrom on a Solaris system).
6 Indicate whether the devices should be rebooted:
— Click None to indicate the devices should not be rebooted.
— Click Now to indicate the devices should be rebooted immediately after the
download.
— Click After to indicate the devices should be rebooted at a later time, and enter the
number of hours (up to 72) to wait before doing the reboot.
7 Click Apply to start the software download to the selected devices.
Click Reset to return the window to its initial state (removing all devices from the
Upgrade Image on Devices list, removing all image selections, and so on).
8 When the upgrade process has completed, click Close to close the Upgrade Image on
Devices window.
Specifying the Current Software Versions
The Versions window lets you specify the current version of the ExtremeWare software for
pre-”i” Series devices (Summits/Black Diamonds) and “i” Series devices.
This information is used by the EPICenter software to determine whether an individual
device is running the version you have specified as the “current version.” This is the
version that appears in the New Image column in the Upgrade Image on Device window.
Click the Versions button at the top of the window to display the Configure New Image
window, as shown in Figure 6-8.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-15
Configuration Manager
Figure 6-8: Configure New Image window
Enter the version information into the appropriate field. The version information is the
version, release, and build number (in parentheses) associated with a specific
ExtremeWare software release. For example, for a Summit device this could be a version
such as 4.1.19 (2) or 5.0.4 (3). For the “i” chipset devices, it should be 6.1.5 (20) or later.
You must specify the version exactly in its correct form, including periods, spaces,
and parentheses. For example, version 6.1.5 b20 must be specified as “6.1.5 (20)”,
with a space between the 5 and the “(“. The version names are always in the form
#.#.#_(#) where # is a numeric, and _ indicates a space.
Configuring the TFTP Server
If you already have a TFTP server installed on the system where the EPICenter server is
running, you may choose to use that TFTP server instead of the one provided with
EPICenter. This is the server that actually does the downloading and uploading from the
devices.
The Server function lets you enable or disable the embedded TFTP server, and specify an
alternate path for the location of the server.
Click the Server button at the top of the window to display the Configure TFTP Server
window, as shown in Figure 6-9.
6-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Configuring the TFTP Server
Figure 6-9: Configure TFTP Server window
By default, the embedded TFTP server is enabled.
• Click the Disable EPICenter TFTP Server button to disable the server. You can then
provide a path in the Set TFTP Root field to the location of a different TFTP server.
• Click the Enable EPICenter TFTP Server button to enable the server.
If you disable the server, you will not be able to upload or download configuration
information or software to your devices, unless you provide a path to an alternate
TFTP server.
• To change the location of the TFTP server root, change the path in the Set TFTP Root
field.
By default, the TFTP server is installed in <epicenter_install_dir>\user\tftp
where <epicenter_install_dir> is the directory where the EPICenter server is
install. By default, the TFTP server is found in epc3_1\user\tftp in the Windows
operating environment, or /opt/epc3_1/user/tftp on a Solaris system.
EPICenter will create four subdirectories (baselines, bootrom, configs, and images) as
children of the directory you specify as the TFTP server root.
If you plan to use this TFTP server with other software, such as the ExtremeWare
CLI or for any other purpose, be aware of possible differences in the expected
locations of the TFTP server and other components such as ExtremeWare software
images or configuration files. See the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note
and Quick Start Guide for information on any known issues.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-17
Configuration Manager
Finding Devices
You can search for a device in the EPICenter database by name, by IP address, or by type
of device. This may be useful if you have a large number of devices in your inventory.
To search for a device, follow these steps:
1 Click Find at the top of the Inventory Manager page.
The Find Devices dialog, shown in Figure 6-10, is displayed.
Figure 6-10: Find Devices dialog
2 Enter your search criteria:
You can search for devices by name or by IP address. You can limit the search to a
specific device group, or to a specific type of Extreme device. Search criteria can
include:
— A device name. Click the Device Name button, and enter a complete or partial name
in the Search: field.
— An IP address. Click the IP Address button and enter a complete or partial IP
address in the Search: field. You can use the wild card characters * or ? in your
search criteria.
* acts as a wildcard for an entire octet (0-255)
6-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Finding Devices
? is a wildcard for a single digit (0-9)
— A device group. Select the device group from the drop-down menu in the device
group field. If you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices
in the device group you select will be found.
— A device type. Select the device type from the drop-down menu in the type field. If
you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices of the type
you select will be found.
3 Click Find to search for devices that meet the criteria you have specified. All devices
found are listed in the center panel. Information includes the device group in which the
device can be found, its name, IP address, and the type of device.
4 Double-click on a device in the results table to highlight the device in the Component
Tree, and to display the configuration information for that device.
5 Click New Search to clear all search criteria.
6 Click OK to close the search window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6-19
7
Using the Interactive Telnet
Application
This chapter describes how to use the Interactive Telnet application for:
• Configuring Extreme devices using Telnet and the ExtremeWare Command Line
Interface (CLI)
• Configuring third-party devices using interactive Telnet
Overview of the Interactive Telnet Applet
Users with Administrator or Manager access can view and modify configuration
information for Extreme switches (Summit, Alpine, and Black Diamond switches) and
third-party devices managed by EPICenter using Telnet and the ExtremeWare Command
Line Interface (CLI). You can also use the interactive Telnet capability to view and modify
configuration information for third-party devices being managed by EPICenter.
The Telnet application provides two usage modes:
• A Macro View, where you can set up CLI command macros, and run them on multiple
switches in a single operation. You set a macro to run repeatedly, and can save them in
the EPICenter database for future use.
• An individual session mode, where you can open a session on an individual device,
and execute commands just as you would from a standard Telnet interface.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-1
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
Using Telnet with Extreme Switches
The Telnet applet allows the scripting and playback of groups of CLI commands (macros)
to a selection of Extreme switches. You can also use this applet to run an interactive Telnet
session on an individual switch, including third-party switches.
Select Telnet from the Navigation Toolbar to display the Telnet module.
Select a device group in the Component Tree to display the Telnet Macro view for the
devices in that device group, as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1: The Telnet applet, macro interface
7-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Using Telnet with Extreme Switches
The Telnet Connections list displays the switches in the device group, and shows the
status of any macros that have run or are being run on the switch. If macros are not
supported on an individual switch (true of third party switches and a few Extreme
switches) the Macro Status will be “Macros not supported.”
If a switch is not supported by the EPICenter interactive Telnet feature, it will not
appear in the Telnet Connections list, or in the Component Tree in this applet. The
Summit24e2T and Summit24e2X are examples of devices that are not supported in
the EPICenter Telnet applet.
When a Telnet session is currently open on a switch, the switch name is highlighted in bold
in the list of switches in the Component Tree.
If a switch displayed in the Component Tree has an “S” in a red circle along with the
name, that means that the switch is not responding to SNMP requests. However,
the switch may still respond to HTTP or Telnet requests.
Running ExtremeWare Command Macros
The lower half of the Macro view page contains the macro command buffer. You can enter
a series of ExtremeWare commands into this buffer, which will form a script that can be
played to the set of switches you select in the Telnet Connections list.
Figure 7-2 shows a command script entered into the buffer.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-3
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
Figure 7-2: The Telnet record and play buffer
To create a macro for playback to a set of Extreme switches, follow these steps:
1 In the Telnet Connections list, select the set of switches where you want your
command macro to run. The switches need not have a Telnet session already open—the
macro play function will open a connection and log into the switch.
2 Enter a series of ExtremeWare commands into the macro buffer.
There are three ways to enter commands into the macro buffer:
— Type the commands directly into the buffer.
— Cut or copy commands from another location, either elsewhere in the buffer or from
an external document, and paste them into the buffer.
7-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Using Telnet with Extreme Switches
Click the right mouse button anywhere in the macro buffer to display a pop-up edit
menu which provides copy and paste functions. You can copy text from within the
macro buffer using the copy function from the pop-up menu. From an external
document, cut or copy text into the clipboard, then use the paste function from the
pop-up edit menu.
You cannot use the browser cut and paste functions for this purpose.
— Load a saved macro (see “Saving a Macro in the EPICenter Database” on page 7-7).
The source of the commands in the macro buffer is indicated by the Macro Source: field
at the top of the macro buffer panel.
There are four variables you can use in an ExtremeWare CLI command that will be
expanded when the target switch is contacted. These are:
Table 7-1: ExtremeView Macro Variables
Variable
Definition
<NAME>
The name of the switch
<DATE>
The current date of the EPICenter server
<TIME>
The current time of the EPICenter server
<ADDRESS>
The IP address of the switch
For example, you can enter the command
upload config 45.1.12.101 extreme/<NAME>.cfg
and the macro substitutes the name of each switch on which it executes the macro.
These variables can only be used in macros, not in an interactive Telnet session.
Because macros are intended for unattended, batch-type use, you should not
use interactive commands in a macro. They may cause the command to run in
a loop.
3 To set the macro so that it plays back repeatedly at a specified interval, click the Repeat
button to display the Macro Repeat pop-up window.
a Check the Repeating check-box.
b Enter an interval (in seconds) in the Repeat Delay field.
c
Click OK.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-5
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
4 Click Play to initiate playback of the macro on the selected switches. This opens a
connection to the switch, logs in using the switch login and password as specified in the
Inventory Manager, and runs the macro.
If the macro is a repeating macro, it will repeat sequentially on all selected switches
until you click Stop.
You can execute just a portion of a macro by highlighting just the portion of the macro
that you want to execute. Only the selected portion will execute when you initiate the
playback. This will not affect saving the macro—the entire macro will be saved even if
only a portion is highlighted.
The Macro Status column in the Telnet Connections table indicates the status of the
macro as execution progresses on the selected switches. The states are:
— Pending—the macro is intended to run on this switch, but has not yet started.
— Playing—the macro is currently running.
— Stopped—the macro was stopped before it completed.
— Complete—the macro has completed running.
— Macros Not Supported—macros cannot be run on this device (may appear if you
select a non-Extreme device or the Summit Px1 or Summit 24e2T/X devices).
— Not Available—macros cannot be run on this device (may appear if you select a
non-Extreme device).
— Failed—a failure occurred when the macro was run. This is frequently due to an
inability to connect to the switch.
Macro play will be automatically stopped if you exit the Telnet applet (by
selecting another applet or logging out) while a macro is running.
The Telnet session is usually left open after the macros complete. However, EPICenter
allows only five Telnet sessions to be open concurrently. Therefore, if you select more than
five switches for macro playback, EPICenter will open five connections, then close the
oldest (the first connection) in order to open a connection on the sixth switch, and so on.
When macro playback has completed on all the selected switches, the Telnet sessions are
left open on the last five switches. Open telnet sessions are indicated by displaying the
switch name in bold in the Component Tree.
Any open Telnet sessions will be closed when you leave the Telnet applet to view a
different EPICenter applet.
To view the results of the macro execution on a particular switch, select the switch in the
Telnet switch list in the Component Tree. This displays the active Telnet session running on
7-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Using Telnet with Extreme Switches
the switch, and you can view the progress of the macro as the various ExtremeWare
commands are executed.
Saving a Macro in the EPICenter Database
To save a macro you’ve defined, click the Save button. This displays the Macro Save
pop-up window (see Figure 7-3).
Figure 7-3: Saving a macro to the database
Enter a name for the macro, an optional description, and click OK.
All current contents of the macro buffer will be saved in the database under the name you
specify. Selecting a portion of the macro (to playback only part of the macro) does not affect
the save function.
To load a saved macro, click the Load button. This displays the Load Macro pop-up
window (see Figure 7-4).
Figure 7-4: Loading a macro from the database
The pop-up window displays the names and descriptions of all saved macros, as well as
the owner (EPICenter user) who created the macro, and the time at which it was last saved.
Select the macro you want to load and click Load. You can select only one macro to load at
a time.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-7
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
The contents of the saved macro will replace any previous contents in the macro buffer.
You can delete a saved macro by clicking the Delete button. A pop-up window similar to
the Load Macro window appears. Select one or more macros to delete, then click Delete.
You will be asked to confirm the deletion.
Running a Telnet Session on an Individual Switch
You can open a Telnet session on an individual switch by selecting the switch from the
Telnet switch list in the Component Tree. This opens a Telnet session to the selected switch,
and then waits for command input, just as with any other Telnet session.
7-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Using Telnet with Extreme Switches
Devices with open
Telnet sessions
Figure 7-5: A newly-opened Telnet session
The Telnet session window is a two-tone window—the bottom of the window is white, the
top is grey. The last 25 lines of Telnet commands and responses always appear in the white
portion of the window. As output grows, the older lines scroll up into the grey portion of
the screen. This makes it easy to tell whether you are viewing the most recent Telnet
output.
The Telnet session window will display the commands and results from macros that are
run on the switch. You can also type in commands individually.
You cannot use the macro variables (<NAME>, <DATE>, <TIME>, <ADDRESS>) in a command
you enter interactively.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-9
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
Copy/Paste from an Interactive Telnet Session
A copy and paste function is available within an interactive Telnet session. Copy and paste
let you copy from one interactive Telnet session into another interactive session or into the
macro buffer. You can also paste commands from an external document into an interactive
Telnet session. The copy and paste commands reside on a pop-up menu that you can
display using the right mouse button (see Figure 7-6).
Figure 7-6: An open Telnet session showing the pop-up edit menu
• To copy from an interactive session, highlight the lines you want to copy, click the right
mouse button and select Copy from the pop-up menu.
• To paste into an interactive Telnet session or into the macro buffer, place the cursor
where you want the lines inserted, click the right mouse button and select Paste from
the pop-up menu.
7-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Using Interactive Telnet with Third-Party Devices
You cannot use the browser cut and paste functions for this purpose.
Macro Recording and Playback from an Interactive Telnet Session
The record function creates a macro by echoing commands that you type in an interactive
Telnet session, into the Macro Record/Play Buffer. The record function is controlled by
commands from a pop-up menu displayed by using the right mouse button (see
Figure 7-6).
• To start recording a macro, click the right mouse button and select Start Record from
the pop-up menu
Everything you type after this is copied into the macro Record/Play Buffer until you
select Stop Record from the pop-up menu
• To stop recording a macro, click the right mouse button and select Stop Record from the
pop-up menu
• To play back the macro to multiple switches, select Telnet in the Component tree, and
play back the macro in the main Telnet page as discussed in the section Running
ExtremeWare Command Macros on page 7-3
• To play the macro on an individual switch, select the switch in the Component Tree to
display its interactive Telnet session, click the right mouse button, and select Play from
the pop-up menu
Using Interactive Telnet with Third-Party Devices
You can open an interactive Telnet session on a third-party device and execute commands
interactively. Select the switch from the Telnet device list in the Component Tree. This
opens a Telnet session to the selected switch, and waits for input as appropriate to the
device’s telnet interface. Unlike Telnet to an Extreme Networks switch, it does not log you
in to the device. You must log in as required for the device.
You can enter and execute commands using the device’s command line interface. The
commands and any resulting output will be displayed in the session window just as if you
were running a Telnet session on any other client.
The Telnet session window is a two-tone window—the bottom of the window is white, the
top is grey. The last 25 lines of Telnet commands and responses always appear in the white
portion of the window. As output grows, the older lines scroll up into the grey portion of
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-11
Using the Interactive Telnet Application
the screen. This makes it easy to tell whether you are viewing the most recent Telnet
output.
The copy and paste feature, macros, and the macro variables (<NAME>, <DATE>, <TIME>,
<ADDRESS>) are not supported for third-party devices.
To close the Telnet session, type the appropriate exit command on the command line. The
session will be closed automatically when you exit the Telnet applet.
Finding Devices
You can search for a device in the EPICenter database by name, by IP address, or by type
of device. This may be useful if you have a large number of devices in your inventory.
To search for a device, follow these steps:
1 Click Find at the top of the Inventory Manager page.
The Find Devices dialog, shown in Figure 7-7, is displayed.
Figure 7-7: Find Devices dialog
2 Enter your search criteria:
7-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Finding Devices
You can search for devices by name or by IP address. You can limit the search to a
specific domain, or to a specific type of Extreme device. Search criteria can include:
— A device name. Click the Device Name button, and enter a complete or partial name
in the Search: field.
— An IP address. Click the IP Address button and enter a complete or partial IP
address in the Search: field. You can use the wild card characters * or ? in your
search criteria.
* acts as a wildcard for an entire octet (0-255)
? is a wildcard for a single digit (0-9)
— A device group. Select the device group from the drop-down menu in the device
group field. If you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices
in the device group you select will be found.
— A device type. Select the device type from the drop-down menu in the type field. If
you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices of the type
you select will be found.
3 Click Find to search for devices that meet the criteria you have specified. All devices
found are listed in the center panel. Information includes the domain in which the
device can be found, its name, IP address, and the type of device.
4 Double-click on a device in the results table to highlight the device in the Component
Tree, and to initiate a telnet session on the device (see “Running a Telnet Session on an
Individual Switch” on page 7-8).
5 Click New Search to clear all search criteria.
6 Click OK to close the search window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
7-13
8
The Grouping Manager
This chapter describes how to use the Grouping Manager to do the following:
• Create new groups.
• Create new user or host resources.
• Add resources or groups to a parent group.
• Define relationships between resources.
• Add attributes to a resource or a group.
• Searching for resources.
• Import users and hosts from Windows NT Domain Controller, NIS, an LDAP directory,
or a file.
Overview of the Grouping Manager
The Grouping Manager allows you to collect network “resources” (devices, ports, users,
hosts, and VLANs) into groups that can be manipulated or managed as a single entity.
A group is a hierarchical collection of resources that have been grouped together for some
common purpose. A group can contain individual resources as well as other (subordinate)
groups. Groups (except for Device Groups) are not exclusive—a resource can be a member
(child) of more than one group.
Resources are individual elements in your network, such as a device, port, host (end
station), user, or VLAN. Device, port, and VLAN resources are defined externally to the
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-1
The Grouping Manager
Grouping Manager, through the EPICenter discovery capability and the Inventory and
VLAN applets. User and Host resources are defined within the Grouping module, either
by importing the information from an external source (such as an LDAP directory, NT
Domain Controller, NIS server, or a file) or by creating the resources within the grouping
module. A group can also be considered a “resource” when it is used as an entity in the
same way as an individual resource would be used—such as in a Policy definition within
the ExtremeWare EPICenter Policy Manager, an optional, separately-licensed product.
With the exception of Device Groups and Port Groups, the group and resource definitions
you create through the Grouping applet are primarily useful within the Policy Manager.
For more information on how groups are used within that application, see the ExtremeWare
EPICenter Policy Manager Software User Guide.
You can define groups and add resources to them to create an organizational structure that
facilitates managing your network. The EPICenter software provides several predefined
groups:
• Device Groups
• Hosts
• Import Sources
• Port Groups
• Users
You can define your own groups at the same hierarchical level as the predefined groups, or
as subordinate groups (children) of an existing group. You can assign resources to your
own user-defined groups and to the predefined groups, with the exception of Device
Groups and Import Sources.
Three of the predefined groups—Hosts, Port Groups, and Users—initially have no
members. Although these groups are provided to help you organize your host, user, and
port resources, they can contain children of any resource type. You can create new groups
as members of these groups, or add resources of any type directly to them.
• Port Groups may be used by the Real Time Statistics applet and the IP/MAC Address
Finder applet. However, these applets do not support hierarchical groups—if you have
subordinate groups within a port group, the subordinate layers are all collapsed into a
single layer. Resources of types other than ports are ignored by these applets.
Port Groups, along with all the other types of groups and resources, may also be used
by the optional Policy Manager module.
8-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
• The Hosts and Users groups (either the predefined groups or subordinate groups) may
be used by the optional Policy Manager. This is also true of all user-defined groups. No
other EPICenter applets currently support groups of these types.
In a group that contains resources of different types, the Policy Manager will ignore
those resources that are not relevant to the purpose for which the group has been
selected.
The other two predefined groups, the Device Groups group and the Import Sources group,
are restricted in the way they can be used.
Device Groups. The “Device Groups” group contains the device groups and devices
known to the EPICenter inventory database. Device groups are created within the
EPICenter Inventory Manager applet, and devices are added or discovered, and are
assigned to device groups, within that applet. All port resources are also defined in
association with the devices known to the Inventory Manager.
• You cannot add resources to or remove resources from the Device Groups group
through the Grouping Manager.
• You can add resources that are children of Device Groups group—device groups,
devices, and ports—as members (children) of other groups.
Import Sources. The Import Sources group is used to contain resources imported from
an external source, such as a file, NT Domain Controller, or LDAP directory. When you
perform an import operation, the Grouping Manager creates a new group under the
Import Sources group, and puts all the imported resources under that group.
• You cannot add groups or individual resources as children of the Import Sources group
except by using the Import function.
• You cannot remove any of the members (including sub-groups) of an imported group.
The imported group can only be deleted in its entirety, using the Destroy function.
• You can add resources that are children of an Import Sources group as members
(children) of other groups.
Resource Attributes
Attributes are name and value pairs that you can use for a variety of purposes. You can
associate attributes with both groups and individual resources, including resources that
are members of the Device Groups and Import Sources groups.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-3
The Grouping Manager
Some predefined resources, such as devices and imported resources, may also have
predefined attributes. For example, device resources have their IP address as an attribute.
Imported resources may bring with them sets of attributes determined by the content and
configuration of the import source. Certain attributes, such as IP/subnet address and
DLCS ID, are used by the optional Policy Manager applet to help it map between
high-level named resources such as Users, and the information required to generate a QoS
policy (IP address and port information).
You can also define attributes of your own, and then use them as search criteria when you
want to find sets of resources with common attributes.
Relationships between Resources
THe Grouping Manager also supports “relationships” between User, Host, and Port
resources. These relationships are used by the optional Policy Manager applet, and help
the Policy Manager generate specific QoS rules that it derives from high-level policy
specifications that are given in terms of named objects such as users or hosts. See the
ExtremeWare EPICenter Policy Manager Software User Guide for details.
Displaying EPICenter Groups and Resources
When you click the Groups button in the Navigation toolbar, the main Grouping Manager
window is displayed, showing Resource Details for the root-level group. Figure 8-1 shows
the Grouping Manager window with a number of the groups expanded to show their
children.
8-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Groups
Children
Device Resources
Tab to display Children
or Relationships
Tab to display
Attributes
Figure 8-1: Resource Details view
The Component Tree on the left shows the currently-defined resources. Initially, this shows
only the root-level group named “Groups.” Click on the plus sign to the left of a resource
to display the children of that resource.
Children can be individual resources (devices, hosts, users, or ports) or groups. The icons
indicate the type of resource:
indicates a general-purpose group.
indicates a device group.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-5
The Grouping Manager
indicates a host resource.
indicates a user resource.
indicates a VLAN resource.
Devices, slots, and ports are indicated by icons that vary based on the specific device
model and port type. The icons are the same as are used in the Component Tree of the
Inventory module and other EPICenter modules. Although slots appear in the
Component Tree, they are not true resources, and cannot be children of groups within
the Grouping Manager.
VLANs may appear as children in the Component Tree. However, unlike devices and
Device Groups, VLANs will appear in this list only after they have been specifically
added as children of a group. VLANs known to EPICenter but not used as children of
a group will not appear in this list.
Resource Details
The Resource Details display in the main panel shows the following information for the
group (or resource) that is selected in the Component Tree on the left:
• Name: the name of the Resource.
For ports, the name of the port is the Device name followed by the port number. For
example, S1 3 is the name of port 3 on the device named S1.
• Description: a description of the resource (optional for user-defined resources).
— For Device Groups, this is the description entered for the group in the Inventory
Manager.
— For devices, this is the device description (sysDescr variable) if present in the agent.
— For ports, this is the interface description (ifDescr variable) if present in the agent.
— For VLANs, this contains the protocol and tag information.
• Type: the type of resource (Group, Device, Host, Port, User, VLAN).
Note that if you select a slot under a chassis device in the tree, the Resource Details
window displays it as a “Slot” resource. However, a slot is not a true resources in that it
cannot be added as a child of a group— its ports can be used as resources, but the slot
as an entity cannot.
• Source: the origin of the resource. The source determines what actions are allowed
relative to the resource, This can be one of the following:
8-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
— EPICenter indicates that the resource was defined by the EPICenter software: either
by the Grouping Manager in the case of the predefined groups, or by another
EPICenter applet in the case of device group, device, port, or VLAN resources. You
cannot modify these resources or their children (if they are groups) through the
Grouping Applet.
— Manual indicates that this is a user-defined resource, created within the grouping
applet using the New button. These resources can be deleted from the Grouping
Manager using the Destroy function. The exception is the three predefined groups,
Hosts, Users, and Port Groups, which are considered Manual resources but cannot
be destroyed. If the user-defined resource is a group, you can add and remove
children as desired.
— Imported resources are assigned a source name as part of the Import process. See
“Importing Resources” on page 8-28 for more information.
User-defined (Manual) resources can be deleted using the Destroy function.
System-defined (EPICenter) and imported resources cannot be deleted, although they
can be removed as children of other groups to which you have added them. See
“Deleting Resources” on page page 8-11for more information on deleting resources,
and “Removing A Child Resource from a Group” on page 8-15for more information on
removing resources from groups.
• Unique Name: a name that uniquely defines this resource within the Source scope. For
user-defined resources (Source is Manual) this will always be blank.
— For pre-defined resources, the Unique Name is the same as the Resource Name.
— For device resources, the Unique Name is the device IP address.
— For port resources, the Unique Name is the IP address of the device followed by the
port number. For ports on a chassis device, the port number combines the slot
number and the port number.
— For resources imported from a file or LDAP directory, the Unique Name is specified
in the input process, and may be different from the Resource Name.
Below these fields there are two tabbed pages whose contents depends on the type of
resource being displayed.
• For Groups, you can view a list of Children of the group. This lists the resources
(individual resources or subordinate groups) associated with the selected group. For
each child, the list includes the resource name, its type, and its source.
• For User, Port and Host resources, you can view a list of Relationships for the resource.
This displays a list of other resources related to the selected resource.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-7
The Grouping Manager
• For all types, you can view a list of the Attributes associated with the resource. The
exception is the top level (root) node, “Groups,” which has no attributes.
Resource Filtering
The field at the top of the Component Tree provides a drop-down menu from which you
can select a filter to apply to the Component Tree display. This filter controls the types of
resources that are displayed as subcomponents of the groups in the tree. This feature is
useful when you have a large number of resources of various types, and lets you limit the
display to resources of a specific type in which you are interested.
Groups are always displayed. The following filter choices determine the types of
individual resources that will be displayed within the groups:
• All allows resource children of all types to be displayed.
• Devices shows only the Device resources within the groups.
• Hosts shows only Host resources within the groups.
• Ports shows only Device and Port resources within the groups.
• Users shows only User resources within the groups.
• VLANs shows only VLAN resources within the groups.
Grouping Manager Functions
The buttons in the navigation bar at the top of the page provide the following functions:
• New lets you create a new Group, User, or Host resource.
• Destroy lets you delete a user-defined resource. This completely eliminates the
resource from the EPICenter database, as well as removing it from all groups of which
it was a member. This is not the same as removing a resource from an individual group.
You cannot destroy system-defined resources or individual imported resources. You
can only destroy imported resources by destroying the entire Import Source group.
• Import lets you import resources from an external source such as an NT Domain
Controller, LDAP database, or a specially-formatted text file.
• Find lets you find a resource based on a set of search criteria that can include a resource
name, description, type, source, or attribute value.
• Help displays on-line help for the Grouping Manager and the Resource Details display.
These functions are described in detail in the following sections.
8-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Creating a New Resource
Creating a New Resource
You can create new groups and add new User and Host resources through the New
Resource function. You can also associate attributes with the resource during this process.
This function creates a new resource. To add an existing resource to an existing group, see
“Adding a Resource as a Child of a Group” on page 8-12.
You cannot add resources of any type to the Device Groups or Import Sources
groups, or any subgroups within those groups.
To add a new resource, do the following:
1 In the Component Tree, select the Group to which you want the resource added. To add
a new group at the highest level, select the root “Groups” node. The new resource will
be added as a child of the group you select.
If you plan to add User or Host resources, it is suggested that you add these initially to
the User or Host groups, or to another group you have created, rather than to the
root-level group. Once you’ve created a resource, you can add it as a child of other
groups. For example, a User resource “Fred” can be a member of both the group
“Marketing” and the group “Chicago.”
2 Click the New button at the top of the Grouping Manager window.
The Add a New Resource to Group window, as shown in Figure 8-2, is displayed.
Figure 8-2: Adding a new resource
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-9
The Grouping Manager
3 Enter identifying information in the fields at the top of the dialog:
— Resource Name: a name for the resource. The name can include any characters
except a colon.
— Resource Type: select a type (Group, User, or Host) from the drop-down menu.
If you are creating this resource as a member of the Hosts group, the type defaults to
Host. If you are creating it as a member of the Users group, the type defaults to User.
Otherwise, the type is set to Group by default.
— Resource Description: an optional description of the resource
4 Define any attributes that you want to associate with this resource. Attributes are
name-value pairs that can be used as search criteria, and are used by the EPICenter
Policy Manager. For a more detailed explanation of attributes, see “Adding and
Removing Attributes” on page 8-19.
a Enter the name of the attribute in the Name field.
b Select an attribute type from the drop-down list in the Type field:
Generic: any attribute not specified as one of the other two types. The value is a
string. You can use this attribute to classify your resources in any way you want, for
search purposes.
IP/Subnet: this attribute specifies an IP address and subnet mask. For Host or User
resources, this attribute may be used by the Policy Manager.
DLCS ID: this attribute specifies a DLCS ID (user ID or host ID) that can be detected
by DLCS in the switch. DLCS ID attributes are most commonly created when a
resource is imported from an external source such as an NT Domain Controller or
NIS that contains user and host information.
For Host and User resources, this attribute may be used by the EPICenter Policy
Manager. If DLCS is enabled on the switches in your network, attribute and
relationship information (mappings between users, hosts, and IP addresses) for host
and user resources with DLCS IDs, will be maintained automatically.
c
Enter a value for the attribute:
For a Generic attribute, enter a string.
For an IP/Subnet attribute, fill in the fields provided, and edit the subnet mask
specification as appropriate.
For a DLCS ID, enter a string. In order to be recognized correctly by the DLCS in
Extreme switches, this should be the user name (login name) or host name as known
within the network.
8-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Creating a New Resource
d To add this attribute to the list of attributes associated with this resource, click the
Add Attribute to Resource button
.
e To remove an attribute from the list of attributes, select the attribute in the list and
click the Remove Attribute from Resource button
.
5 When you have finished entering attributes, click the OK button to save your new
resource definition.
To close this dialog without saving the resource definition, click the Cancel button.
Deleting Resources
The Destroy button in the Grouping Manager toolbar lets you delete user-defined
resources from the EPICenter database. The destroy function removes the resource from
the database entirely, removing it from all groups where it exists as a child.
You can only destroy resources whose source is “Manual” (except for the
predefined groups) and the root groups of imported resources. You cannot destroy
the predefined groups, system-defined resources (devices, device groups, or ports)
whose source is EPICenter, or individual imported resources (where the source is a file,
LDAP database etc.). If you select a resource you cannot delete, the Destroy button will not
be available.
To delete a user-defined resource do the following:
1 Select the resource in the Component Tree.
2 Click the Destroy button on the toolbar.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Click OK to confirm that you want to delete
this resource.
If you delete a group, any orphaned children of the group (resources that are not members
of any other group) are also deleted.
If you delete a Host or User, all relationships to other resources are also deleted.
To remove a resource as a child of a group, use the Remove function, see “Removing A
Child Resource from a Group” on page 8-15. This just removes the parent-child
relationship with the group, but does not delete the resource from the database.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-11
The Grouping Manager
Adding a Resource as a Child of a Group
A group’s children are individual resources or subordinate groups that will be
manipulated or managed together. A resource is placed into a group as it is created—
either the root-level group, or the group that was selected when it was created. However,
because a resource can be a member of multiple groups, you may wish to add an existing
resource to an additional group, or move it to a different group. To add a resource to a
group, you select the resource from a list of the resources that are currently defined in the
EPICenter database.
You can add individual resources as children of a group, or you can add groups as
children. You cannot add an ancestor group as a child of one of its subordinate groups.
When you add a group as a child of another group, all members of the sub-group (its
children) are considered members of the higher level (ancestor) group. As membership in
the sub-group changes, so does the membership in the higher level (ancestor) group. This
can have important effects when a group is used by another EPICenter module. For
example, suppose you create group “A” that contains two groups of hosts “HostsA” and
“HostsB”, and then use group A in defining access list policies through the Policy
Manager. The Policy Manager will generate access list rules for traffic related to all the
hosts in groups HostsA and HostsB. If you subsequently change the membership of
HostsB, and auto-configuration of policies is enabled in the Policy Manager, the QoS rules
that define the access lists will automatically be recomputed and reconfigured. (See the
ExtremeWare EPICenter Policy Manager Software User Guide for more information on this
optional module).
Adding resources to a group as individuals is a more static relationship—resources remain
as children until they are explicitly removed from the group (or deleted from the EPICenter
database).
To add a resource or group of resources to a higher-level group, do the following:
1 In the Component Tree, select the group to which you want to add the resource, so that
the group’s information is displayed in the Resource Details view.
2 Click the tab labeled Children to display the list of children belonging to this group.
3 Click the Add button at the bottom of the list of Children to display the Add Resources
to Group pop-up dialog, as shown in Figure 8-3.
8-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding a Resource as a Child of a Group
Figure 8-3: Adding Resources to a Group
This window has two parts:
— A display of the resources in the EPICenter database that are available to be added
to the group.
— A list of the resources you’ve selected to add.
4 Select a resource from one of the lists in the Select Resources to be Added panel at the
left hand side of the dialog window. You can make your selection from either side of the
panel.
The Select Resources to be Added panel is split into two parts:
— The Component Tree in the left half of the panel displays the groups that contain
resources of interest. It may include devices if you have filtering set to display port
resources.
The drop-down menu field at the top of the Component Tree lets you select a filter
to apply to the resource display. This filter controls the types of resources that are
displayed as subcomponents of the groups in the tree.
Groups are always displayed. The following filter choices determine the types of
individual resources that will be displayed within the groups:
All allows resource children of all types to be displayed.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-13
The Grouping Manager
Devices shows only Device resources within the groups.
Hosts shows only Host resources within the groups.
Ports shows only Device and Port resources within the groups.
Users shows only User resources within the groups.
VLANs shows only VLAN resources within the groups.
— The resource list in the right half of the panel displays the resources available within
the group you have selected in the Component Tree.
5 Select one or more resources from the list of individual resources, or select a resource
group or device from the left-hand list.
6 Click the Add button
to add your selections to the Resource Results list. You
can select a group in the Component Tree or one or more groups or individual resources
from the resource list.
Click the Add All button
to add all the individual resources in the
right-hand list to the Resource Results list.
There is an important difference between adding individual resources as
children of a group, and adding a group as a child of another group. Adding a
group to the results list does not have the same effect as selecting the group in
the Component Tree, and then adding its children using the Add All button.
When you add a group as a child of another group, all members of the subgroup (its
children) are considered members of the higher level (ancestor) group. As membership
in a subgroup changes, so does the membership in the higher level (ancestor) group.
Resources added individually, on the other hand, remain as children until they are
explicitly removed from the group (or deleted from the EPICenter database).
To search for a resource using the Query function, click the Find button. You can add
the results of your query directly into your Resource Results list by selecting the
resources you want to add and clicking the Add button at the bottom of the Query
window. See “Searching for a Resource”on page 8-23 for more information on the Find
function.
7 You can remove resources from the Resource Results list if you change your mind about
your selections.
Select one or more resources in the Resource Results list, and click the Remove button
to remove the selected resources, and return them to the Resources to be Added list.
8-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding a Resource as a Child of a Group
Click the Remove All button to clear the Resource Results list.
8 Click OK to add the resources in the Resource Results list to the list of children for this
resource, or Cancel to cancel the Add function.
9 To save your changes to the EPICenter database, click the Save button at the bottom of
the Grouping Manager window.
If you attempt to begin a different operation or leave the Grouping Manager applet
without saving, the Grouping Manager will prompt you to save your changes.
However, you can add and remove children and attributes to the group you’ve selected
in multiple operations before you save.
Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window to cancel the changes you’ve made
to this group.
Removing A Child Resource from a Group
If you have added a resource as a child of a group, you can remove the resource from that
group using the Remove function. This removes the parent-child relationship between the
resource and the group. This does not remove the resource from the EPICenter database,
unless it is a user-defined resource and this is the only instance of the resource. (Removing
all instances of a resource is the equivalent of destroying the resource.)
To remove a resource from a group, do the following:
1 Select the parent group in the Component Tree to display the group in the Resource
Details window.
2 Select the Children tab to display the resources that are children of the group.
3 Select the resource you want to remove.
4 Click the Remove button at the bottom of the window.
5 To save your changes to the EPICenter database, click the Save button at the bottom of
the Grouping Manager window.
If you attempt to begin a different operation or leave the Grouping Manager applet
without saving, the Grouping Manager will prompt you to save your changes.
However, you can add and remove children and attributes to the group you’ve selected
in multiple operations before you save.
Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window to cancel the changes you’ve made
to this group.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-15
The Grouping Manager
Note that you can also remove resources by locating them using the Find function, and
removing them using the search results list. See “Searching for a Resource”on page 8-23
for more information on the Find function.
Removing a resource from all groups of which it is a member is the equivalent of
destroying the resource.
Adding Relationships to a Resource
Individual resources cannot have children. However, certain types of resources (Hosts,
Users, or Ports) can have relationships. Devices cannot have either relationships or
children.
For example, a Host may have a relationship with a User, which indicates that the User is
associated with the IP address of that Host. A Host may also have a relationship with a
port, indicating that the host communicates over that port.
These relationships may be used by the Policy Manager applet to create low-level QoS
policy rules based on named higher-level objects such as users and hosts. Relationships
can be created between the following:
• Hosts and Users
• Hosts and Ports
• Users and Ports
These relationships are always reciprocal: when you create a relationship between two
resources, it is added simultaneously to both resources.
1 In the Component Tree, select the resource to which you want to add a relationship, so
that it is displayed in the Resource Details view.
2 Click the tab labeled Relationships to display the list of children belonging to this
group.
3 Click the Add button at the bottom of the list of Children to display the Add
Relationship to Group pop-up dialog, as shown in Figure 8-4.
8-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding a Resource as a Child of a Group
Figure 8-4: Adding Relationships to a Resource
This window has two parts:
— A display of the resources in the EPICenter database that are eligible to be used in a
relationship.
— A list of the relationships you’ve selected to add to the resource.
4 Select a resource from one of the lists in the Select Resources to be Added panel at the
left hand side of the dialog window. You can make your selection from either side of the
panel.
The Select Resources to be Added panel is split into two parts:
— The Component Tree in the left half of the panel displays the groups that contain
resources of interest.
The drop-down menu field at the top of the Component Tree lets you select a filter
to apply to the resource display. You can filter the resources that will be presented as
children of the groups in the tree.
All allows resource children of all types to be displayed.
Devices shows only Device resources. (However, devices cannot be used in
relationships, so nothing is displayed if you select this filter.)
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-17
The Grouping Manager
Hosts shows only Host resources.
Ports shows only Device and Port resources.
Users shows only User resources.
VLANs shows only VLAN resources. (However, VLAN resources cannot be used in
relationships, so nothing is displayed if you select this filter.)
— The resource list in the right half of the panel displays the resources available within
the group you have selected in the Component Tree. It will display only the types of
resources that are eligible to have relationships (host, users, and ports).
5 Select one or more resources in the list, and click the Add button
to add your
selections to the Resource Results list. You can select a group in the Component Tree or
one or more groups or individual resources from the resource list.
Click the Add All button
list to the Resource Results list.
to add all the individual resources in the right-hand
To search for a resource using the Search function, click the Find button. You can add
the results of your query directly into your Resource Results list by selecting the
resources you want to add and clicking the Add button at the bottom of the Search
window. See “Searching for a Resource”on page 8-23 for more information on the Find
function.
6 You can remove resources from the Resource Results list if you change your mind about
your selections.
Select one or more resources in the Resource Results list, and click the Remove button
to remove the selected resources, and return them to the Resources to be Added list.
Click the Remove All button to clear the Resource Results list.
7 Click OK to add the resources in the Resource Results list to the list of relationships for
this resource.
8 To save your changes to the EPICenter database, click the Save button at the bottom of
the Grouping Manager window.
If you attempt to begin a different operation or leave the Grouping Manager applet
without saving, the Grouping Manager will prompt you to save your changes.
However, you can add and remove relationships and attributes in multiple operations
on the resource you’ve selected before you save.
Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window to cancel the changes you’ve made
to this group.
8-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding and Removing Attributes
Removing Relationships from a Resource
To remove a relationship between two resources (Hosts, Users, or Ports) do the following:
1 In the Component Tree, select one of the resources that is involved in the relationship,
so that the resource is displayed in the Resource Details window.
2 Select the Relationship tab to display the relationships for the resource.
3 Select the relationship you want to remove.
4 Click the Remove button at the bottom of the window. The relationship will be
removed both from the resource you are viewing, and from the other resource involved
in the relationship.
For example, if Host resource “HostB” has a relationship with user resource “Watson”
the relationship will appear in the relationship list of both resources. If you display the
relationships for resource HostB, and remove the relationship with user Watson, the
relationship will be removed from the relationship lists of both HostB and Watson.
5 To save your changes to the EPICenter database, click the Save button at the bottom of
the Grouping Manager window.
If you attempt to begin a different operation or leave the Grouping Manager applet
without saving, the Grouping Manager will prompt you to save your changes.
However, you can add and remove relationships and attributes in multiple operations
on the resource you’ve selected before you save.
Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window to cancel the changes you’ve made
to this group.
Removing a relationship does not affect the group memberships of either resource.
If you destroy a resource, any relationships with that resource will automatically be
removed from the other resources involved.
Adding and Removing Attributes
Any resource (individual resources or groups) can have attributes. Attributes are simply
name-value pairs that can be used for a number of purposes.
There are three types of attributes:
• Generic: a user-defined attribute not specified as one of the other two types. The value
is a string. You can use this attribute to classify your resources in any way you want, for
search purposes.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-19
The Grouping Manager
• IP/Subnet: an IP address and subnet mask. This attribute may be used by the Policy
Manager to map a User or Host resource to an IP address.
• DLCS ID: this attribute specifies a DLCS ID (user ID or host ID) that can be detected by
DLCS in the switch. DLCS ID attributes are most commonly created when a resource is
imported from an external source such as an NT Domain Controller or NIS that
contains user and host information.
For Host and User resources, this attribute may be used by the EPICenter Policy
Manager. If DLCS is enabled on the switches in your network, attribute and
relationship information (mappings between users, hosts, and IP addresses) for host
and user resources with DLCS IDs, will be maintained automatically.
To view the attributes associated with a resource, do the following:
1 Select the resource in the Component Tree, so that it is displayed in the Resource Details
view.
2 Click the Attributes tab. This will display the attributes (if any) associated with the
resource, as shown in Figure 8-5.
8-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding and Removing Attributes
Figure 8-5: Resource attribute display
To add an attribute to the displayed resource, do the following:
1 Make sure the Attributes page is displayed. If it is not, the Add Attributes button will
not be present.
2 Click the Add Attribute to Resource button
.
The Add Attributes pop-up dialog appears, as shown in Figure 8-6.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-21
The Grouping Manager
Figure 8-6: Adding attributes to a resource
3 Enter the name of the attribute in the Attribute Name field.
4 Select an attribute type from the drop-down list in the Attribute Type field:
Generic: any user-defined attribute other than an IP Address or DLCS ID.
IP/Subnet: an IP address and subnet mask.
DLCS ID: a User ID or Host ID as it will be detected by DLCS in the switch.
5 Enter a value for the attribute:
For a Generic attribute, enter a string.
For an IP/Subnet attribute, fill in the fields provided, and edit the subnet mask
specification as appropriate.
For a DLCS ID, enter a string. In order to be recognized correctly by DLCS in Extreme
switches, this should be the user name (login name) or host name as known within the
network.
6 CLick OK to enter the attribute into the attribute list.
7 To save your changes to the EPICenter database, click the Save button at the bottom of
the Grouping Manager window.
If you attempt to begin a different operation or leave the Grouping Manager applet
without saving, the Grouping Manager will prompt you to save your changes.
However, you can add and remove relationships and attributes in multiple operations
on the resource you’ve selected before you save.
Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window to cancel the changes you’ve made
to this group.
To remove an attribute from the list of attributes, do the following:
1 Select one or more attributes you want to remove.
2 Click the Remove Attribute from Resource button
8-22
.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Searching for a Resource
3 To save your changes to the EPICenter database, click the Save button at the bottom of
the Grouping Manager window.
Click the Cancel button at the bottom of the window to cancel the changes you’ve made
to this group.
Searching for a Resource
If you have a large number of resources defined in your EPICenter database, it may be
cumbersome to find a specific resource in the Component Tree. In addition, you may want
to be able to quickly identify all the resources that share a certain attribute. The Grouping
Manager’s Search function lets you find resources using any of the resource information
fields as well as attributes as search criteria.
A search can be initiated either from the main toolbar, or by using the Find button in the
Add Resource or Add Relationship pop-up windows. Setting up and executing the search
is the same regardless of where you initiate the search; however, the actions you can take
with the results differ depending on where you started from.
The Search Results provide you with the name of the resources that match your criteria,
and the paths (group hierarchy) to where the resources reside within your search scope.
• If you initiate the Search from the main toolbar, you can select one or more resource in
the result list, and remove them from their parent groups. See “Searching from the Main
Toolbar”on page 8-26 for more information. You can double-click a resource in the
results list to see where it is located in the Component Tree.
• If you initiate the search from an Add Relationship or Add Resource window, you can
select one or more resources in the result list and add them to the Resource Results list
in the Add Resource or Add Relationship window. See “Searching from the Add
Resources or Add Relationship Window” on page 8-27 for more information.
Setting up a Resource Search
To search for resources that match criteria you specify, do the following:
1 Click the Find button in the toolbar at the top of the main Grouping Manager window,
or click the Find button in the Add Relationship or Add Resource pop-up windows.
The Search Criteria window is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-7.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-23
The Grouping Manager
Figure 8-7: Searching for a resource
The top half of the window is used to specify your search criteria. The Component Tree
is used to define a scope for the search.
The bottom half of the window contains the results of the search. You can limit the
number of results you want to receive in the case of a search that could yield a large
number of matches.
2 Enter your search criteria using the fields in the top part of the window. A resource will
match the query if it meets all the criteria specified in this section:
— <ANY> specifies a wildcard match, meaning that any and all values for this item
will produce a match. There are also two other ways to indicate a wildcard match:
8-24
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Searching for a Resource
— The asterisk character * used by itself.
— A blank field.
— For Resource Name, Resource Description, and Resource Source, enter a string to
specify the value you want to match. You can specify a partial match using the
wildcard characters * and ?.
— An * indicates a wildcard match of unspecified length. Specifying a Resource
Name as “A*n” will find all Resources whose names start with “A” and end with
“n.” This would include Ann, Alan, Allen, Allison, and so on. Using the * by
itself is the same as specifying <ANY>.
— A ? indicates a single character wildcard. Specifying a Resource Name as “A?n”
will find all Resources whose name start with “A”, and with “n” and having
exactly one character in between. This would include Ann and Ayn, but not
Alan, Allen or Allison.
— For Resource Type, select a specific type from the drop-down menu, or use <ANY>
to match on all types.
The values you enter into the search criteria fields are combined using a
Boolean AND. This means a resource must match all the criteria you specify in
these fields in order be included in the search results.
3 Enter any attribute specifications you want to use as search criteria. The process is
similar to that used to add attributes to a resource. A resource will match the query if it
matches any of the attributes specified in this section:
a Enter an attribute name or a partial name using the * and ? wildcard characters.
b Select an attribute type from the drop-down list in the Type field, or select <ANY>
to match all attribute types.
c
Enter a value you want to match, or a partial match using the * and ? wildcard
characters.
d Click the Add Attribute button,
Attribute Criteria list.
, to add the attribute specification to the
e To remove an attribute search criteria you’ve
added to the Attribute Criteria list, select
the attribute and click the Remove Attribute button
.
Attributes used as search criteria are combined using a Boolean OR. This
means that a resource that matches all the criteria specified in search criteria
fields (in the top part of the window) and that matches any one (or more) of the
attribute criteria, will be included in the search results.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-25
The Grouping Manager
4 Specify a Scope for the search from the Component Tree at the left side of Search
Criteria area. The scope will limit the search to the group you select, and its subordinate
groups. By default the scope is set to the root-level group “Groups,” which means all
groups will be searched.
5 To reset all the criteria to their defaults (<ANY>) and to clear the Attribute Criteria list,
click the Reset button at the bottom of the window.
6 At the top of the Results portion of the window, select from the drop-down menu a
limit for the number of matches you want to see. All indicates you want to see all
matches. You can limit the results to 1, 10, 50, or 100 matches. The actual number of
matches found will be displayed next to this field.
7 Click the Query button to initiate the search. The results will be displayed in the bottom
portion of the window. The list will become a scrolling list if the number of results
requires it.
For each match, the results will display the following:
— Resource ID: a unique internal number provided by the EPICenter software. This
may be useful to distinguish between resources if you happen to have created
several resources with the same name.
— Resource Name: the name of the resource
— Path: the path through the Group hierarchy to the location of the resource.
Note that an individual resource (i.e. the same Name and ID) may appear multiple
times in this list if it is a child of multiple groups.
Once the list is complete, you can select resources in the Results list and take actions,
depending on how you initiated the Find function. The buttons at the bottom of the
window are slightly different depending on where you initiated the Find. See the
following sections, “Searching from the Main Toolbar,” and “Searching from the Add
Resources or Add Relationship Window” on page 8-27, for details on how you can use the
results of the search.
Searching from the Main Toolbar
When you initiate a search from the Main Toolbar, you can use the results to determine
where a resource is used—i.e. to find out what groups it belongs to. Since a resource can be
a child of multiple groups, this lets you identify all the parents of a particular resource. In
particular, before you delete a resource from the EPICenter database, you may want to
make sure that you know all the places it is being used to avoid problems when you
remove it. Once you find a resource using the Find function from the main toolbar, you can
remove instances of the resource directly from the Find window.
8-26
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Searching for a Resource
Setting up a search is the same regardless of where you initiate the Find function. This is
describe in the section “Setting up a Resource Search” on page 8-23.
To remove resources you’ve identified with the Search function, do the following:
1 Select and highlight the resource or resources you want to remove.
You can double-click on the resource and its location is highlighted in the Component
Tree.
2 Click the Remove button to remove those resources from the locations specified in the
Results entries you’ve selected.
The results list may present multiple entries for a given resource, if the resource is a child
of multiple groups. You can remove a resource from specific groups on an individual basis
without removing it from the EPICenter database.
The Remove function is subject to the same restrictions as removing resource children
through the Resource Details window. If the resource is a system or imported resource (its
source is EPICenter, a file, LDAP database etc.) you cannot remove the resource from it’s
“home” group—the group in which it was initially created. If the function is a user-defined
resource (source is “Manual”), removing it from all groups will delete it from the
EPICenter database.
When you are finished, click the OK button to close the window.
Searching from the Add Resources or Add Relationship
Window
When you initiate a search from the Add Resources or Add Relationship window, you can
identify resources with a common set of attributes, which can simplify the process of
finding the attributes you want to include in a group. Once you find a set of resource using
the Find function from the Add Resources or Add Relationship windows, you can add
those resources directly from the Find window to the Resource Results list of the “Add...”
window.
Setting up a search is the same regardless of where you initiate the Find function. This is
describe in the section “Setting up a Resource Search” on page 8-23.
When you do a search from the Add Resources or Add Relationship windows, the
results will include only those resources that are relevant to the Add function you
are performing.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-27
The Grouping Manager
To add resources you’ve identified with the Search function to the Resource Results list of
the Add Resources or Add Relationship windows, do the following:
1 Select and highlight the resource or resources you want to add.
2 Click the Add button to add those resources to the Resource Results list.
The selected resources are added to the list, and the Search window is closed.
To close the Search window without adding any resources, click the Cancel button.
Importing Resources
The Import feature allows you to import user and host resource definitions, and groups
containing those resources, from a source external to the EPICenter system. You can import
from an NT Domain server, an NIS server, or an LDAP directory. You can also import host
and user resource definitions from a tab-delimited text file.
• Importing from a text file requires a tab-delimited file in a very specific format.
• Importing from an LDAP directory requires an import specification file that defines
how to map entries in the LDAP directory to resources and their attributes.
• Importing default domain information from an NT Domain server or an NIS server
does not require any special preparation.
If you import information from an LDAP server or NT Domain Controller, that
information will become visible to all EPICenter users. If this is a security concern,
you may want to consider exporting information from the NT Domain Controller or
LDAP directory to a file, and using that to create an import file that contains only the
information that you want to be visible through EPICenter Grouping Manager.
Imported resources are placed under a group created in the Import Sources group (one of
the pre-defined EPICenter groups). The name you specify in the Source field of the Import
dialog will be used as the group name.
You can perform the same import operation (importing from the same source) multiple
times. Once an import is complete, subsequent imports from the same source will act as an
update:
• Existing resources will be left intact (including any attributes you may have added).
• New resources will be added.
8-28
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Importing Resources
• Resources that have been removed from the source will be deleted from the EPICenter
database.
• Changes is group memberships and changes in relationships will be enacted.
To import resources from an external source, do the following:
1 Click the Import button in the toolbar at the top of the main Grouping Manager
window. The Import Resources window is displayed (see Figure 8-8).
Figure 8-8: Importing resources
2 Select the type of source from which you want to import information.
— Select NT Domain Controller/NIS to import information from the default Windows
NT Domain Controller or NIS server. This will import information about users,
hosts (stations), and user groups. See “Importing from an NT Domain Controller or
NIS Server” on page 8-36 for more detailed information.
— Select LDAP to import information from an LDAP directory.
See “Importing from an LDAP Directory” on page 8-30 for information on
modifying the file containing the LDAP import mapping specification.
— Select File to import information from a tab-delimited text file.
See “Importing from a File” on page 8-32 for information on creating the import text
file.
— In the Source Name field, enter a name that will identify the source of the imported
resources. This name is used for two purposes:
— It is used to create a group under which all the resources imported in this
operation are placed. The group is created under the Import Sources group.
— It appears in the Source field of the Resource Details view, or in the Source
column when the resource is displayed as a child of group, for all resources
imported from this source. It can be used as a search criteria in the Find function.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-29
The Grouping Manager
3 Click Import to begin the import process. The import button will not be enabled until
you enter a source name.
Progress during the import will be displayed in a pop-up window, as shown in
Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9: Monitoring the progress of an Import function
4 When the process has completed, click OK.
If you are importing from a large source, the import process can take several minutes.
The new group and resources will be available under the Import Sources group in the
Component Tree.
If errors occur in the import process, it is possible that no data will be imported. This can
result in an empty import group in the Import Sources tree. Once you fix the problems, you
can rerun the import.
Importing from an LDAP Directory
The EPICenter Grouping Manager supports importing groups, users, and hosts from a
LDAP directory. The import process uses a TCL script to extract the requested data from
the LDAP directory, and create a text file that specifies how the resources should be added
to the EPICenter database. This file is in the same format as the import file discussed in
“Importing from a File” on page 8-32.
The import process uses an import specification file that defines the following:
• The information you want to extract from the directory.
8-30
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Importing Resources
• How to map that data to groups, resources, and attributes in the EPICenter Grouping
module.
The specification file must be named LDAPConfig.txt, and must reside in the EPICenter
user/import directory.
You can use the LDAPConfig.txt file provided in the EPICenter user/import directory as
a template.
You should only need to modify three lines in this file:
host: the name of the host where the directory resides.
user: the username, if required, to allow access to the directory.
password: the password, if required, to allow access to the directory.
The information below is provided as an aid to importing data from LDAP directories
with schemas that differ from the template provided. However, Extreme Networks
cannot provide support for modifications to the template file other than the three
changes mentioned above.
If your LDAP directory is organized differently, you can modify the LDAPConfig.txt file
to meet your individual needs. This requires that you understand the organizational
structure of the directory from which you want to import data.
The LDAPConfig.txt file must include the following entries:
base: specifies the LDAP naming context. Leave this blank to use the default LDAP
naming context. This is required.
attributes: specifies the attributes that you want to import into the EPICenter
database from entries in the LDAP directory. By default, all imported attributes are
considered type Generic.You can specify an EPICenter attribute type (Generic,
IP/subnet, or DLCS ID) by enclosing both the attribute name and the EPICenter
attribute type in curly brackets, as shown: {uid {DLCS ID}}. This is required.
uniqueID: specifies the attribute that should be used in the EPICenter database as the
ID for this resource. This is required.
scope: the scope of the search (base, sub, one). This is required.
groupBy: the attribute that should be used to create EPICenter sub-groups within the
imported group structure. This is optional.
memberNameAttribute: the attribute that should be used to define the child entry in a
group.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-31
The Grouping Manager
resourceName: the attribute that should be used as the displayed name of the resource
within the EPICenter Grouping Manager. This is required.
filterList: defines the search criteria. Because of the limits on the amount of data
that a search will return in one operation, you may need to split your search into
multiple operations, as is done in the example file. This is required.
objectClassMapping: this maps an LDAP entry to a Grouping Manager resource type
based on the object class of the entry. You will need multiple entries of this type. The
name-value pair contains the EPICenter resource type on the left, and either the LDAP
object class specification or an EPICenter resource type of the right.
For example, the following line specifies that entries whose object class is
“organizationalPerson” should be imported as user resources.
objectClassMapping: user=organizationalPerson person Top
The following line specifies that user resources can be group members.
objectClassMapping: groupmember=user
At least one mapping specification is required. You can comment out resource types
that you don’t need to use in the sample file, or leave them. They will be ignored if not
defined.
Importing from a File
To import data from a text file, you define the resources you want to import in a
tab-delimited text file. The elements on each line are separated by tabs.
The Import File Format
The simplest way to create this file is to enter it in a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft
Excel, and then export it as tab-delimited text.
The elements on each line are separated by tabs.
Format Definitions
The first three lines are required. They define the format of the following data.
#SYNTAX VERSION:1.0
Resource_UniqueName <tab> Resource_Type <tab> Resource_Name [<tab> attribute ... ]
<tab> <tab> <tab> (<attribute_type>)[<tab> (<attribute_type>)...]
8-32
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Importing Resources
The first line simply defines the version of the import syntax:
#SYNTAX VERSION:1.0
Enter this exactly as specified.
The second line defines the mapping of the data in the file to EPICenter resources:
Resource_UniqueName <tab> Resource_Type <tab> Resource_Name [<tab> attribute ...]
• The first three items are required,
— Resource_UniqueName specifies that the first field maps to the unique ID.
— Resource_Type specifies that the second field defines the resource type (user, host,
group, device, or port).
— ResourceName specifies that the third field maps to the resource name. This is the
name that will appear as the name of the resource in the Grouping Manager.
• The remaining items on the line define the attributes that can be included for each
resource. The names you specify here will be used as the attribute names in the
Grouping Manager.
The third line defines the type of each attribute (Generic, IP/subnet, or DLCS ID).
<tab> <tab> <tab> (<attribute_type>)[<tab> (<attribute_type>)...]
Each type specifier must be enclosed by parenthesis, and separated from the preceding
type specifier by a tab. Three tabs must precede the first type specifier.
• The items in this line define the type of each attribute defined in line two. You must
include a type specification for every attribute included in line two.
• The first three items in line two do not require a type (as they are predefined). You skip
these by including the three tabs before the first type specifier.
Resource Definitions
The remaining lines in the first section define the resources to be imported. Each resource
must include the uniqueID, the resource type, and a name. Attribute values are optional,
and will be assigned in the order presented on the line (separated by tabs). These lines are
formatted as follows:
uniqueID1 <tab> <resource_type> <tab> resource_name1 <tab> {attribute <tab> ... }
uniqueID2 <tab> <resource_type> <tab> resource_name2 <tab> {attribute <tab> ... }
...
uniqueIDn <tab> <resource_type> <tab> resource_nameN <tab> {attribute <tab> ... }
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-33
The Grouping Manager
• uniqueID will be used as the resource’s unique name. It can be the same or different
from the resource name. For a device, the uniqueID must be the device IP address. For
a port it is the IP address of the device followed by the port number.
• resource_type can be user, host, group, device, or port.
• resource_name is the name that will be displayed as the name of the resource.
• attribute defines the value of the attribute that corresponds to this position in the list.
The combination of uniqueID and resource_type must be unique within this section.
Duplicate definitions generate a warning.
For example, assume the following format definition at the beginning of the import file:
Resource_UniqueName
Resource_Type Resource_Name
Location Department
RoomNo
To create a user resource named Judy Jones, with three attributes:
— Location, whose value is Denver
— Department, whose value is Sales
— RoomNo whose value is 3050
Enter a resource definition as follows:
judy user
Judy Jones
Denver
Sales
3050
You cannot use the Import function to create new device or port resources. You can import
attributes for device and port resources, and define relationships for them. The device and
port resources must already exist in the EPICenter database, and the names you specify
must match their names in the database.
See “Resource Details” on page 8-6 for more information on the components of a resource.
Group and Relationship Definitions
The second part of the file defines the relationships between the resources—both group
membership and relationships between the resources themselves (see “Adding
Relationships to a Resource” on page 8-16 for more information about relationships).
The #GROUPS# specification is required, even if you do not define any groups.
#GROUPS#
Each line in this section has the following form:
8-34
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Importing Resources
<resource_type>:<resource_uniqueID> <tab> <resource_type>:<resource_uniqueID>
<resource_type>:<resource_uniqueID> <tab> <resource_type>:<resource_uniqueID>
• resource_type can be user, host, group, device, or port. A group that exists in the
EPICenter database (and is not defined in the import file) can be specified as a child of
an imported group, but the reverse is not supported.
• resource_uniqueID is the unique ID defined in the first part of the file (or known to
exist already in the EPICenter database).
For creating group membership relationships, the first type:ID pair defines the parent, the
second one defines the child. Thus, the first pair must always be a group. The second pair
can be a group or an individual resource.
For defining peer-to-peer relationships, (user-host, user-port, and host-port relationships)
either member of the relationship can be specified first.
Example
The following is an example of an import file.
#SYNTAX VERSION:1.0
Resource_UniqueName Resource_Type Resource_Name IP Address DLCS OSType
Dept
(IP/Subnet)(DLCS ID)(Generic)(Generic)
wendy
user
Wendy Lee
NMS
heidi
user
Heidi Smith
NMS
pam
user
Pam Johnson
SQA
eric
user
Eric Wilson
SQA
mary
user
Mary Baker
NMS
win2k
host1
host2
host3
host4
host
host
host
host
host
win2k
host1
host2
host3
host4
ugr1
ugr2
hgr1
dgr1
switch
portgr
group
group
group
group
group
group
SQA
dev
hostgr1
eng1
switch
portgr
#GROUPS#
group:ugr1
user:wendy
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10.20.30.2
10.20.30.4
10.20.30.5
10.20.30.6
10.20.30.7
wlee
windows
HPUX
Solaris
windows
Solaris
NMS
NMS
NMS
SQA
SQA
8-35
The Grouping Manager
group:ugr1
group:ugr1
user:heidi
user:mary
group:ugr2
group:ugr2
user:pam
user:eric
group:hgr1
group:hgr1
group:hgr1
host:win2k
host:host1
host:host2
group:dgr1
group:dgr1
host:host3
host:host4
## Host to User Relation
user:wendy
host:win2k
user:heidi
host:host1
user:mary
host:host2
host:host3
user:pam
host:host4
user:eric
Importing from an NT Domain Controller or NIS Server
Importing from an NT Domain Controller or NIS server is straightforward. The import is
always done from the Domain Controller or NIS server that is serving the domain for the
system running the EPICenter server. The type of system you are running will determine
where the EPICenter server looks for the information.
In order to import information from an NT Domain Controller, the EPICenter server must
be running with the appropriate user permissions in order to extract the information from
the Domain Controller.
If you import information from an NT Domain Controller, that information will
become visible to all EPICenter user. If this is a security concern, you may want to
consider exporting information from the NT Domain Controller to a file, and using
that to create an import file that contains only the information that you want to be visible
through EPICenter Grouping Manager.
The import process imports the following information:
• For users: username, fullname, description.
• For hosts: hostname, description, Primary IP address.
• For groups (users only): name, description, usernames of members.
8-36
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Importing Resources
The import process creates a file, import.txt, in the user/import subdirectory.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
8-37
9
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
This chapter describes how to use the IP/MAC Address Finder applet for:
• Creating search requests for locating specific MAC or IP addresses on the network, and
determining the devices and ports where they are located.
• Creating search requests to identify MAC and IP addresses on specific devices and
ports.
Overview of the IP/MAC Finder Applet
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder applet you can specify a set of Media Access Control
(MAC) or Internet Protocol (IP) network addresses, and a set of network devices to query
for those addresses. The applet returns a list of the devices and ports associated with those
addresses. You can also specify a set of devices and ports, and search for all MAC and IP
addresses known those devices and ports.
The Search Tool lets you configure and start a search task, view the status of the task, and
view the task results. The task specification and results are kept in the task list until you
delete them, or until you log out of the EPICenter client.
When you click the Find IP/MAC button in the Navigation Toolbar, the main IP/MAC
Address Finder page is displayed as shown in Figure 9-1. Initially there are no search
requests displayed.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
9-1
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
Figure 9-1: IP/MAC Address Finder main page
Tasks List Summary Window
As search tasks are initiated, they are placed in the Find Address Tasks List in the
Component Tree. Selecting the Find Address Tasks folder in the Component Tree displays
a summary of the status of the tasks in the Task List (see Figure 9-2).
9-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Tasks List Summary Window
Figure 9-2: Tasks List summary
The Tasks List shows you basic information about the tasks you set up
• ID is automatically assigned by the EPICenter server
• Name is the name you gave the task when you created it. Giving a task a unique name
is important to distinguish it from other tasks in the Tasks List
• Type is the type of search this will perform. In EPICenter release 3.0, this is always Find
Addresses
• Status shows the status of the request
• Date Submitted shows the date and time the task was submitted
• Date Completed shows the date and time the task was finished
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
9-3
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
From the Tasks List you can perform the following functions:
• Select a Pending task and click Cancel to cancel the task before it has completed
• Select a task and click Delete to delete an individual task. This deletes the task
specification as well as the task results. Once a task has completed, it cannot be rerun
unless it is the most recent task completed
• Select a task and click Clone to bring up the Find Addresses window with the
specifications of the selected task already displayed
• Select a task and click ReRun to execute the task again
• Select a task and click Export to export the search results to a text file. See “Exporting
Task Search Results to a File” on page 9-9 for more information.
The specified tasks and their search results persist as long as you are running the
ExtremeWare EPICenter client, even if you leave the IP/MAC Address Finder
applet and go to another EPICenter applet. However, when you exit the EPICenter
client, all the task specifications and search results are deleted.
Creating a Search Task
To create a search task, click the Find button
in the tool bar at the top of the IP/MAC
Address Finder page. This displays the Find Addresses window (Figure 9-3).
If you have already submitted a task, the most recent task with its specifications is
displayed in the Find Addresses window.
9-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Creating a Search Task
Figure 9-3: Find Addresses window
To create a search task:
1 Enter the task name in the Task Name field. This name helps you identify the task in the
Find Address Tasks List. Names of the form Task1, Task2 and so on are provided by
default.
2 Define the search targets: in the Enter an Address group box, select either IP or MAC
to determine the format of the address to search for, and enter the address into the fields
provided. Click the Add Address button to add the address to the Addresses to Find
list.
— To find all addresses in the given search domain, click All in the Enter an Address
group box, then click the Add Address button to add All to the to Addresses to Find
list
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
9-5
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
Note that All is added to the search list in addition to any individually-specified
addresses. The All specification does overlap with the other target addresses.
However, this allows the user to remove the All specification without losing the
other addresses in the search list.
— Click the WildCard button to search for a MAC address defined only by the first
three hexadecimal tuples.
— Click the Remove Address button to remove an address from the list
3 Define the search domain. The Target Domains list specifies the scope of the devices to
be included in the search. Devices not included in this domain will not be searched.
You can define the search space in several ways:
— Devices lets you select individual devices to include in the search
— Domains lets you search all the devices in a specified device group
— Ports lets you select individual ports to include in the search
— PortGroups lets you search all the devices in a specified port group
You can create a target domain that includes a combination of these specifications.
The IP/MAC Finder applet does not support hierarchical port groups. If you have
created port groups in the Grouping Manager that include subgroups as
members, the subgroups will not appear in the Target Domains list. Instead, any
ports that are members of subgroups will be displayed directly under the top-level port
group, as if they are members of the top-level group.
4 If you select Devices or Ports as the Source Type, you must also select a Device Group
from the Select Group field to define the list of devices that will appear in the Devices
list. If you select Domains or PortGroups, this field well be inactive.
5 Select the Device, Port, Device Group, or Port Group that you want to search and click
Add Domain to move it into the Target Domains list.
To remove a member of the Target Domains list, select the item in the list and click
Remove Domain. To clear the Target Domains list, click Clear All.
6 When you have completed your search specification, click the Submit button at the
bottom of the window to initiate the search.
The IP/MAC Finder applet searches the IP Address Translation Table (the
ipNetToMediaTable) in each device agent for IP addresses, and the Forwarding Database
(FDB) for MAC addresses.
9-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Detailed Task View
The IP/MAC Finder applet will not identify a device’s own IP address when you
search for IP addresses on that device. In other words, the applet will not find IP
address 10.2.3.4 on the switch whose address is 10.2.3.4. It can only find
addresses that are in the agent’s IP Address Translation table, and a device’s own address
is not included in the table. The applet will find the address on the other switches that have
connectivity to the switch with the target IP address, however.
Detailed Task View
When you initiate a search, the task is placed in the Find Address Tasks list in the
Component Tree. The main panel displays the Detailed Task View for the current search
task (see Figure 9-4).
Figure 9-4: Search in progress
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
9-7
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
While the task is in progress, the window shows the status as Pending. When the search is
complete, the Detailed Task View shows the results for the search (Figure 9-5).
Figure 9-5: Address search results in the Detailed Task view
The Detailed Task View shows the following information about your search.
• Name is the name you gave the task when you created it. Giving a task a unique name
is important to distinguish it from other tasks in the Tasks List
• Status shows the status of the request
• Date Submitted shows the date and time the task was submitted
• Date Completed shows the data and time the task was finished
The Search Criteria areas shows:
• The list of IP or MAC addresses that were the object of the search
9-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Detailed Task View
• The Search Domains where the search took place. The Search Domains lists shows the
name and type (Device or Group) of the components of the domain specification
The Search Results list shows the results of the search. For every address successfully
located, this list shows:
• Both the MAC address and the corresponding IP address.
• The switch and port to which the address is connected.
• The User (name) currently logged in at that address.
Once the search is complete, the search results will stay in the Tasks List until you explicitly
delete them using the Delete Function from the Tasks List Summary View, or until you exit
the EPICenter client.
From the Task Detail window you can do the following:
• Click Delete to delete this task. This deletes the task specification as well as the task
results.
• Click Clone to bring up the Find Addresses window with the specifications of the
selected task already displayed.
• Click ReRun to execute the task again.
• Click Export to export the search results to a text file.
Exporting Task Search Results to a File
You can export a task’s search results to a text file. You can do this from the Detailed Task
View, or from the Task List.
To export the search results to a file, do the following:
1 From the Detailed Task View, or from the Task List with the task selected, click the
Export button.
This displays the Export pop-up dialog.
2 Enter a file name and subdirectory name in the fields provided, or accept the defaults
provided by the EPICenter software.
— Search Result files are save in the EPICenter user/AddressFinderResults
directory, which is a subdirectory of the EPICenter installation directory. You can
optionally specify a subdirectory within the AddressFinderResults directory by
entering the subdirectory name into the Directory field.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
9-9
Using the IP/MAC Address Finder
— By default the exported file will be given a name created from the current date, time,
and task name. For example, the results for task “Task 2” run on April 25, 2001 at
3:52 pm will be saved in a file named 2001_4_25_1552_Task 2.txt. You can
change the file name by replacing the name in the File Name field.
3 Click the Apply button to save the results.
Click Reset to clear all the fields.
Click Close to close the dialog without saving the file.
9-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10 Using ExtremeView
This chapter describes how to use ExtremeView for:
• Viewing Extreme and third-party device status.
• Viewing and setting Extreme device configuration information using the ExtremeWare
Vista graphical user interface.
• Viewing Extreme device statistics using the ExtremeWare Vista graphical user interface.
Overview of the ExtremeView Application
The ExtremeView applet displays information about the status of Extreme switches
(Summit, Alpine, and Black Diamond switches) and third-party devices managed by
EPICenter. Any EPICenter user can view status information about these network devices.
Users with Administrator or Manager access can view and modify configuration
information for those switches through the ExtremeWare Vista graphical user interface.
ExtremeWare Vista is device management software running in a Summit, Alpine, or Black
Diamond switch. It allows you to access the switch over a TCP/IP network using a
standard Web browser, and provides a set of pages for configuring and monitoring the
Summit or Black Diamond switch.
You must have a user account on the Extreme switch in order to run ExtremeWare
Vista on the switch. A user account on a switch is separate from your EPICenter
user account.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-1
Using ExtremeView
Figure 10-1: The ExtremeView applet, main page
Use the nodes in the Component Tree as follows:
• Status displays status information for the devices known to EPICenter. You can view
summary status for all network devices or for the devices within a device group. You
can view status and configuration information for individual devices, slots, and ports
through a front panel view accompanied by a table of configuration and status
information. Select a device subnode under the Status node to view configuration
information for the device.
• Configuration displays configuration information for Extreme Networks switches
based on the configuration categories in ExtremeWare Vista. You can view summary
configuration information for all devices in all device groups known to EPICenter, as
well as detailed configuration information for individual Extreme Networks switches,
10-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Device Status Information
organized by ExtremeWare Vista configuration categories. Individual third-party
devices cannot be accessed through this feature.
• Statistics displays monitoring results for Extreme Networks switches, also based on
ExtremeWare Vista statistics monitoring categories. You can view summary statistics
that include active and inactive port counters for all Extreme Networks devices known
to EPICenter, or statistics for individual Extreme Networks switches. Individual
third-party devices cannot be accessed through this feature.
Viewing Device Status Information
Select Status in the Component Tree to display a summary status of all the devices known
to EPICenter (see Figure 10-2).
Figure 10-2: The ExtremeView applet, Status summary
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-3
Using ExtremeView
Select a Device Group name to show summary status for the devices in the group.
• The status “lights” show the status of the device as detected by EPICenter.
Table 10-1: ExtremeView Device Status Indicators
Status Light
Device Status
Green
Device is up and OK
Yellow
Device is responding, but reports an error condition such as a fan or
power supply failure, or excessive temperature
Red
Device is not responding to EPICenter status queries. This may mean
that the switch is down, that it is unreachable on the network, or that the
SNMP community strings have changed and EPICenter can no longer
contact the switch.
• The name, type of switch, IP address, the ExtremeWare software version, and the last
reboot time are retrieved from the device by EPICenter.
Select a device in the Component Tree on the left to display detailed configuration and
status information, as shown in Figure 10-3. This display shows additional information
that EPICenter has gathered from the switch agent.
10-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Device Status Information
Figure 10-3: The ExtremeView applet, switch status
This view shows an active graphical display of the switch front panel, as well as a panel of
status information.
You can view the status of individual modules (slots), ports, and power supplies (where
shown), as shown in Figure 10-4, in two ways:
• Select the slot, port, or power supply by clicking the cursor on the item in the switch
image.
• Display the list of slots or ports in the Component Tree, and select the element about
which you want status information.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-5
Using ExtremeView
Selected port
Figure 10-4: The ExtremeView applet, port status
The right-hand panel displays status information about the selected port
There are a few Extreme devices, such as the Summit24e2T, Summit24e2X, and Summit
Px1 switches, on which the ports are not selectable through ExtremeView. In these cases,
the ifIndex entries for the device are displayed in the Device Information panel on the
right.
Third-party Device Status
If the device you select is a third-party device, and EPICenter does not have an image for
the specific model, it displays a generic device image (a vendor-specific image if possible,
but without model-specific details). If there is no configuration file for the device, and it is
being managed by the EPICenter, the ifIndex entries for the entire device are displayed in
10-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Device Status Information
the Device Information panel on the right. Figure 10-5 shows a third-party device with an
unknown configuration.
Figure 10-5: A third-party device with unknown configuration
The port type is ethernet-csmacd(6) by default. However, some devices may support other
port types. For example, some 3Com devices support a layer 3 module which is of type
other(1).
As Extreme Networks continues to develop additional device images, they will be made
available on Extreme Networks’ support web site at
www.extremenetworks.com/support/documentation.asp under the Patches section. You can also contact
your Extreme Networks sales representative or reseller if you would like help from
Extreme’s Professional Services organization for creating images or configuration files for
specific devices.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-7
Using ExtremeView
Viewing Switch Configuration Information
Select Configuration in the Component Tree to display a configuration summary for the
Extreme switches known to the EPICenter software (see Figure 10-6).
Figure 10-6: The ExtremeView applet, Configuration summary
The sub-components under Configuration in the Component Tree are the categories of
configuration information that are available through this applet. These correspond to
pages from the ExtremeWare Vista application running on the switch.
◆ Select one of these categories to display a list of switches, then select a switch to view
the configuration settings for that switch in the category you’ve chosen.
As shown in Figure 10-7, this displays the current switch configuration, and provides an
interface through which you can change the configuration.
10-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Switch Configuration Information
Figure 10-7: The ExtremeView applet, Configuration details
Enter your changes directly into the editable fields in the configuration display. When you
have made the necessary configuration changes, click Submit to send these to the switch
for implementation.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-9
Using ExtremeView
Viewing Switch Statistics
Select Statistics in the Component Tree to display summary statistics for the Extreme
switches known to the EPICenter (see Figure 10-8).
Figure 10-8: The ExtremeView applet, Statistics summary
The sub-components under Statistics in the Component Tree are the categories of statistical
information that are available through this applet. These correspond to pages of
information from the ExtremeWare Vista application running on the switch.
◆ Select one of these categories to display a list of switches, and select a switch to view the
configuration settings for that switch in the category you’ve chosen.
10-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Finding Devices
This displays the selected set of statistics for the selected switch. For some types of
statistics, you may be able to view the data in different ways through the use of view
options or filters, such as the options shown in Figure 10-9.
Figure 10-9: The ExtremeView applet, Statistics details
Finding Devices
You can search for a device in the EPICenter database by name, by IP address, or by type
of device. This may be useful if you have a large number of devices in your inventory.
To search for a device, follow these steps:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-11
Using ExtremeView
1 Click Find at the top of the Inventory Manager page.
The Find Devices dialog, shown in Figure 10-10, is displayed.
Figure 10-10: Find Devices dialog
2 Enter your search criteria:
You can search for devices by name or by IP address. You can limit the search to a
specific domain, or to a specific type of Extreme device. Search criteria can include:
— A device name. Click the Device Name button, and enter a complete or partial name
in the Search: field.
— An IP address. Click the IP Address button and enter a complete or partial IP
address in the Search: field. You can use the wild card characters * or ? in your
search criteria.
* acts as a wildcard for an entire octet (0-255)
? is a wildcard for a single digit (0-9)
— A domain. Select the domain from the drop-down menu in the domain field. If you
do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices in the domain you
select will be found.
— A device type. Select the device type from the drop-down menu in the type field. If
you do not specify a name or IP address in the Search field, all devices of the type
you select will be found.
10-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Finding Devices
3 Click Find to search for devices that meet the criteria you have specified. All devices
found are listed in the center panel. Information includes the domain in which the
device can be found, its name, IP address, and the type of device.
4 Double-click on a device in the results table to highlight the device in the Component
Tree, and to display the associated front panel view and status information for that
device (see “Viewing Device Status Information” on page 10-3).
5 Click New Search to clear all search criteria.
6 Click OK to close the search window.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
10-13
11 Real-Time Statistics
This chapter describes how to use the Real-Time Statistics applet for:
• Viewing percentage utilization or total errors data for multiple ports in an Extreme
Networks switch, a switch slot, or a port group.
• Viewing historical utilization, total errors, or individual errors data for a specific port
on an Extreme Networks switch.
Overview of Real-Time Statistics
The Real-Time Statistics feature of the EPICenter software enables you to view a graphical
presentation of utilization and error statistics for Extreme Networks switches in real time.
The data is taken from Management Information Base (MIB) objects in the etherHistory
table of the Remote Monitoring (RMON) MIB. The Real-Time Statistics function is
supported only for Extreme Networks switches.
You must have RMON enabled on the switch in order to collect real-time statistics
for the switch.
You can view data for multiple ports on a device, device slot, or within a port group, and
optionally limit the display to the “top N” ports (where N is a number you can configure).
If you choose to view multiple ports, the display shows data for the most recent sampling
interval for the selected set of ports. The display is updated every sampling interval.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-1
Real-Time Statistics
You can also view historical statistics for a single port. If you choose to view a single port,
the display shows the value of the selected variable(s) over time, based on the number of
datapoints the MIB maintains in the etherHistory table.
You can choose from a variety of styles of charts and graphs as well as a tabular display.
You can view the following types of data:
• Percent Utilization for each port in the set (device, port group, or single port).
Percent utilization reports the value of the etherHistoryUtilization MIB object. The
MIB defines this variable as follows:
Table 11-1: Definition of RMON Utilization Variable Used in Port Utilization Displays
etherHistoryUtilization
The best estimate of the mean physical layer network
utilization on this interface during this sampling interval,
graphed in percents.
• Total Errors for each port in the set (device, port group, or single port).
Total Errors is the sum of the six error variables shown in Table 11-2.
• Individual Errors for a single port.
An individual errors display shows the six variables shown in Table 11-2.
Table 11-2: Definition of RMON etherHistory Error Variables for Port Error Displays
11-2
etherHistoryCRCAlignErrors
The number of packets received during this sampling
interval that had a length between 64 and 1518 octets,
inclusive (excluding framing bits but including Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) octets), but that had either a
bad FCS with an integral number of octets (FCS Error)
or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).
etherHistoryUndersizePkts
The number of packets received during this sampling
interval that were less than 64 octets long (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) and were
otherwise well formed.
etherHistoryOversizePkts
The number of packets received during this sampling
interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets) but were
otherwise well formed.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying Multi-port Statistics
Table 11-2: Definition of RMON etherHistory Error Variables for Port Error Displays
etherHistoryFragments
The total number of packets received during this
sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an
integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with
a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherHistoryJabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling
interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a
bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral
number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
etherHistoryCollisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on
this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval.
Displaying Multi-port Statistics
When you click the RT Stats button in the Navigation Toolbar, the main Real-Time
Statistics page is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-1. Initially, no data is displayed—you
see a message asking you to select a device, device slot, or port group to be displayed.
The Component Tree displays the devices and port groups for which you can display
statistics. An “S” in a red circle next to a device name indicates that the device is not
responding to SNMP requests. A port group with a red-circled “S” indicates that the port
group is empty.
The Real-Time Statistics applet does not support hierarchical port groups. If you
have created port groups in the Grouping Manager that include subgroups as
members, the subgroups will not appear in the Component Tree of the Real-Time
statistics applet. Instead, any ports that are members of subgroups will be displayed
directly under the top-level port group, as if they are members of the top-level group.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-3
Real-Time Statistics
Figure 11-1: Real-Time Statistics main page
For an individual port, you can display individual errors in addition to utilization and
total errors.
◆ Select a network device to display data for some or all ports on the device.
◆ Select a port group to display data for all ports in the port group.
You will first see a message saying “Please wait, loading data.” If the EPICenter server is
successful in accessing the data, utilization data is displayed as shown in Figure 11-2.
11-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying Multi-port Statistics
Figure 11-2: Bar chart showing port statistics for a group of ports
If you place the cursor near a bar in the chart, a pop-up window shows the port number
and device, actual data value, and the time stamp on the data sample.
You can use the mouse to change the depth and rotation of a 3-dimensional chart:
• Hold down the [Shift] key, press the left mouse button, and drag the cursor left or right
to rotate the graph.
• Hold down the [Ctrl] key, press the left mouse button, and drag the cursor up or down
to set the depth of the 3-dimensional view.
For any of the bar graphs, move the cursor and then wait to see the change take effect,
which may take a few seconds.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-5
Real-Time Statistics
There are cases where you may not see data for every port you expect in a multi-port
display:
• You have selected the “top N” feature (top 15 by default), so only the “N” ports with the
highest utilization or the highest total number of errors are displayed.
• RMON is disabled for some ports on the switch. If the switch as a whole can be reached
and is reporting data, then individual ports that do not report data will be ignored. No
error message appears in this case.
If the EPICenter server is not successful in loading data from the device, it displays a
message similar to that shown in Figure 11-3.
Figure 11-3: Warning displayed when the EPICenter server cannot retrieve data
11-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying Statistics For a Single Port
There are several reasons why the EPICenter server may not be able to display any device
data:
• The EPICenter server cannot communicate with the device (indicated by an “S” in a red
circle next to the device name).
• The device does not have RMON enabled, or RMON was just recently enabled and no
data samples exist yet.
Displaying Statistics For a Single Port
In addition to displaying data for a set of ports, you can display historical data for an
individual port. You can select a port in one of two ways:
• Double-click on the data point for an individual port in the device or port group
statistics display (bar, data point, or pie slice in the respective chart, or row in a tabular
display).
• Click on a device, device slot, or port group in the left-side Component Tree to list the
ports it contains, then select a port.
A set of utilization statistics for the selected port is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-4.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-7
Real-Time Statistics
Figure 11-4: Utilization data over time for an individual port on a device
The number of data points displayed, and the sampling interval are user-configurable
parameters, within the limitations of the device configuration. The defaults are:
• A 30-second sampling interval
• 50 data points displayed
However, in Figure 11-4, only 25 data points are displayed, because that is the maximum
number of values the BlackDiamond switch stores as historical data.
For an individual port, you can display individual errors in addition to utilization and
total errors.
◆ Select the tab at the bottom of the page to generate one of these displays. Figure 11-5 is
an example.
11-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Changing the Display Mode
Figure 11-5: Individual errors in a single-port chart
Changing the Display Mode
The icons at the top of the page let you select the format of the statistical display, and
control several other aspects of the display.
Select this to determine whether the display for a device or port group will
include all ports, or only the top N ports (where N is initially fifteen).
Click the icon to toggle between the red X, which indicates the top N
limitation is not in effect, and a green check, which indicates that the top
N ports are being displayed. The top N ports are displayed in order from
highest (largest percent utilization or largest total errors) to lowest. The number of ports
(N) is a user-configurable setting. This option is available only for multi-port displays.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-9
Real-Time Statistics
Select this to display the data as a line graph. This chart type is especially
useful when displaying individual errors for a single port.
Select this to display the data as a pie chart. This chart type is available only
when you are displaying statistics for multiple ports on a device, device slot, or
in a port group. The maximum number of slices in the pie is a
user-configurable setting. It is initially set to display 10 slices.
Select this to display the data as a bar chart. A 3D bar chart is the default for all
chart displays. The 3D setting is also a user-configurable option.
Select this to display the data as a horizontal bar chart. This chart type by
default displays in 3D. The 3D setting is also a user-configurable option.
Select this to display the data as a stacked bar chart. This chart type is only
available when you are displaying individual errors for a single port.
Select this to display the data as an area chart. This chart type by default
displays in 3D. The 3D setting is also a user-configurable option.
Select this to display the data as a table.
Select this to zoom in on (magnify) the size of the display. You can select this
repeatedly to zoom up to three times the screen size.
Select this to zoom out (shrink) the size of the display. You can select this
repeatedly until the chart is the desired size.
Determines whether grid lines are displayed on the background of the chart.
Click the icon to toggle between the red X, which indicates that grid lines are
turned off, and the green check, which indicates that grid lines are turned on.
11-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Setting Graph Preferences
Determines whether the graph data is updated automatically at every
sampling interval. Click on the icon to toggle between continuous updates,
indicated by the bar with the red dot (representing a traveling data packet),
and the open palm, indicating that updates have been suspended.
Select this to take a “snapshot” of the graph or table view of the current
real-time statistics data.
Select this to bring up the graph preferences pop-up window. You can change
a variety of settings, such as graph and data colors, the sampling interval, or
the number of ports in a top N display.
Setting Graph Preferences
To change the graph settings used in this applet, click the Set Graph Preferences icon in
the toolbar.
The Graph Preferences window is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-6.
Use the tabs across the top of the window to select the type of setting you want to change.
Each tab displays a page with a group of related settings. When you have changed any
setting you want on a given page:
• Click Apply to put the changes into effect, but keep the Graph Preferences window
open so you can make changes on another page.
• Click OK to put the changes into effect and close the Graph Preferences window.
The Graph preferences settings are not persistent—if you move to another
EPICenter applet, the settings will return to the defaults.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-11
Real-Time Statistics
Graph View (Figure 11-6) lets you change from 3D to 2D displays, and change the values
for the 3D depth, elevation and rotation.
Figure 11-6: Setting 3D graph preferences
• To change to a 2D graph view, click the Set 3D Graph View box to remove the check
mark.
• View Depth controls the depth of a bar. The default is 10, maximum is 1000.
• View Elevation controls the elevation (rise) from the front of the bar to the back, in
degrees. The default is 10°, range is ±45°.
• View Rotation controls the angle of rotation of the bar, in degrees. The default is 12°,
range is ±45°.
• Minimum Graphed Utilization specifies the minimum scale for the Y axis for
utilization graphs. The default is 1.0 (1%), meaning that the Y axis will not show less
than 1% as the top value of the Y axis.
• Minimum Graphed Errors specifies the minimum scale for the Y axis for error graphs.
The default is 25, meaning that the Y axis will not show less than 25 errors as the top
value of the Y axis.
11-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Setting Graph Preferences
Graph Colors (Figure 11-7) lets you set the colors for the graph background and text (data
and axis labels).
Figure 11-7: Setting graph color preferences
• To change a color, click on a button with the color bar icon. This displays a color
selection window where you can select the color you want. You can select a color using
color swatches, or by specifying HSB or RGB values.
• Set Graph Background Color sets the color of the background surrounding the graph.
• Set Graph Foreground Color sets the color of the text and bar outlines.
• Set Plot Background Color sets the color of the background behind the graph data.
Data Colors (Figure 11-8) lets you set the colors used for the various data sets in your
graph.
Figure 11-8: Setting data color preferences
• To change a color, click on a button with the color bar icon. This displays a color
selection window where you can select the color you want. You can select a color using
color swatches, or by specifying HSB or RGB values.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-13
Real-Time Statistics
• Data Color 1 is the color used for Utilization and Total Error graphs.
• Data colors 1 through 6 are used for the different errors in a individual errors chart.
• Data colors in order starting from 1 are used in a pie chart, for as many slices as you’ve
specified. (If you specify more than 12 slices, the colors will repeat, with slice 13 using
the same color as slice 1).
Graph Data (Figure 11-9) lets you set several miscellaneous graph parameters.
Figure 11-9: Setting other graph preferences
• Top N Display Count specifies the number of ports to include in a Top N display. The
default is 15, maximum is 100.
• Pie Slice Display Count specifies the number of slices to display in a pie chart. The
default is 10, maximum is 50.
• Historical Data Display Count specifies the number of historical data points to display
in a graph for an individual port. The default is 50, the maximum value you can set is
100. However, the actual maximum number of data points you can get is determined by
the SNMP agent running in the device from which you are getting data.
• Historical Data Sampling Interval is the sampling interval to use when displaying
historical data. Select a choice from the pull-down list. The choices in the list are
determined by the configuration of the device from which you are getting data.
Taking Graph Snapshots
The Real-Time Statistics Snapshot feature lets you take a static image of a graph or table
view of the current real-time statistics data. The snapshot generates a persistent HTML
page that is displayed in a separate browser window (see Figure 11-10).
11-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Taking Graph Snapshots
Figure 11-10: Snapshot of Real-Time Statistics graph display
To take a snapshot, click the camera icon located in the toolbar at the top of the RT Statistics
applet window. The snapshot image will be displayed in a new browser window in the
same form (graph or table) as it was in the RT Statistics applet. Graph images reflect the
current display size and graph type (pie, bar, etc.).
From the browser window, the snapshot image can be saved as a file, printed, or sent by
e-mail, just as with any other HTML page.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
11-15
Real-Time Statistics
When a graph image is displayed in the browser window, you can click a link below the
initial display to change the way the data is displayed:
• display table reformats the data as a table
• display graph/table displays both the graph and table formats on the same HTML page
• display graph image displays the data as a graph, in the style in which it was displayed
when the snapshot was taken.
Once you select “display graph image” you can no longer change the display
format to a table or to a dual display. However, you can use the browser “Back”
button to go to the previously displayed page.
When you snapshot a table, you cannot change to a graph from within the snapshot image
browser window.
The HTML page persists in a snapshot image cache until the EPICenter server is restarted,
or until the image cache becomes full. When the image cache reaches its limit, older
snapshot images will be deleted as needed to make room for new snapshot images.
11-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12 Network Topology Views
This chapter describes how to use the EPICenter Topology View applet for:
• Viewing EPICenter Topology maps
• Creating new topology views
• Adding, moving and deleting map elements (nodes and links)
• Modifying the layout of a topology map
• Displaying the alarm browser, telnet window, real-time statistics, a front panel view, or
ExtremeWare Vista for a specific node on the map
Overview of EPICenter Topology Views
EPICenter’s Topology applet allows you to view your network (EPICenter-managed
devices and the links between devices) as a set of maps. These maps can be organized into
sets of submaps that allow you to represent your network as a hierarchical system of
campuses, buildings, floors, closets, or whatever logical groupings you want. You can also
create additional topology views (sets of maps) so you can create several different
representations of your network for different purposes.
For views with the Auto Populate View option enabled, the Topology applet will
automatically add device nodes that are added to EPICenter’s device inventory, add links
that exist between the devices, and organize them into submaps as appropriate. You can
customize the resulting maps by moving elements, adding new elements, such as links,
“decorative” (non-managed) nodes, and text, and customizing the device nodes
themselves.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-1
Network Topology Views
In addition, from a managed device node on the map, you can invoke other EPICenter
functions such as the alarm browser, Telnet, real-time statistics, a front panel view, or
ExtremeWare Vista for the selected device.
Maps are initially created in a default layout based on information in EPICenter’s device
inventory about the devices and their connectivity. You can customize the layouts into
hierarchical views using drag and drop or cut and paste. You can also add and remove
“decorative” nodes (nodes that aren’t discovered or managed by EPICenter) and links.
Displaying a Network Topology View
Click the Topology button in the EPICenter Navigation Toolbar to display the main
Topology View page, as shown in Figure 12-1.
If you have not yet performed a Discovery (i.e. there are no devices in EPICenter’s
Inventory database) the map will be blank.
12-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying a Network Topology View
Link
Information
panel
Device node
Hyper node L2 cloud node
Decorative node
Submap node
View name
Text node
Figure 12-1: The Topology View
A View is a unique, named hierarchy of maps, consisting of a root map and optional
submaps, depending on the topology of the network. The current View name is displayed
in the pull down field at the left of the icon bar.
A Map is a collection nodes and links.
The left-hand panel displays the Map Hierarchy Tree. This starts at the root map and
shows the hierarchy of submaps in the current topology view. The current map name is
highlighted.
The center panel displays the currently selected map in the current topology view. Only
one view and map can be displayed at a time.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-3
Network Topology Views
The right-hand panel is the Map Element Description panel, that displays information
about the currently selected map element (node or link) if one (and only one) is selected.
Otherwise, the panel is empty.
When you do a Discovery or add a device in the Inventory applet, the newly added devices
are placed into the default topology view, (named “Default”). If you have created other
maps with the Auto Populate View feature enabled, those views will also be populated
with the newly added devices. Device connectivity and the map hierarchy is determined
by the information learned from the EPICenter database.
For views with the Auto Populate View option enabled, EPICenter places devices on the
Root Map or into submaps based on the following criteria:
• Devices with IP Forwarding enabled are always placed on the Root Map
• Devices without IP Forwarding enabled are placed in submaps based on the subnet
mask. In the Default view, submaps are named based on the subnet IP address plus the
subnet mask: for example, 10.205.0.0/16, 10.205.0.0/24, and so on.
Both Extreme and third-party devices are placed using these rules. For Extreme devices,
you can find the subnet mask and IP Forwarding status by looking at the device in the
VLAN applet. For third-party devices, you must query the device itself if you want to
determine these settings.
Map Elements
The following elements can appear on a map:
Device Nodes: Device nodes represent the managed devices found in EPICenter’s
Inventory data base.
Figure 12-2: Example of device nodes, including an unknown device type
A device node shows the following information:
• The name of the device as it is kept in the Inventory database
• An optional, user-supplied annotation for the node
12-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying a Network Topology View
• A small icon representing the specific device or device product line, if the device is of a
known type, or an “unknown” device icon (a circle with a question mark) as shown in
Figure 12-2
• The device’s IP address
• The device status, indicated by the color of the icon border
— A green border indicates that the device is UP
— A red border indicates that the device is DOWN
Each managed device known to EPICenter can only appear once in each topological view.
Submap Nodes: A submap node represents a child map of the current map.
Figure 12-3: Example of a submap node
The submap node icon shows the following information:
• The name of the node (submap), which can be edited. By default, it is given the subnet
address/subnet mask as the name
• A submap icon, as shown in Figure 12-3
A submap node does not provide any status information.
L2 Cloud Nodes: An L2 cloud map node provides connectivity between devices when the
details of the connectivity cannot be determined.
Figure 12-4: Example of an L2 cloud node
The L2 cloud node icon shows the following information:
• The name of the node (cloud), which can be edited. By default, it is named L2C
• A cloud icon, as shown in Figure 12-4
An L2 cloud node does not provide any status information.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-5
Network Topology Views
You cannot add L2 cloud nodes; they are placed automatically by EPICenter as
required by device connectivity. You can remove them, but they may be replaced
automatically by EPICenter if still needed.
Hyper Nodes: A hyper node represents a link termination when the actual terminating
node (device or cloud) is present on another map. Thus, a hyper node will show the same
information as the node it represents (except for the optional node annotation):
Figure 12-5: Example of hyper node icons representing a device and an L2 cloud
A hyper node icon shows the following information:
• The name of the device or cloud node that this hyper node represents
• An optional, user-supplied annotation for a device hyper node. This is a different
annotation than will appear in the device node that this hyper node represents
• A hyper node icon, as shown in Figure 12-5
• The device IP address, for a device hyper node
• The device status, for a device hyper node, as indicated by the color of the icon border:
— A green border indicates that the device is UP
— A red border indicates that the device is DOWN
An L2 cloud hyper node does not show any status information.
You cannot add, cut, or delete hyper nodes; they are placed and removed
automatically by EPICenter as required by device connectivity.
Decorative Nodes: A decorative map node can be created by the user to represent any
other type of node that is not discovered or managed by EPICenter, such as a server or
workstation.
Figure 12-6: Example of a decorative node
12-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying a Network Topology View
A decorative node shows the following information:
• The name or description of the node, which can be edited
• A decorative node icon, as shown in Figure 12-6
Text Nodes: A text map node is a single-line text field that can be placed anywhere in a
network map. It can be used to create a title for the map, additional annotations for other
map elements, comments, and so on.
Links: A link represents connectivity between nodes in the map. When a link connects two
devices on the same map, the link will be annotated with the port number or slot and port
number for each of the endpoints, as shown in Figure 12-7. When an endpoint is not
known (the link terminates in a L2 cloud) the unknown port is indicated with a question
mark. The link also shows the following information:
The width of the link indicates the link type:
— A thick line indicates a gigabit link
— A thin line indicates a 10/100 link
The color of the link indicates the link status:
— A green line indicates that the link is UP
— A red line indicates that the link is DOWN
— A grey line indicates that the status is unknown
Figure 12-7: Example of a gigabit link showing endpoint connectivity and Up status
If RMON statistics are enabled for the map, then link utilization (as a percentage of link
capacity) will be displayed for each port on a link between devices that have RMON
enabled in the device. The utilization is updated at the nominal RMON rate as set in the
switch—typically every 30 seconds. The default is that RMON statistics are not enabled for
a map. To enable the display of RMON statistics, see “Setting Map Properties” on
page 12-23.
If RMON statistics are not enabled in the switch, then no statistics will be displayed,
even if you enable the display of RMON statistics for the map.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-7
Network Topology Views
Manipulating Map Elements
Map elements (nodes and links) can be resized, cut and pasted, and deleted, either using
commands from the topology view menus, from the pop-menu enabled with a
right-cursor click on the map background, using specific keyboard short cuts, or (under
Windows NT or Windows 2000) through the regular Windows mouse and cursor actions
and keyboard shortcuts.
For example, you can resize an individual node by selecting the node and doing one of the
following:
• Using the cursor to grab one of the resize handles that appear when the node is
selected, and dragging the handle to resize the node
• Selecting the Inflate Nodes or Deflate Nodes command from the Map Menu, or by
using the keyboard shortcuts for those commands (see the sections “Inflating the Map
Nodes” and “Deflating the Map Nodes” on page 12-21).
Map Element Description Panel
When you select a map node or link with the cursor, a panel on the right-hand side of the
window displays information about the node or link.
For map nodes the information panel displays the following:
• Node name (an editable name for all but device nodes and device hyper nodes)
• Node annotation field (for device nodes and device hyper nodes only)
• Node type (Device, Submap Node, L2 Cloud, Decoration Node, Text Node, or Hyper
Node)
• Status (Up, Down, or None)
• IP (IP address for a Device node, n/a for any other node type)
• MAC (MAC address for a Device node, n/a for any other node type)
• Vendor (Device vendor name for a Device node, n/a for any other node type)
• Product (Product name for a Device node, n/a for any other node type)
• Device (Device name obtained from the sysName variable for a Device node, n/a for
any other node type)
For links, the information panel displays the following for each link endpoint:
• The name of the node
12-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
• The device represented by the endpoint node
• The device port or slot and port to which the link connects, if known
• The utilization percentage, if RMON is enabled on the device and if RMON statistics are
enabled for this map. The default is that RMON statistics are not enabled for a map.
This is updated regularly, typically every 30 seconds
• The total errors, if RMON is enabled on the device and if RMON statistics are enabled
for this map. This is updated regularly, typically every 30 seconds
In addition, for the link itself, the following information is displayed:
• The status of the link: UP, DOWN, or NONE
• The link type (speed): 10/100, 1000, or unknown
• Whether the link is load shared: yes or no
Manipulating Map Views
You can create new topology views or move elements around on existing maps in a
number of ways. The Topology View applet provides a number of ways to invoke the
various commands and functions:
• A series of pull-down menus. All commands and functions can be accessed from these
menus
• A set of icons that represent a commonly-used subset of the functions available
• A pop-up menu you can invoke by clicking the right mouse button on any unoccupied
area of the map background
• A pop-up menu you can invoke by right-clicking on a Device map node
• Keyboard shortcuts for some functions
The various methods you can use to perform a command are described under each
command or function.
Creating a New View or a New Map
The Default map contains all the network devices known to EPICenter, arranged based on
EPICenter’s internal algorithms (see the discussion on page 12-4 in the section “Displaying
a Network Topology View”). However, it is often convenient to create views based on
other criteria, such as physical location, departmental organization, and so on. The
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-9
Network Topology Views
Topology applet lets you create additional views that organize your network elements in
any way you wish.
Creating a New View
You can create a new view (and its Root Map) by doing one of the following:
• Select New View from the New menu
• Click the “Create new view” icon on the icon bar:
A pop-up window appears where you can enter the name of the view.
When you click OK, a new, blank root map is displayed. The new view name appears in
the View field at the left of the icon bar.
If you select the Auto populate view option, as new devices are added to EPICenter, they
will also be added to the view, and submaps, L2 clouds and hyper nodes will be created as
needed. If you do a Discovery after you have created a view with the auto populate option
enabled, all new discovered devices will be added to the view.
You can display the Default view or any other views you have created by selecting the
View name from the pull down list in the View field.
You can rename the view by clicking in the View field and typing over the view name.
Click away from the View field to commit the change.
Creating a New Submap
You can create a new map by doing one of the following:
• Select New Map from the New menu
• Click the “Create new map” icon on the icon bar:
A new submap node appears on the map, and a New Map entry appears in the map
hierarchy tree, as shown in Figure 12-8.
12-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
Figure 12-8: Adding a new map
To give the submap a different name, select the submap node, and change the name in the
name field in the right-hand panel (the Information panel). The change will take effect
when you click away from the submap node.
You can also change the name of any map (including the Root Map) by clicking slowly
twice on the name in the Map Tree Hierarchy. This puts you into an edit mode where you
can change the name.
When editing the map name in either location, you can cancel the edit with the [Esc] key,
as long as you have not yet committed it.
You can commit the change with the [Enter] key, or by clicking in a different panel from the
one where you are editing.
Adding Elements to the Map
You can add a variety of elements to your map: device nodes, submap nodes, links,
decorative nodes, and text “nodes”.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-11
Network Topology Views
Adding a Device Node
You can add device nodes to your map by doing one of the following:
• Select New Device Map Node from the New menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select New Device Map Node
• Click the “Create new device map” node icon on the icon bar:
A pop-up window appears with a list of all devices currently known to ExtremeWare
EPICenter, that are not already used somewhere in this view. Select the devices you want
to add and click OK. The device node will appear on the map, identified by the
information from EPICenter’s inventory database.
If the device has known links to other devices already on the map, or on other submaps
within the same view, those links will also be placed on the map. An L2 cloud node or a
hyper node, may also be placed on the map, if required for connectivity between the
devices.
If all devices known to EPICenter are already placed in this view (on any of the maps in the
view) the pop-up window will inform you of that fact.
L2 Cloud Nodes and Hyper Nodes
You cannot add L2 cloud nodes and you cannot add or remove hyper nodes to or from
your map; they are added automatically if the connectivity between device nodes requires
it.
Adding a Decorative Node
You can add a decorative node to your map by doing one of the following:
• Select New Decorative Map Node from the New menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select New Decorative Map Node
• Click the “Create new decorative map node” icon on the icon bar
A decorative map node is a node that can be used to represent any component of your
network that is not recognized or managed by ExtremeWare EPICenter.
12-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
Figure 12-9: Adding a decorative node to the map
You can change the node name by selecting the node, and editing the contents of the name
field in the right-hand panel (the Information panel). The change will take effect when you
click away from the submap node.
Adding a Text Node
You can add a text node to your map by doing one of the following:
• Select New Text Map Node from the New menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select New Text Map Node
A text map node can be used to annotate your map, such as to create a title for the map.
Adding a Map Link
You can add a link between nodes on your map by doing one of the following:
• Select New Map Link from the New menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select New Map Link
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-13
Network Topology Views
• Click the “Create new map link” icon on the icon bar
A link is added to your map, as shown in Figure 12-10.
Figure 12-10: Adding a link to your map
To attach the link between two map nodes, follow these steps:
1 Select one of the red triangles, then wait until a move cursor appears
2 Drag and drop one end of the link onto one of the node you want to connect
3 Do the same with the other end of the link
After the link is connected, you can specify endpoint for the link. To specify the end points,
follow these steps:
1 Select the link
2 In the right-hand information panel, select the port for the endpoint from the list in the
Port field for first device
3 Select the port for the other endpoint from the list in the Port field for second device, as
shown in Figure 12-11
12-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
Figure 12-11: Specifying ports for a new link connection
Discovering Links Between Devices
EPICenter will eventually rediscover links between devices if they are real existing links,
even if you have deleted the links from your map. However, if you want to have EPICenter
discover new links immediately, instead of waiting for the next polling cycle, you can use
the Discover Links command.
To have EPICenter rediscover all existing links between devices, do the following:
• Select Discover Links from the New menu
EPICenter will add or update the links that exist between the devices on your map.
Editing the Map
You can edit your topology views in a number of ways, including changing the names of
the views and maps, and cutting, pasting, or deleting map elements.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-15
Network Topology Views
Renaming a Topology View
You can change the name of a view (including the Default view) by doing one of the
following:
• Select Rename View from the Edit menu
• Click once on the view name in the view name field
Either of these actions puts you into an edit mode where you can directly change or replace
the contents of the field.
Renaming a Map
You can change the name of the current map by doing one of the following:
• Select Rename Map from the Edit menu
• Click twice on the Map name in the Map Hierarchy Tree
Either of these actions puts you into an edit mode where you can change or replace the
name in the Map Hierarchy Tree.
You can also change the name of the map in the Map Properties window, as discussed in
“Setting Map Properties” on page 12-23.
Deleting a View
To delete the entire current view, select Delete View from the Edit menu. You will be asked
to confirm that you want to delete the entire view. This function deletes the currently
displayed view, including all of its maps.
Once the view is deleted, the next remaining view is displayed, if there are any other
views.
You can use this command to delete the Default view. However, if you do this, it will
be difficult to recreate the view and its submaps.
Deleting a Submap
To delete a submap, you must first display the submap you want to delete, and delete all
the elements on the map. You can then delete the submap by selecting Delete Map from
the Edit menu. You can also delete a submap by clicking the submap node on its parent
map.
12-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the map.
A submap must be empty before you can delete it.
You cannot use the Delete Map command to delete the Root Map.
To delete the Root map you must delete the entire View with the Delete View command.
Cutting Map Nodes
You can cut selected device, decorative, or text nodes from the map in order to paste them
in another location.
• You can cut a submap node as long as it is empty
• You cannot cut a hyper node. A hyper node will be removed automatically as
appropriate, if all nodes on the current map that have links to that node, are removed
• L2 cloud nodes can be cut, but cannot be pasted.
To cut one or more nodes, do the following:
1 Select the nodes you want to cut. You can select multiple nodes by dragging the cursor
to rubber-band the selection, or by using Shift-click (hold down the shift key while
clicking the cursor on the nodes you want to select).
2 Then, cut the nodes by doing one of the following:
— Select Cut Map Nodes from the Edit menu
— Click the “Cut nodes from map” icon on the icon bar
— Enter [Alt]+X from the keyboard
You will NOT be asked to confirm this action: if you cut a node by mistake, you will
just need to paste it back again to the map.
To remove nodes from the map without provision for pasting them, use the Delete Map
Nodes command.
Pasting Nodes onto a Map
Once you have cut one or more nodes, you can paste them onto another map by doing one
of the following:
• Select Paste Map Nodes from the Edit menu
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-17
Network Topology Views
• Click the “Paste nodes into map” icon on the icon bar
• Enter [Alt]+V from the keyboard
These commands will only be available if there are cut nodes currently on the clipboard.
If nodes are pasted partially or completely on top of one another, you can use the Layout
Map command (see page 12-19) to rearrange them.
Cutting and pasting multiple nodes will not preserve manually-created links
between the nodes. Links that are automatically discovered will be recreated after
the nodes are pasted, but links that were created manually must be recreated
manually.
If an L2 cloud node was among those you selected to cut, it will not necessarily be
pasted with the other nodes. It will be placed automatically on a submap, if
necessary, as determined by EPICenter.
Deleting Nodes from the Map
You can delete selected device, decorative, or text nodes from the map, as opposed to
cutting them for later pasting.
• You can delete a submap node as long as it is empty
• You cannot delete hyper nodes. A hyper node is deleted automatically when the actual
node it represents is deleted
• L2 cloud nodes are deleted when they are no longer needed. You can also delete them
manually
To delete one or more nodes, do the following:
1 Select the nodes you want to delete. You can select multiple nodes by using Shift-click
(hold down the shift key and click the cursor on the node you want to select).
2 Select Delete Map Nodes from the Edit menu to delete the node or nodes.
You will NOT be asked to confirm that you want to delete the nodes. If you delete
nodes accidently, you will need to add them again to the map.
Deleting Links from the Map
You can remove one or more links from the map using the Delete Map Links command.
To delete one or more links, do the following:
12-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
1 Select the links you want to delete. You can select multiple links by using Shift-click
(hold down the shift key and click the cursor on the link you want to select).
2 Select Delete Map Links from the Edit menu to delete the link or links. You will be
asked to confirm that you want to delete these links.
Active links that were created automatically by EPICenter will be recreated
automatically on the next polling cycle as long as the endpoints they linked are still
present on the map. The only links that can be permanently deleted are
manually-created links or links that cease to exist.
Links that have been deleted cannot be pasted. Manual links must be recreated
manually.
Selecting All Nodes in a Map
You can select all the nodes in a map by doing one of the following:
• Select Select All Map Nodes from the Edit menu
• Enter [Alt]+A from the keyboard
To move a multiple-node selection as a group, hold down the shift key while
dragging to preserve the multiple-node selection.
Map Viewing Functions
ExtremeWare EPICenter’s Topology applet provides a number of ways to view and
manipulate the layout of a topology map.
The size and layout of map nodes is saved at every map operation (except for the map
zoom level).
Map Layout
You can drag map nodes around on the map yourself, or you can have EPICenter lay out
the map nodes for you. To have ExtremeWare EPICenter do the map layout, do one of the
following:
• Select Layout Map from the Map menu
• Click the “Layout” icon on the icon bar
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-19
Network Topology Views
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select Layout Map
• Enter [Alt]+L from the keyboard
You can use the Expand Map and Compress Map commands to increase the space
between nodes in the map. You can also move map nodes by selecting them and dragging
them to the location where you want them placed.
Expanding the Map
The Expand Map function increases the length of the links between map nodes without
changing the size of the nodes. To expand the current map, do one of the following:
• Select Expand Map from the Map menu
• Enter [Alt]+E from the keyboard
Because this command affects map links, nodes that do not have links are not moved.
Compressing the Map
The Compress Map function decreases the length of the links between map nodes without
changing the size of the nodes. To compress the current map, do one of the following:
• Select Compress Map from the Map menu
• Enter [Alt]+S from the keyboard
Because this command affects map links, nodes that do not have links are not moved.
Inflating the Map Nodes
The Inflate Nodes function increases the size of some or all of the nodes on the current
map, without changing the spacing between the nodes.
By default (if you do not select any specific nodes) the command will inflate all nodes on
the current map. If you select one or more nodes, the command will inflate just the nodes
you’ve selected. You can select multiple nodes by using Shift-click (hold down the shift key
and click the cursor on the node you want to select).
To inflate the selected nodes, do one of the following:
• Select Inflate Nodes from the Map menu
• Enter [Alt]+I from the keyboard
12-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
Deflating the Map Nodes
The Deflate Nodes function decreases the size of some or all of the nodes on the current
map, without changing the spacing between the nodes.
By default (if you do not select any specific nodes) the command will deflate all nodes on
the current map. If you select one or more nodes, the command will deflate just the nodes
you’ve selected. You can select multiple nodes by using Shift-click (hold down the shift key
and click the cursor on the node you want to select).
To deflate the selected nodes, do one of the following:
• Select Deflate Nodes from the Map menu
• Enter [Alt]+D from the keyboard
Zooming In
The Zoom In function expands the entire map, both the size of the nodes as well as the
spacing between them. To zoom in the current map, do one of the following:
• Select Zoom Map In from the Map menu
• Click the “Zoom map in” icon on the icon bar
• Enter [Alt] and the [Plus] from the numeric keypad on the keyboard
Unlike the other map manipulation commands, the zoom level is not saved with the map.
Zooming Out
The Zoom Out function shrinks the entire map, both the size of the nodes as well as the
spacing between them. To Zoom Out the current map, do one of the following:
• Select Zoom Map Out from the Map menu
• Click the “Zoom map out” icon on the icon bar
• Enter [Alt] plus the [Minus] from the numeric keypad on the keyboard
Unlike the other map manipulation commands, the zoom level is not saved with the map.
Unzooming the Map
The Unzoom Map function restores the map to the size it was prior to any Zoom In or
Zoom Out actions. To “unzoom” the map, do one of the following:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-21
Network Topology Views
• Select Unzoom Map from the Map menu
• Enter [Alt]+R from the keyboard
Undoing Your Map Edits
You can undo your last ten map layout and sizing actions one by one using the Undo Map
Edit function. Each Undo Map Edit action undoes your previous editing action. To undo
the most recent edit, do one of the following:
• Select Undo Map Edit from the Map menu
• Enter [Alt]+U from the keyboard
This command does not undo delete, cut or paste of map elements. It stores only the last
ten map layout and sizing actions.
Printing a Map
You can print the current map using the Print Map function. To print a map, display the
map you want to print and then do one of the following:
• Select Print Map from the Map menu
• Click the “Print map” icon on the icon bar
• Enter [Alt]+P from the keyboard
Printing a large map can be very memory-intensive, and can take a significant amount of
time.
Finding a Map Node
If your map has a large number of nodes, it may be difficult to quickly find a specific node
you’re interested in seeing. The Find Map Node function lets you select a node from the list
of all nodes in the current view, and will then find and “select” that node.
To find a node, do one of the following:
• Select Find Map Node... from the Map menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select Find Map Node...
• Enter [Alt]-F from the keyboard
12-22
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
You are presented with a list of all the nodes in the current view (see Figure 12-12). The list
includes the name of the node, the IP address, the node type, and the map where it can be
found.
Figure 12-12: Finding a node in the current view
◆ To find a node, select the node and click the Find button.
This will display the appropriate submap, if necessary, and highlight the node you have
selected.
The Find Map Node window will continue to be displayed until you dismiss it with the
Close button. You can move around among different maps and views while the Find Map
Node window is displayed.
If you change views while the Find Map Node window is displayed, the list of devices will
no longer be correct. To update the list to reflect the current view, click the Refresh button.
Setting Map Properties
There are a number of properties you can set for the current map, such as the background
color or image, node background color and style, node and link text color, and whether
RMON statistics should be enabled for the devices on this map.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-23
Network Topology Views
To display the Map Properties window, do one of the following:
• Select Map Properties... from the Map menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the map background to display the pop-up menu,
then select Map Properties...
The Topology Map Properties window will appear, as shown in Figure 12-12.
Figure 12-13: Setting Map Properties for the current map
In this window you can do the following:
• To change the name of the map, modify the name in the Name field
• To select a background image for the map, select the image you want from the
drop-down list in the Background Image field
• To change the height and width (in pixels) for the background image, enter the number
of pixels in the Background Image Width or Background Image Height field
• To select the coordinates (in pixels) where the upper left hand corner of the background
image should be placed, enter the number of pixels in the Background Image X or
Background Image Y field
• To change the map background color, click the color bar icon labeled Map Background
Color. This displays a color selection window where you can select the color you want.
You can select a color using color swatches, or by specifying HSB or RGB values. The
current color is displayed in the small box to the right of the color bar icon.
• To change the node background color, click the color bar icon labeled Node
Background Color. This displays a color selection window where you can select the
color you want. You can select a color using color swatches, or by specifying HSB or
12-24
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Manipulating Map Views
RGB values. The current color is displayed in the small box to the right of the color bar
icon.
• To set the color used to label nodes, click the color bar icon labeled Node Text Color.
This displays a color selection window where you can select a color by using color
swatches, or by specifying HSB or RGB values. The current color is displayed in the
small box to the right of the color bar icon.
• To set the color of the text used to label links, click the color bar icon labeled Link Text
Color. This displays a color selection window where you can select a color using color
swatches, or by specifying HSB or RGB values. The current color is displayed in the
small box to the right of the color bar icon. The default is black.
• To use a gradient node background color (the color is shaded from light to dark to
light), click the checkbox labeled Node Gradient Background. To turn the gradient off,
so that the node background will be a uniform solid color, click in the checkbox to
remove the check mark. The default is to use a gradient background.
• To select whether RMON statistics should be enabled for this map, click the checkbox
labeled Rmon Statistics. When RMON statistics are on for a map, the percent
utilization will be displayed for links.
RMON statistics can be enabled separately for each map in the view. The default is to
have RMON statistics disabled for the map.
It is possible to disable RMON statistics for the Topology applet as a whole, so
that the Rmon Statistics checkbox will not have any effect. This is done setting
RMON properties on the Server Properties page of the Administration applet.
Adding Map Background Images
You can add images of your own to use as background images for topology maps by
placing them in the BackgroundImages directory in the EPICenter server installation.
Both .gif and .jpg image types are supported.
Background images are kept in the directory
<epicenter_install_dir>\extreme\gifs\topology.BackgroundImages
where <epicenter_install_dir> is the root directory of your EPICenter server
installation (by default epc3_0\extreme\gifs\topology.BackgroundImages in the
Windows operating environment, or
/opt/epc_30/extreme/gifs/topology.BackgroundImages on a Solaris system).
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-25
Network Topology Views
Device Information Views
You can view a variety of information about the devices represented by the nodes on the
map. By selecting a function from the Tools menu, or from the Device pop-up menu, you
can invoke displays of information kept by ExtremeWare EPICenter for the selected
device.
All these views can be run either by selecting the command from the Topology Tools menu,
or by right-clicking on a Device map node to bring up the Device node pop-up menu.
Device Alarms
The Device Alarms function runs the ExtremeWare EPICenter Alarm System and displays
the Alarm Browser function to show the alarms for the selected device.
To view the Device Alarms display for a selected node, select the node and do one of the
following:
• Select Device Alarms... from the Tools menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the Device map node, then select Device
Alarms... from the pop-up menu that appears
This starts the Alarm System applet in a new browser window. The Alarm System displays
the Alarm Log Browser and displays the alarms for the device associated with the selected
Device map node.
See Chapter 5, “The EPICenter Alarm System” for details on using this feature.
Device Browse
The Device Browse function runs the ExtremeWare Vista switch management interface for
the selected device.
To run ExtremeWare Vista for a selected node, select the node and do one of the following:
• Select Device Browse... from the Tools menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the Device map node, then select Device
Browse... from the pop-up menu that appears
This starts the ExtremeWare Vista login page in a new browser window.
12-26
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Device Information Views
Refer to the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for details on using ExtremeWare Vista.
Device Statistics
The Device Statistics function runs the ExtremeWare EPICenter Real-Time Statistics applet,
and displays port statistics for the selected device.
To view the Device Statistics display for a selected node, select the node and do one of the
following:
• Select Device Statistics... from the Tools menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the Device map node, then select Device
Statistics... from the pop-up menu that appears
This starts the Real-Time Statistics applet in a new browser window, and displays port
statistics for the device associated with the selected Device map node.
See Chapter 11, “Real-Time Statistics” for details on using this feature.
Device Telnet
The Device Telnet function opens an EPICenter telnet window that is connected to the
selected device.
To open a telnet session for a selected device, select the appropriate device node and do
one of the following:
• Select Device Telnet... from the Tools menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the Device map node, then select Device Telnet...
from the pop-up menu that appears
This starts a telnet session for the device in a new browser window.
See Chapter 10, “Using ExtremeView” for details on using this feature.
Device View
The Device View function runs the ExtremeWare EPICenter ExtremeView applet, and
displays the device front-panel image and device information for the selected device.
To view the Device View for a selected node, select the node and do one of the following:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
12-27
Network Topology Views
• Select Device View... from the Tools menu
• Click with the right mouse button on the Device map node, then select Device View...
from the pop-up menu that appears
This starts the ExtremeView applet in a new browser window and displays the front-panel
image and information for the device associated with the selected Device map node.
See Chapter 10, “Using ExtremeView” for details on using this feature.
12-28
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13 Using the VLAN Manager
This chapter describes how to use the VLAN Manager for:
• Viewing enterprise-wide, tagged and untagged VLAN information for Extreme
(Summit and BlackDiamond) switches managed by the EPICenter software
• Adding new tagged or untagged VLANs to Extreme devices, adding ports to those
VLANs, and modifying IP addresses
• Deleting VLANs
• Modifying VLANs
• Adding and deleting protocol filters
Overview of Virtual LANs
A Virtual LAN is a group of location- and topology-independent devices that
communicate as if they were on the same physical local area network (LAN). Extreme
Networks switches have a VLAN feature that enables you to construct broadcast domains
without being restricted by physical connections.
The VLAN Manager creates and manages VLAN for Extreme Networks devices only. It
does not handle other third-party devices, even though third-party devices can be
managed through the Inventory Manager.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-1
Using the VLAN Manager
If you run the EPICenter client with Administrator or Manager access, you can:
• Create and delete VLANs
• Add or remove ports from existing VLANs
• Modify a VLAN’s IP address
• Enable/disable IP Forwarding
• Create and modify the protocol filters used to filter VLAN traffic
Extreme Networks switches support a maximum of 3000 VLANs. VLANs on Extreme
Networks switches can be created according to the following criteria:
• Physical port
• 802.1Q tag
• Protocol sensitivity using Ethernet, LLC SAP, or LLC/SNAP Ethernet protocol filters
• A combination of these criteria
In the EPICenter system, a VLAN is defined uniquely by the following:
• Name
• 802.1Q tag (if defined)
• Protocol filters applied to the VLAN
As a result, multiple switches are shown as members of the same VLAN whenever all the
above are the same.
For a more detailed explanation of VLANs, see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide.
Displaying a VLAN
When you click the VLAN icon in the EPICenter Navigation Toolbar, the VLAN Manager
window is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-1.
13-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying a VLAN
Figure 13-1: VLAN Manager applet, showing devices organized by VLAN
The VLANs currently known to the EPICenter database are displayed in the Component
Tree on the left. The panel on the right shows summary information about each VLAN.
Note that in the example shown in Figure 13-1, there are two VLANs with the same name,
but differing in the protocol filters applied.
You must add switches to the EPICenter database through Discovery or by using
the Add function in the Inventory Manager. Until you add a switch to the database,
you cannot create any VLANs on that switch.
Information about VLAN configurations is obtained when a switch is added to the
database.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-3
Using the VLAN Manager
The VLAN Manager can display information either by VLAN (showing all the switches
with ports that are members of a specific VLAN) or by switch (showing the VLANs that
have members on a specific switch).
• Select the By VLAN button to display VLANs at the first level of the Component Tree.
Listed under each VLAN is every switch that has the VLAN defined on it (see
Figure 13-1).
Select an individual VLAN to view a summary of the configuration of the switches and
ports that are members of that VLAN.
• Select the By Switch button to display switches at the first level of the Component Tree.
Listed under each switch is every VLAN that is defined on the switch, as shown in
Figure 13-2.
Figure 13-2: VLAN topology shown by switch
13-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Displaying a VLAN
You can display details about the component ports of a VLAN by selecting the VLAN or
switch in the tree on the left. The panel on the right displays detailed information about the
selected component, as shown in Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-3 presents details about the ports in a VLAN on the selected switch.
Figure 13-3: VLAN member ports on a selected switch
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-5
Using the VLAN Manager
Figure 13-4 presents details about the ports on a given switch that are found in the selected
VLAN.
Figure 13-4: Switch member ports for a selected VLAN
Adding a VLAN
Users with Administrator or Manager access can create VLANs on the Extreme Networks
switches managed by the EPICenter software. If you have Monitor access only, you can not
use this function.
To add a new VLAN, do the following:
13-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding a VLAN
1 Click the Add button in the VLAN Manager panel.
The Add VLAN dialog box, Properties & Ports page is displayed, as shown in
Figure 13-5.
Figure 13-5: Add VLAN dialog, Properties and Ports page
2 Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN. The name must begin with a letter followed by
up to 31 characters. See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for details on VLAN
naming.
3 Select an entry from the pull-down Protocol Filter list. This selection determines what
protocol (if any) is used to determine membership in this VLAN. If you do not want to
specify a protocol, select ANY. This means the filtering rules will match all unfiltered
protocols.
4 If the VLAN is to be tagged, enter a 802.1Q tag value in the Tag field. The tag value can
be a number between 2 and 4095. By entering a tag number, you enable tagging for this
VLAN. Enter the text “untagged” or 0 (zero) to indicate that the VLAN is to be
untagged.
5 To add a port to the VLAN, first select the switch from the Available Switches list. This
displays a list of ports on the switch that are available to be included in the VLAN.
The Available Ports list does not include ports in SummitLink™ mode, or ports
configured as slave load sharing ports.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-7
Using the VLAN Manager
6 Select one or more ports from the Available Ports list.
7 Click Tagged to add the port as a tagged port. Click Untagged to add the port as an
untagged port.
If this is an untagged VLAN, you are not able to add a tagged port.
When you add an untagged port to a VLAN, it is automatically removed from any
other VLAN which uses the same protocol as the new VLAN, and where the port is an
untagged member.
You can add a switch to a VLAN as a unit—just select the switch without selecting any
ports, and click Tagged or Untagged to add the switch to the VLAN.
8 To remove a port from the VLAN, select the port from the Ports in VLAN list, and then
click Remove.
9 When you have finished adding ports to the VLAN, click Apply to implement the
changes.
The VLAN is created on the switches whose ports are members of the new VLAN.
Once you have added a VLAN, you can specify an IP address and mask for the VLAN on
each switch, and also enable or disable IP Forwarding.
1 Select the IP Forwarding tab at the top of the Add VLAN window.
The IP Forwarding page is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-6.
13-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Deleting a VLAN
Figure 13-6: Add VLAN dialog, IP Forwarding page
2 Select a switch from the table of switches.
3 Enter an IP address and IP mask. Click the Enable IP Forwarding check box if you want
to enable IP forwarding for this VLAN on the switch.
4 Click Apply to implement the changes.
5 Click Close to exit the window.
Deleting a VLAN
Users with Administrator or Manager access can delete VLANs from Extreme Networks
switches managed by the EPICenter software. If you have only Monitor access, you cannot
use this function.
To delete a VLAN, follow these steps:
1 Click the Delete button in the VLAN Manager panel.
The Delete VLAN dialog is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-7.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-9
Using the VLAN Manager
Figure 13-7: The Delete VLAN page
2 Select the VLAN you want to delete.
3 Click Delete.
The VLAN is deleted from all the switches on which it exists.
4 Click Close to exit the window.
Modifying a VLAN
Users with Administrator or Manager access can modify the properties of a VLAN, and
add and remove ports from the VLAN. If you have only Monitor access, you can not use
this function.
To modify a VLAN, follow these steps:
1 Click the Modify button in the VLAN Manager panel.
The Modify VLAN dialog, Properties & Ports page is displayed, as shown in
Figure 13-8.
13-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Modifying a VLAN
Figure 13-8: The Modify VLAN dialog, Properties and Ports page
2 Select a VLAN from the drop-down list in the VLAN Name field.
The current values for the VLAN are displayed.
The Ports in VLAN list does not display SummitLink ports, because you cannot
modify them.
3 To change the Protocol Filter selection, select a different entry from the pull-down
Protocol Filter list.
4 To change the VLAN tag, type a new value into the Tag field.
To disable tagging for the VLAN, type “untagged” or 0 (zero) into the Tag field.
5 To remove a port from the VLAN, select the port in the Ports in VLAN list, and click
Remove.
6 To add a port to the VLAN, first select the switch from the Available Switches list. This
displays a list of ports on the switch that are available to be included in the VLAN.
The Available Ports list does not include ports in SummitLink mode, or ports
configured as slave load sharing ports.
7 Select a port from the Available Ports list.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-11
Using the VLAN Manager
8 Click Tagged to add the port as a tagged port. Click Untagged to add the port as an
untagged port.
If this is an untagged VLAN, you cannot add a port as a tagged port.
If a port is added as an untagged port, it is automatically removed from any other
VLAN which uses the same protocol as the new VLAN, and where the port is an
untagged member.
You can add a switch to a VLAN as a unit—just select the switch without selecting any
ports, and click Tagged or Untagged to add the switch to the VLAN.
9 When you have finished adding and removing ports, click Apply to implement the
changes.
If all ports of a switch are removed from the VLAN, the VLAN is deleted from that
switch.
If a port on a new switch is added to the VLAN, then the VLAN is created on that
switch.
10 To modify the IP address and mask for a VLAN on a switch, and to enable or disable IP
Forwarding, select the IP Forwarding tab at the top of the Add VLAN window.
The IP Forwarding page is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-6.
Figure 13-9: The Modify VLAN dialog, IP Forwarding page
11 Select a switch from the table of switches.
13-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding and Deleting Protocol Filters
12 Change the IP address and IP mask as appropriate. Click the Enable IP forwarding
check box to enable or disable IP forwarding for this VLAN on the switch.
13 Click Apply to implement the changes.
14 Click Close to exit the window.
Adding and Deleting Protocol Filters
Users with Administrator or Manager access can view, add, and delete protocol filter
definitions. If you have Monitor access, you can view filter definitions, but not add or
delete them.
To view, delete, or add protocol filter definitions, do the following:
1 Click Protocol Filters in the VLAN Manager.
The View/Delete page of the Protocol Panel dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 13-10.
.
Figure 13-10: Protocol Panel dialog box, View/Delete page
This page shows all the protocol filters configured within the EPICenter database. Any
filters that are in use by a VLAN are indicated with an asterisk (*) in the In Use column.
2 To delete a protocol filter, select a filter in the list, and click Delete.
This deletes the protocol filter from all Extreme Networks switches managed by the
EPICenter software, as well as from the EPICenter database.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
13-13
Using the VLAN Manager
If a filter is in use by a VLAN, you cannot delete it.
3 Click Close to exit the window.
To add a protocol filter, follow these steps:
1 Click the Add tab at the top of the Protocol Panel dialog box to display the Add Protocol
page, as shown in Figure 13-11.
.
Figure 13-11: Protocol Panel dialog box, Add Protocol page
2 Enter a descriptive name for the Protocol. The name must begin with a letter followed
by up to 31 characters. See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide for details on naming.
3 Select a protocol type from the pull-down list in the type column.
4 Type a corresponding four-digit hexadecimal filter value in the value field.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter up to six type-value pairs.
6 When you have finished entering the definition, click Add to add the new protocol
filter to the EPICenter database.
The protocol filter is now available to be used on any switch, but is not created
on any switches at this time. The protocol filter is created on a switch only when
you create or modify a VLAN to use the new protocol filter on that switch. The
database acts as a collective store for network data without needing to replicate it on
every switch.
7 Click Close to exit the window.
13-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
14 The ESRP Manager
This chapter describes how to use the ExtremeWare EPICenter ESRP Manager applet for:
• Viewing the status of ESRP-enabled VLANs and the ESRP-enabled switches in those
VLANs
Overview of the ESRP Manager
The Extreme Standby Router Protocol (ESRP) is a feature of ExtremeWare that allows
multiple switches to provide redundant layer 3 routing services, as well as layer 2
redundancy, to users. The ESRP Manager displays the status of ESRP-enabled VLANs and
the ESRP-enabled switches in those VLANs. You can view a summary status for all the
ESRP-enabled VLANs being monitored by EPICenter. You can also view detailed
information for an individual ESRP-enabled VLAN and the switches in those VLANs.
This chapter does not discuss ESRP functionality in any detail. For more
information about ESRP, see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide, versions 6.0
or later.
To start the ESRP Manager applet, click the ESRP button in the ExtremeWare EPICenter
Navigation Toolbar. The ESRP Manager applet appears, initially displaying a summary
status of the ESRP-enabled VLANs known to EPICenter, as shown in Figure 14-1.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
14-1
The ESRP Manager
Figure 14-1: ESRP Manager showing summary ESRP-enabled VLAN status
This display shows a summary of the ESRP configuration for each ESRP-enabled VLAN.
The information displayed is as follows:
• Name: The name of the ESRP-enabled VLAN
• Master Switch: The name, if known, or MAC address of the switch currently
designated as the Master switch. If this switch is being managed by EPICenter (is
included in EPICenter’s Inventory database) the name will appear. If the switch is not
known to EPICenter, the MAC address will appear.
• IP Address: The IP address of the ESRP-enabled VLAN. If the master switch is not
known to EPICenter, this will be “N/A.”
14-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing ESRP Detail Information
• Group: The ESRP group to which this ESRP-enabled VLAN belongs, in a broadcast
domain that contains multiple instances of ESRP (multiple ESRP groups). The names of
the ESRP-enabled VLANs participating in the same group must be identical.
• Election Algorithm: The ESRP election algorithm in use for this VLAN. The election
algorithm determines the order of precedence of the election factors used to determine
the ESRP Master. The election factors are:
— Ports: the number of active ports (the switch with the highest number takes priority)
— Track: whether the switch is using ESRP tracking (a switch using tracking has
priority)
— Priority: a user-defined priority number between 0 and 254 (a higher number has
higher priority)
— MAC: the switch MAC address (a higher-number address has priority)
The election algorithm can be one of the following:
— ports_track_priority_mac (the default): This algorithm considers active ports
first, then tracking, then priority, then the MAC address to determine the ESRP
Master. This is the only algorithm supported for ExtremeWare releases prior to
version 6.0
— track_ports_priority_mac
— priority_ports_track_mac
— priority_track_ports_mac
— priority_mac_only: only considers priority and the MAC address
See the ExtremeWare Software User Guide, version 6.1, for details.
The ESRP election algorithm must be identical on all switches in an ESRP
group. If it is not, serious problems may arise.
• Hello Timer: This is the interval, in seconds, for exchanging keep-alive packets
between the ESRP switches for this ESRP-enabled VLAN. Also known as the ESRP
timer. The default is 2 seconds.
Viewing ESRP Detail Information
You can display detailed ESRP information for the switches in an individual ESRP-enabled
VLAN by clicking on the VLAN name in the Component Tree in the left-hand panel of the
window. This displays a status window similar to the one shown in Figure 14-2.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
14-3
The ESRP Manager
Figure 14-2: ESRP detail for an individual ESRP-enabled VLAN
ESRP trap events will also be recorded in the EPICenter Event Log, which you can view
using the EPICenter Event Log Report (see Chapter 16, “Dynamic Reports”). ESRP state
change traps will be recorded in the EPICenter Alarm Log (see Chapter 5, “The EPICenter
Alarm System”).
ESRP Traps are not implemented in ExtremeWare versions 4.x or 5.x. Thus, for
switches running those versions of ExtremeWare, state changes and other ESRP
updates will only be reflected after the next ESRP polling interval.
Note that an ESRP-enabled VLAN can be monitored by EPICenter as long as at least one of
its ESRP-enabled switches is managed by EPICenter (i.e. is included in EPICenter’s device
database). If there are other ESRP-enabled switches in that VLAN, their ESRP status will
also be displayed in the ESRP Manager, even if they are not being managed by EPICenter.
14-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing ESRP Detail Information
The Detailed ESRP Information view displays the following information:
• Switch Name: The name of the switch, if known. (If the switch is not being managed by
EPICenter, this field will contain “N/A”)
• MAC: The MAC address of this switch
• State: The current state of the switch—Master or Slave
• Priority: A user-defined value, between 0 and 254, which can be used by the ESRP
election algorithm in determining which switch is the Master switch. The default is 0
• ToMaster: The number of times this switch has transitioned to become a Master
• ToSlave: The number of times this switch has transitioned to become a Slave
The number of Master and Slave transitions cannot be obtained from versions
of ExtremeWare prior to version 6.1.6. For switches running earlier versions of
ExtremeWare, the display defaults to “N/A.”
If some of the ESRP-enabled switches in an ESRP-enabled VLAN are not
managed by EPICenter, the ToMaster and ToSlave values for those switches
will not be updated until the next ESRP polling interval.
• Active Ports: The number of active ports in this ESRP-enable VLAN
• TrackedActivePorts: The number of tracked ports that are currently active
• TrackedIPRoutes: The number of tracked IP routes that are currently active
• TrackedPings: The number of tracked ping responders that are responding
successfully.
The number of Tracked Pings cannot be obtained from versions of
ExtremeWare prior to version 6.1.6. For switches running earlier versions of
ExtremeWare, the display defaults to zero.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
14-5
15 Administering EPICenter
This chapter describes how to use the Administration applet for the following:
• Changing your own user password, for users without Administration access
• Adding and deleting EPICenter users
• Setting and modifying user permissions for both the EPICenter and ExtremeWare
software
• Configuring the EPICenter server as a RADIUS client or a RADIUS server for user
authentication
• Modifying EPICenter server properties to change settings such as polling rates,
time-outs, port assignments and other similar settings
• Setting the EPICenter server into Scalable mode or back to regular mode
Overview of User Administration
In order to log in to the EPICenter server and use its management features, you must have
a user name and password. An EPICenter administrator can create and modify EPICenter
user accounts, passwords, and account permissions through the Administration applet.
Individual users, regardless of their access permissions, can change their own password
using the Administration applet.
The EPICenter server and its Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server
can be used for user authentication, both for EPICenter server access and Extreme
Networks switch access. The Administration applet provides an interface for configuring
the RADIUS server.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-1
Administering EPICenter
Finally, the Administration applet provides an interface that allows an EPICenter
administrator to modify a number of properties that affect the performance and
configuration of the EPICenter server. These properties are stored in the EPICenter
database along with other EPICenter data.
Controlling EPICenter Access
The EPICenter server provides three levels of access to EPICenter functions:
• Monitor—users who can view status information and statistics.
• Manager—users who can modify device parameters as well as view status information
and statistics.
• Administrator—users who can create, modify and delete user accounts as well as
perform all the functions of a user with Manager access.
The EPICenter server provides two default users:
• “admin” with Administrator access
• “user” with Monitor access
The two default users do not initially have passwords. All other user names must be added
and enabled by an Administrator user.
Regardless of your access level, you can run the Administration applet and change your
own password. Users with Administrator access can add and delete users and assign user
access levels.
The EPICenter user accounts are separate from the Extreme switch user accounts.
You can configure both through the EPICenter software, or you can have switch
access independently of the EPICenter software.
ExtremeWare Software Access
Through the EPICenter software, two levels of access to Extreme switches can be enabled:
• User—users who can view device status information and statistics, but cannot modify
any parameters.
• Administrator—users who can modify device parameters as well as view status
information and statistics.
15-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Starting the EPICenter Client for the First Time
These permissions enable access to Extreme Networks switches through Telnet or
ExtremeWare Vista. The use of the RADIUS server avoids the need to maintain user names,
passwords, and access permissions in each switch, and instead centralizes the
configuration in one location in the EPICenter server.
The EPICenter RADIUS Server
The EPICenter software incorporates a basic RADIUS server for user authentication.
RADIUS provides a standard way for the EPICenter software and Extreme Networks
switches to handle user authentication, permitting the unification of the Extreme
Networks CLI, ExtremeWare Vista, and EPICenter user authentication.
ExtremeWare versions 4.1 and later support the RADIUS server for authentication and can
act as RADIUS clients.
Setting EPICenter Server Properties
The server properties interface allows an EPICenter administrator to modify a number of
parameters that affect server performance and function. These include communication
parameters such as polling intervals, time-outs, port usage, number of retries, setting
Scalability mode, and a number of other parameters.
Starting the EPICenter Client for the First Time
The two default users, admin and user, do not initially have passwords.
It is strongly recommended that you log in the first time with the user name admin, and
immediately change the admin password. You can then add other users with Manager,
Monitor, or Administrator access.
To run the EPICenter client interface for the first time:
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 Enter the URL:
http://<host>:<port>/
In the URL, replace <host> with the name of the system where the EPICenter server is
running. Replace <port> with the TCP port number that you assigned to the EPICenter
Web Server during installation.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-3
Administering EPICenter
If you used the default web server port, 80, you do not need to include the port
number.
The EPICenter Start-up page appears.
3 Launch the EPICenter client.
The EPICenter Login page appears.
4 Type the user name admin in the User field.
5 Leave the Password field empty.
6 Click Login. The About EPICenter window appears.
7 Click Admin to access the Administration functions of the EPICenter server.
The User Administration page appears, as shown in Figure 15-1. The only users are
“admin” and “user.”
Figure 15-1: User Administration window
15-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Starting the EPICenter Client for the First Time
Changing the Admin Password
To change the Admin password:
1 Click the tab at the top of the page to display the User Administration page, if
necessary.
2 Select the user admin in the User list.
3 Click Modify.
The Edit User window appears, as shown in Figure 15-2.
Figure 15-2: Edit User window
4 Type a new password in the Password field.
5 Type the password again in the Verify Password field.
6 Click OK.
The new admin password is stored in the EPICenter database. You cannot change the
ExtremeWare EPICenter access level for this user.
You can, however, change the ExtremeWare account access. The default for the
ExtremeWare EPICenter user “Admin” is Administrator. See the information under
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-5
Administering EPICenter
“Adding or Modifying User Accounts” for details on the ExtremeWare account access
levels.
Adding or Modifying User Accounts
To add users to the EPICenter database, or to modify ExtremeWare EPICenter user account
access, follow these steps:
1 Login to the ExtremeWare EPICenter as a user with Administrator access.
2 Click Admin in the Navigation Toolbar.
3 Click the User Administration tab at the top of the page to display the User
Administration page, if necessary.
4 To add a user, click Add. To change a user’s access or password, select the user name
and click Modify.
The New User window (or Edit User window) appears (Figure 15-3).
Figure 15-3: New User and Edit User windows
5 For a new user, type a user name into the Name field.
15-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Adding or Modifying User Accounts
6 Type a new password into the Password field.
7 Type the password again into the Verify Password field.
8 Select the appropriate EPICenter Account Access level:
— Administrator access allows the user to add, edit and delete user accounts, as well
as view status information and statistics and modify device parameters.
— Manager access allows the user to view status information and statistics and modify
device parameters.
— Monitor access allows the user to view status information and statistics.
— Disabled provides no access privileges (the user will not be able to log in to the
EPICenter), but keeps the user account information in the EPICenter database.
9 Select the appropriate ExtremeWare Account Access level:
— Administrator access allows the user to modify device parameters as well as view
status information and statistics.
— User access allows the user to view device status information and statistics, but
cannot modify any parameters.
— No Access provides no access privileges, but keeps the user account information in
the EPICenter database.
10 Click OK.
The new user information is stored in the EPICenter database.
A change to a user account does not take effect until the next time the user logs in.
Deleting Users
To delete a user, follow these steps:
1 Log in to the ExtremeWare EPICenter as a user with Administrator access.
2 At the About ExtremeWare EPICenter window, click Admin in the Navigation Toolbar.
The User Administration page appears.
3 Click the User Administration tab at the top of the page to display the User
Administration page, if necessary.
4 Select the user name you want to delete and click Delete.
You cannot delete the user name admin.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-7
Administering EPICenter
A confirmation window appears.
5 Click Yes.
This removes all information about this user account from the EPICenter database.
To remove all access privileges for a user without removing the user account from
the EPICenter database, use the Modify User function and change the Account
Access to Disabled.
Changing Your Own User Password
If you are a user with Manager or Monitor access, you can change your own password at
any time after you have logged in to the ExtremeWare EPICenter. To do so, follow these
steps:
1 Click Admin in the Navigation Toolbar.
The Change Password window appears, as shown in Figure 15-4.
15-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Changing Your Own User Password
Figure 15-4: Change Password window
The window shows your user name, and your EPICenter and RADIUS Account Access
levels, but you cannot change them.
2 Type your new password in the Password field.
3 Type the password again in the Verify Password field.
4 Click Apply.
Your new password is stored in the EPICenter database.
The change does not take effect until the next time you log in.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-9
Administering EPICenter
RADIUS Administration
If you have Administrator access, you can enable or disable the RADIUS server, and
change its port or the RADIUS secret.
To configure EPICenter as a RADIUS server, follow these steps:
1 Click the RADIUS Administration tab at the top of the page.
The RADIUS Administration page appears, as shown in Figure 15-5.
Figure 15-5: Radius Administration page
2 Click the Enable EPICenter as a RADIUS Server button in the Radius Configuration
panel at the top of the page.
This enables the fields in the Server Configuration panel.
15-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
RADIUS Administration
3 Enter the RADIUS server’s shared secret in the Radius Secret field.
This string is basically a shared key by which the RADIUS server and its clients
recognize each other, and which they use for secure transmission of user passwords.
If you change the secret in the RADIUS server, you must also change it in any
of the RADIUS clients (Extreme switches) that use the RADIUS server for user
authentication.
4 The default port used for the RADIUS server is 1645. To change the server port, enter
the port number in the RADIUS Port field.
If you change the RADIUS server port, you must make sure that the ports used
in any RADIUS clients (Extreme switches that use this RADIUS server for user
authentication) match the port you enter for the server.
To enable EPICenter as a RADIUS client, do the following:
1 Click the RADIUS Administration tab at the top of the page.
2 Click the Enable EPICenter as a RADIUS Client button at the top of the page.
This enables the fields in the Client Configuration panel.
3 Fill in the fields (server name or IP address, port, and shared secret) for the primary and
secondary RADIUS servers as appropriate.
It is recommended, but not required, that both a primary and a secondary RADIUS
server be available for authentication.
4 Click Apply to have the configuration changes take effect.
5 To enable or disable the RADIUS server, click the appropriate button.
Enabling the RADIUS server means that Extreme switches can act as RADIUS clients,
authenticating users against the RADIUS server’s database of users, as administered
through the EPICenter. Thus, even if a user accesses the switch directly through Telnet or a
browser, the RADIUS server will provide the authentication service.
Disabling the RADIUS server means that it will not be available for authenticating users.
In this case, each Extreme switch must maintain its own list of users and access
permissions, and users will need to remember a (possibly different) login and password
for every switch.
If you have enabled the EPICenter RADIUS server, authentication activity is logged to the
file radius_log.txt, found in the EPICenter root install directory.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-11
Administering EPICenter
Server Properties Administration
If you have Administrator access, you can modify the values of a number of properties that
affect the function and performance of the EPICenter server.
1 Click the Server Properties tab at the top of the page.
The Server Properties Configuration page appears, as shown in Figure 15-6.
Figure 15-6: Server Properties Configuration page, initial properties list
2 Select a set of properties from the drop-down menu field at the top of the central panel.
You can select among five sets of properties:
— Devices
— Scalability
15-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Server Properties Administration
— SNMP
— Topology
— Other
The Server Properties Configuration page displays the properties in that set.
3 Type a new value into the field for the property you want to change, or click a
check-box to turn on or off an option. The specific properties and their meanings are
discussed in the following sections.
4 Click the Apply button to cause your changes to take effect.
You can undo your changes in one of two ways:
— Click the Reset button to restore the values that the displayed properties held when
you first entered this page.
— Click the Reset to Defaults button to restore the values to the EPICenter server
default values (the values in effect immediately after installation).
5 For some changes, you will need to restart the EPICenter server for the changes to take
effect. A pop-up dialog will let you know that this is necessary.
Click OK to dismiss the dialog box, and then shut down and restart the EPICenter
server.
See Chapter 2, “Starting ExtremeWare EPICenter” for information on how to shut
down and restart the EPICenter server.
Devices Properties
When you select Devices from the drop-down menu field at the top of the properties panel,
you can set the following properties:
•
Telnet Login Timeout Period: Length of time, in milliseconds, after which a
CLI/Telnet login request to a switch should time out. The default is 10000 milliseconds
(10 seconds), the range is 1 to 30 seconds (1000 to 30000 ms).
• Device HTTP Port: the port that the EPICenter server will use to communicate with an
Extreme switch’s web server to run ExtremeWare Vista. Default is port 80.
• Device Telnet Port: the port that the EPICenter server will use to telnet to a switch.
Default is port 23.
• Upload/Download Timeout Period (ms): Length of time, in milliseconds, after which a
configuration upload or download operation should time out. If some devices have a
large number of VLANs, the timeout may need to be increased to allow an upload or
download operation to complete successfully without timing out.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-13
Administering EPICenter
• Poll Devices Using Telnet (checkbox): This enables or disables regular CLI/Telnet
polling of ExtremeWare 4.1 devices. It disables ESRP polling as well as EDP polling. The
default is enabled.
• Save Switch Password for Vista Login (checkbox): Enables ExtremeView to save the
switch password in the EPICenter database when you log into a switch using
ExtremeWare Vista. If you disable this property, you will be required to login to each
switch in order to view Configuration and Statistics information in the ExtremeView
applet. The default is enabled (passwords will be saved).
Scalability Properties
Select Scalability from the drop-down menu field at the top of the properties panel to set
the EPICenter server into Scalable mode (or reset it into regular mode).
• Scalable Mode (checkbox): A check in the box indicates that Scalability mode is turned
on. When the box is blank, the EPICenter server is in regular mode. Click the checkbox
to add or remove the check. The default is regular mode.
You must restart the EPICenter server after changing from regular to Scalable Mode or
back to regular mode. When you click Apply after changing this setting, a pop-up
confirmation dialog will warn you that you must restart the server.
Scalable Mode allows the EPICenter server to manage up to approximately 2000 devices.
However, not all applets are available in this mode. In particular, the following applets are
NOT available in Scalable Mode:
• ExtremeView
• Real-Time Statistics
• Topology
• VLAN Manager
• ESRP Manager
• Policy Manager (an optional module)
SNMP Properties
When you select SNMP from the drop-down menu field at the top of the properties panel,
you can set the following properties:
• Poll Interval: the interval, in seconds, between SNMP polls of a switch to fetch basic
device status information. The default is 300 seconds (five minutes). The range is 5 to
15-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Server Properties Administration
3600 seconds (one hour). You can disable all SNMP polling by setting this property to
zero.
Note that this Poll Interval is different from the Device Polling Interval you can
set through the Inventory Manager. The Device Polling Interval controls the
frequency of polling for detailed device information such as software version,
bootrom version, and so on. The polling interval set in the Administration applet controls
only the basic SNMP status information necessary to ensure SNMP reachability, and is
typically performed relatively frequently.
• Timeout Period: The length of time to wait for an SNMP poll request to complete, in
seconds, before timing out. The default is 2 seconds. The range is 1 to 10 seconds.
This setting determines the time-out interval only for the first unsuccessful SNMP
request; once a request times out, subsequent requests will time out more slowly, based
on an exponential time-out back-off algorithm, until it reaches the maximum number of
retries.
• Number of Retries: the number of SNMP requests that should be attempted before
giving up, for a request that has timed out.
• EPICenter Trap Receiver Port: the port on which EPICenter expects to receive traps.
Default is port 10550.
Topology Properties
Select Topology from the drop-down menu field at the top of the properties panel to set
properties that affect the collection and display of RMON statistics in the Topology applet.
• Enable RMON Display (checkbox): This enables the collection of RMON statistics in
the Topology applet. The default is enabled, which means that RMON statistics will be
collected for all devices that have RMON enabled in the device.
• Default Map RMON Statistics (checkbox): This specifies the default state of the
RMON statistics display checkbox in the Topology Map Properties pop-up. If this is
checked, then the RMON Statistics option in the Map Properties window will be
enabled by default, meaning that RMON statistics will be displayed on the links in the
map. To disable the RMON statistics display for a map, you must disable the option in
the Map Properties pop-up for that map. The default is that the option is disabled.
Other Properties
When you select Other from the drop-down menu field at the top of the properties panel,
you can set the following properties:
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
15-15
Administering EPICenter
• DNS Lookup Timeout Period: The time-out period, in milliseconds, when performing
DNS lookup operations for hosts found through DLCS or when importing (in the
Grouping applet) from an NT Domain Controller. The default is 1000 milliseconds (one
second).
• Session Timeout Period: The non-activity time-out period, in milliseconds, after which
the user is required to re-login to the EPICenter server. The default is 600,000
milliseconds (ten minutes). You can disable the time-out by setting the property to -1.
• ServiceWatch URL: The URL for accessing ExtremeWare ServiceWatch, to allow it to be
launched from the EPICenter navigation toolbar, and to run in the main EPICenter
applet window.
For example, if ServiceWatch is running on a system named “tampico” at port 2000, you
would enter http://tampico:2000 as the ServiceWatch URL. You must then restart
the EPICenter server to activate the ServiceWatch integration.
• IP QoS Rule Precedence: The starting value that the EPICenter server will use for
setting precedence in the Policy Manager applet. This is an integer between 1 and
25,600. The default value is 10,000.
Setting this value lets you ensure that policies created by EPICenter will have higher
precedence than policies created through the ExtremeWare CLI. It is also useful in
distinguishing between policies created through the CLI and those created through the
EPICenter Policy Manager applet.
15-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16 Dynamic Reports
This chapter describes how to use the ExtremeWare EPICenter Reports capability for:
• Viewing predefined Network Summary Reports from the Home EPICenter page
• Viewing predefined EPICenter status reports from the Dynamic Reports
• Creating new reports by writing Tcl scripts
Overview of EPICenter Reports
The EPICenter software provides several sets of HTML-based reports that provide
information about the devices managed by the EPICenter server. There are two types of
these reports:
• A Network Summary Report, available on the main EPICenter “Home” page,
displayed when you first log in through the EPICenter client.
• EPICenter Dynamic Reports, available separately from the main EPICenter client, or as
an applet accessed from the client.
The Network Summary Report provides summary statistics about the status of the devices
being managed by the EPICenter server. This report can also be accessed from the Dynamic
Reports Main page.
EPICenter Dynamic Reports are a separate feature from the main EPICenter user interface,
and can be accessed directly from the initial EPICenter Start-up page without logging in to
the Java client interface. The Reports module can also be accessed from the EPICenter
Navigation toolbar.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-1
Dynamic Reports
The EPICenter dynamic reports are HTML pages that do not require Java capability, and
thus can be accessed from browsers that do not have the ability to run the full EPICenter
user interface. This means reports can be loaded quickly, even over a dial-up connection,
and it also provides the ability to print the reports.
Network Summary Report
The Network Summary Report provides an at-a-glance summary of the status of the
devices the EPICenter server is monitoring. The main report page, as shown in Figure 16-1,
appears when you first log into the EPICenter client, and when you click the Home button
at the top of the Navigation Toolbar.
Figure 16-1: Network Summary Report page
16-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Network Summary Report
If there are statistics that indicate problems (such as devices not responding, or alarms
generated within the last twenty-four hours) the cell containing that statistic is displayed
in yellow.
To view a detail report for a particular summary statistic, click the number in the right
hand column of the summary display.
For example, you can click the value in the right-hand column of the Devices Managed by
the Server row to display a Device Reports summary listing, showing the device groups
currently configured in the EPICenter server.
From the Device Reports summary you can click one of the Device Group names to display
a Device Summary report similar to that shown in Figure 16-2.
Figure 16-2: Network Summary Detail report
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-3
Dynamic Reports
The only statistic in the Network Summary Report that does not provide its own detail
report is the Devices Up statistic.
This report illustrates a number of features that are common to all the Summary Detail
reports. In these reports, you can do the following:
• Click a column heading to sort on the contents of that column. For example, to sort by
IP address, click on the Device IP Address link at the top of the first column. When you
sort on a column, a small arrow in a box indicates whether the column is sorted in
ascending or descending order.
• Click a link at the bottom of the report page to view additional report information or
return to the main Network Summary Report.
Most of the Network Summary Reports provide additional detailed reports.
• To return to the main Network Summary Report from any of the detail reports, click the
Home button at the top of the Navigation Toolbar.
The following sections describe the reports available from the Network Summary Report.
Devices Managed by the Server
This report provides a summary status of all the devices known to the EPICenter server,
organized by device group. This is also known as the Device Inventory Report, and can be
accessed from the Device Inventory link on the main Reports pages, or from the Device
Inventory Reports link on the Devices Not Responding report. See “Device Inventory
Report” on page 16-13.
When you click the number in the right-hand column, a Device Reports summary is
displayed. This shows the following information:
• Group: Device group name
• Description: Description (optional) associated with the device group
• Devices: Number of devices that belong to this device group
Select a Device Group to display the Device Summary report for the devices in the group.
The Device Summary report displays the following information about each device:
• Group: EPICenter Device Group to which it belongs
• IP Address: IP address of the device
16-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Network Summary Report
Click the IP address to display a table with detailed configuration and status
information. This is the same information you can view in the Inventory applet.
• Name: Device name from the sysName variable
• Status: Device status (operational or not responding)
• Boot Time (GMT): Time when the device was last booted
• MAC: MAC address of the device
• S/w version: Software version currently running on the device, if known
• Serial Number: Device serial number
Click the heading of a column to sort on the contents of that column.
Click the link Back to Device Reports to return to the Device Reports summary to select a
different Device Group.
Devices Not Responding
This report provides a summary status of the devices known to the EPICenter server that
are currently not responding. It shows the following information for each device:
• Device IP Address: IP address of the device
• Device Name: Device name from the sysName variable
• Device Description: Device description from the sysDescr variable
• Device Location: Device location from the sysLocation variable
• Device Status: A red or yellow status “light”
Red indicates the device is not responding the EPICenter polls.
Yellow indicates the device is responding but is reporting a fan or power supply error.
Click the To Device Inventory Reports link at the bottom of the page to view Device
Inventory Reports. See “Device Inventory Report” on page 16-13 for more information.
Click the To Device Status Reports link at the bottom of the page to view Device Status
Reports. See “Device Status Report” on page 16-14 for more information.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-5
Dynamic Reports
Critical Alarms Defined
This report provides a summary of alarms defined as having a severity level of Critical or
Major. It shows the following information for each alarm:
• Alarm Name: Name of the alarm
• Category: Alarm category of which this alarm is a member
• Enabled: Whether the alarm is currently enabled or disabled
• Severity: Severity level of the alarm (Critical or Major)
See Chapter 5 for more information on alarm definitions, categories, and other alarm
topics.
Critical Alarms for Last 24 Hours
A summary of critical alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours. It shows the following
information.
• Alarm Name: Name of the alarm
• Category: Category that the alarm is classified under
• Source IP: IP address of the device that generated the alarm
• Time (GMT): Time the alarm occurred (Greenwich Mean Time)
• Event #: Event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received)
• Severity: Severity level of the alarm
You can view the complete Alarm Log report, showing all EPICenter alarms, from the
Reports module. See “Alarm Log Report” on page 16-17.
See Chapter 5 for more information on alarm definitions, categories, and other alarm
topics.
Unacknowledged Critical Alarms
A summary of critical alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours that have not been
acknowledged. It shows the following information.
• Alarm Name: Name of the alarm
16-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Network Summary Report
• Category: Category that the alarm is classified under
• Source IP: IP address of the device that generated the alarm
• Time (GMT): Time the alarm occurred (Greenwich Mean Time)
• Event #: Event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received)
• Severity: Severity level of the alarm
You can view the complete Alarm Log report, showing all EPICenter alarms, from the
Reports module. See “Alarm Log Report” on page 16-17.
See Chapter 5 for more information on alarm definitions, categories, and other alarm
topics.
SNMP Unreachable Alarms
A summary of SNMP Unreachable alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours. It shows
the following information.
• Alarm Name: the name of the alarm.
• Category: the category that the alarm is classified under.
• Source IP: the IP address of the device that generated the alarm.
• Time (GMT): the time the alarm occurred (Greenwich Mean Time).
• Event #: the event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received).
• Severity: the severity level of the alarm.
You can view the complete Alarm Log report, showing all EPICenter alarms, from the
Reports module. See “Alarm Log Report” on page 16-17.
See Chapter 5 for more information on alarm definitions, categories, and other alarm
topics.
Invalid Login Alarms
A summary of Invalid Login alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours. It shows the
following information.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-7
Dynamic Reports
• Alarm Name: Name of the alarm
• Category: Category that the alarm is classified under
• Source IP: IP address of the device that generated the alarm
• Time (GMT): Time the alarm occurred (Greenwich Mean Time)
• Event #: Event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received)
• Severity: Severity level of the alarm
You can view the complete Alarm Log report, showing all EPICenter alarms, from the
Reports module. See “Alarm Log Report” on page 16-17.
See Chapter 5 for more information on alarm definitions, categories, and other alarm
topics.
Authentication Failure Alarms
A summary of Authentication Failure alarms that have occurred in the last 24 hours. It
shows the following information.
• Alarm Name: Name of the alarm
• Category: Category that the alarm is classified under
• Source IP: IP address of the device that generated the alarm
• Time (GMT): Time the alarm occurred (Greenwich Mean Time)
• Event #: Event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received)
• Severity: Severity level of the alarm
You can view the complete Alarm Log report, showing all EPICenter alarms, from the
Reports module. See “Alarm Log Report” on page 16-17.
See Chapter 5 “The EPICenter Alarm System” for more information on alarm definitions,
categories, and other alarm topics.
16-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Dynamic Reports
VLANs Report
Summary information on all VLANs being managed by the EPICenter server. This report
is the same as the VLAN Summary Report you can access from the Reports module. See
“VLAN Summary Report” on page 16-15 for a description of this report.
Dynamic Reports
A number of predefined reports present information from the EPICenter software
database. The predefined reports include:
• Network Summary Report (described in the previous section)
• Server State Summary Report
• Device Inventory Report
• Device Status Report
• VLAN Summary Report
• Interface Report
• Resources by Attribute
• User to Host Mapping
• Alarm Log Report
• Event Log Report
• Configuration Management Log Report
The content for the first three reports (Device Inventory, Device Status, and VLAN
Summary) are generated by Tcl scripts. The remaining four reports (Device Interface,
Alarm Log, Event Log, and Configuration Management Log) are generated by Java-based
code.
The Java-based reports can be sorted, filtered, and paginated, but they cannot be
customized. The Tcl-based reports can be customized, and can serve as models for new
reports. You can create your own reports by writing Tcl scripts that generate HTML code.
See “Creating New Reports”on page 16-21 for details.
You can access the EPICenter software Dynamic Reporting capability in one of two ways:
• By clicking the Reports icon in the EPICenter software Navigation Toolbar
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-9
Dynamic Reports
• By logging in directly from the EPICenter Start-up page
To log in directly from the EPICenter software Start-up page, follow these steps:
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 Enter the following URL:
http://<host>:<port>/
In the URL, replace <host> with the name of the system where the ExtremeWare
EPICenter server is running. Replace <port> with the TCP port number that you
assigned to the ExtremeWare EPICenter Web Server during installation.
If you used the default web server port, 80, you do not need to include the port
number.
The EPICenter Start-up page appears.
3 Click View Reports in the left-hand panel of the Start-up page.
The ExtremeWare EPICenter Login page appears.
4 Enter your user name and password, and click Login. Use the same user name and
password as you use to log in to the EPICenter system.
The Dynamic Reports module is displayed. The main page includes a brief description
of the predefined reports that are available.
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
To view a predefined report, click the appropriate link in the left-hand navigation panel.
To go to the main ExtremeWare EPICenter user interface, click the “About EPICenter” link
at the top of the list. This displays the About ExtremeWare EPICenter page.
To exit from ExtremeWare EPICenter, click the Logout link in the left-hand panel. This
returns you to the ExtremeWare EPICenter Start-up page.
Report Filtering
Four of the reports provide a filtering capability that lets you select the information that
should appear in the report. This filtering capability lets you construct a two-part
16-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
conditional statement based on the values of relevant variables in the ExtremeWare
EPICenter database.
The following reports provide filtering:
• Interface Report
• Alarm Log
• Event Log
• Config Mgmt Log
These reports provide a set of fields at the bottom of the report similar to the ones shown
in Figure 16-3.
Figure 16-3: Report filter specification
To create a filter, follow these steps:
1 In the first field, select the variable to use in the filter. The variables from which you can
choose are based on the column headings in the report, and depend on the type of
report you are viewing.
2 In the second field, select a comparison operator. You can choose from the following
comparison operators:
— > (greater than)
— < (less than)
— <= (greater than or equal)
— >= (less than or equal)
— != (not equal)
— = (equal)
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-11
Dynamic Reports
If the variable values are strings, then the comparisons are taken to indicate alphabetic
order, where greater than indicates later in later in the alphabet (for example, the letter
B is greater than A).
3 In the third field, select the value you want to compare the variable against. If the
variable takes a string as its value, enter a string. If the variable is numeric, enter an
integer.
You can use the browser Copy and Paste functions to copy a specific value from
the current report into the comparison field.
4 In the fourth field, you can indicate whether the second condition should be used. To
use a second condition to your filter, choose one of the logical operators And or Or.
Specify And to include a row in the report only if both conditions are true. Select Or to
include the row if either one (or both) of the conditions are true.
If you do not want to include a second condition, select NIL to indicate that the second
clause should be ignored.
5 Click Filter to generate the report based on the filter you have specified.
Click Remove Filter to remove the filter definition and generate an unfiltered report.
Server State Summary Report
The Server State Summary Report displays statistics about SNMP activity, database
activity, and the ports used by the EPICenter server. The report provides the following
information.
The first table in the report provides the number of operations that have occurred in the
last minute, the last hour, and the last day (24 hours) for the following operations:
• SNMP Queries: Number of SNMP queries performed by the EPICenter server
• Database Commits: Number of database commits performed by the EPICenter server
• Client Requests: Number of data requests to the EPICenter server performed by all
connected clients
• Trap Requests: Number of trap PDUs received by the EPICenter server
The second table in the report shows the ports currently in use by the EPICenter server.
• Web Server Port: Port currently used by the EPICenter web server.
• Trap Receiver Port: Port currently used by the EPICenter server to receive traps
16-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
• Radius Port: Port currently used by the RADIUS server
• Telnet Port: Port currently used for Telnet
• Database Port: Port currently used for EPICenter database communication
The Web Server, Trap Receiver, Radius and Telnet ports can be changed through the
Administration applet, if you have administrator-level access to EPICenter. See
Chapter 15, “Administering EPICenter,” for more information.
If you are running under Windows NT or WIndows 2000, you can use the Port
Configuration Utility, accessible from the Programs menu, to change the database port. See
Appendix B “EPICenter Utilities” for details on the utility.
There are no further detailed reports available from this report.
Device Inventory Report
To view a Device Inventory Report, click the Device Inventory link in the left-hand panel.
The Device Inventory Report displays basic status and identification information for the
devices known to ExtremeWare EPICenter. The initial display presents a summary at the
Device Group level. This includes the following information:
• Group: Device Group name
• Description: Description of the group as kept in the EPICenter device inventory
• Devices: Number of devices in the group
Select a Device Group to display the Device Summary report for the devices in the group.
The Device Summary report displays the following information about each device:
• Group: EPICenter Device group to which it belongs
• IP Address: IP address of the device
Click the IP address to display a table with detailed configuration and status
information. This is the same information you can view in the Inventory applet.
• Name: Device name from the sysName variable
• Status: Device status
• Boot Time (GMT): Time when the device was last booted
• MAC: MAC address of the device
• S/w version: Software version currently running on the device, if known
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-13
Dynamic Reports
• Serial Number: Device serial number
Click the heading of a column to sort on the contents of that column.
Device Status Report
To view a Device Status Report, click the Device Status link in the left-hand panel. This
displays the device status and failure log for all devices known to EPICenter.
The initial display presents a summary at the Device Group level. This includes the
following information:
• Group: Device Group name
• Description: Description of the group as kept in the EPICenter device inventory
• Alarms Defined: Total alarms for all devices in the device group
• Devices Up: Number of devices in the group that are up
• Devices Not Responding: Number of devices in the group that are not responding
Select a Device Group to display the Device Status Report for the devices in the group.
The Device Status report displays the following information:
• Device Name: Name of the device from the sysName variable
• IP: IP address of the device
• Status: A green, yellow, or red status “light”
Green indicates the device is up and OK.
Yellow indicates the device is responding but is reporting fan, temperature, or power
supply errors.
Red indicates that the device is unreachable.
• Last Failure (GMT): Time at which the most recent device failure occurred
• Down Period (d:h:m:s): Length of time the device was unreachable, reported in
days:hours:minutes:seconds
• Boot Time (GMT): Time when the device was last booted
• Alarms in last 24 hours: Number of alarms in the last 24 hours from this device
If the number of alarms is greater than zero, you can click on the number to display a
summary of the alarms that have occurred for this device.
16-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
If the number of alarms for a device is greater than zero, you can click the number to view
a summary of the alarm information for that device.
VLAN Summary Report
To view a VLAN Summary Report, click the VLAN Summary link in the left-hand panel.
This displays a report of the VLANs known to ExtremeWare EPICenter. The information
reported includes:
• VLAN Name: Name of the VLAN
• Tag: 802.1Q tag, if any
• Protocol: Protocol used to filter packets for this VLAN
• QoS Profile: QoS profile configured for this VLAN
• Device (DNS) List: IP addresses of devices with ports that are members of this VLAN
See Chapter 13 “Using the VLAN Manager” for more information on VLANs.
Interface Report
To view a device interface report, click the Interface Report link in the left-hand panel. This
displays a report on the status of every port known to ExtremeWare EPICenter. The
information reported for each interface includes:
• IP Address: IP address of the interface
• Port: Port number of the interface
• AdminStatus: Interface administrative status (enabled/disabled)
• OperStatus: Operational status of the interface (ready/active)
• Configured speed/type: Nominal (configured) speed of the interface
• Actual speed/type: Actual speed of the interface
Since the EPICenter server may be aware of many hundreds of ports, the interface
information is displayed in groups of 25 ports per page. You can navigate among the pages
using any of the following methods:
• Clicking the Previous and Next links
• Selecting a page number from the at the top of the report
• Clicking the First or Last links to display the first or last page in the report
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-15
Dynamic Reports
The list of ports is sorted initially by IP address. Click the heading of a column to sort the
report based on the contents of that column. For example, to sort by operational status,
click on the OperStatus heading.
You can filter the ports that are displayed by constructing a conditional filter using the
fields at the bottom of the page. This lets you construct a two-clause filter statement in the
form shown in Figure 16-4.
Figure 16-4: Device Ports filter specification
You can filter on any of the variables shown in the report.
Resource to Attribute Mapping Report
The Resource to Attribute Mapping Report displays a list of all the resources that include
the specified attribute. Click the Resource to Attribute Mapping link in the left-hand
panel to display the attribute selection field. Then select an attribute from the pull-down
list, as shown in Figure 16-5.
Figure 16-5: Attribute specification for Resource to Attribute Mapping report
16-16
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
The pull-down list shows a set of system-defined attributes used by the Policy Manager,
along with any attributes you’ve added to resources through the Grouping Manager.
The system-defined attributes (IP, UDP Any, TCP Any, TCP Permit-Established Any, IP
Any, and L4 Port) have static definitions and are used internally by the EPICenter Policy
Manager.
User-defined attributes are created within the Grouping Manager, either by adding them
to a resource through the user interface, or by importing them.
For the attribute you select in the pull-down menu, the report displays the following
information:
• Resource Type: Type of the resource (such as device, user, host, or group)
• Resource Name: Name of the resource that includes the selected attribute
• Attribute Value: Value of the attribute associated with the resource
User to Host Mapping Report
The User to Host Mapping Report displays a list of any user and host mappings that are
currently defined, along with the primary IP address of the host. User-host mappings can
be created in the Grouping Manager, and can also be created automatically if the Dynamic
Link Context System (DLCS) is enabled on your Extreme devices. Click the User to Host
Mapping link in the left-hand panel to display the attribute selection field.
The report displays the following information:
• User Name: User name
• Host Name: Name of the host mapped to the user
• Host IP Address: Primary IP address of the host
Alarm Log Report
To view an Alarm Log Report, click the Alarm Log link in the left-hand panel. This
displays a report of all the entries in the EPICenter Alarm Log. The information reported
includes:
• Time (GMT): time the alarm occurred (Greenwich Mean Time)
• Name: Name of the alarm
• Severity: Severity level of the alarm
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-17
Dynamic Reports
• Source: IP address of the device that generated the alarm
• Category: Category that the alarm is classified under
• Ack’d (acknowledged): Whether the alarm has been acknowledged (true or false)
• Event #: Event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received)
• Message: Message associated with the alarm
The alarm information is displayed in groups of 25 alarm events per page. You can
navigate among the pages using any of the following methods:
• Clicking the Previous and Next links.
• Selecting a page number from the at the top of the report.
• Clicking on the First or Last links to display the first or last page in the report.
The report is sorted initially by the Time that the alarm occurred. Click the heading of a
column to sort on the contents of that column.
You can filter the alarms that are displayed by constructing a conditional filter using the
fields at the bottom of the page. This lets you construct a two-clause filter statement in the
form shown in Figure 16-6.
Figure 16-6: Alarm Log filter specification
You can filter on any of the variables shown in the report.
For more details on the meaning of these variable, see the Chapter 5 “The EPICenter Alarm
System.”
16-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Viewing Predefined EPICenter Reports
Event Log Report
To view an Event Log Report, click the Event Log link in the left-hand panel. This displays
a report of all the entries in the EPICenter Event Log. The information reported includes:
• Event #: Event ID of the alarm (assigned by the EPICenter server when the alarm is
received)
• Time (GMT): Time the alarm occurred
• Source: IP address of the device that generated the alarm
• Type: Event type (for example, SNMP Trap)
• Varbinds: Variable data transmitted with a trap
The event information is displayed in groups of 25 events per page. You can navigate
among the pages using any of the following methods:
• Clicking the Previous and Next links
• Selecting a page number from the at the top of the report
• Clicking the First or Last links to display the first or last page in the report
Click the heading of a column to sort on the contents of that column.
You can filter the events that are displayed by constructing a conditional filter using the
fields at the bottom of the page, as shown in Figure 16-7. This lets you construct a
two-clause filter statement.
Figure 16-7: Event Log filter specification
You can filter on any of the variables shown in the report.
You can use the browser Copy and Paste functions to copy a specific value from the current
report into the comparison field. This is particularly useful if you want to filter on a specific
Varbinds value.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-19
Dynamic Reports
Configuration Management Log Report
To view a Configuration Management Log Report, click the Config Mgmt Log link in the
left-hand panel. This creates a report of all the entries in the Configuration Management
Log. The information displayed includes the following:
• Time(GMT): Time (Greenwich Mean Time) when the activity occurred.
• Device: IP Address of the device.
• Activity: Activity that occurred, such as uploading a configuration file, updating a
software image, and so on. The actual entries will be abbreviated in form similar to “Get
Cfg From Device” or “Put Cfg To Device.”
• Status: Status of the activity (Success or Failed).
• File: Name of the file involved in the upload or download.
• Descr: Description of the problem for a failed activity.
Click the heading of a column to sort on the contents of that column.
You can filter the management activity events that are displayed by constructing a
conditional filter using the fields at the bottom of the page, as shown in Figure 16-8. This
lets you construct a two-clause filter statement.
Figure 16-8: Configuration Management Log filter specification
You can filter on any of the variables in the report.
Printing EPICenter Reports
Unlike the other EPICenter applets, you can print EPICenter reports using your browser’s
print function. To print a report, place the cursor in the pane where the port is displayed,
16-20
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Creating New Reports
and use the browser’s Print button, or the Print command from the File menu, to initiate
the print.
Creating New Reports
The EPICenter software allows you to customize the existing EPICenter dynamic reports,
and to define new reports. Because the reports use HTML and Tcl, you can incorporate the
new or modified reports into the running EPICenter server without requiring a restart. In
addition, the EPICenter software includes features that aid in debugging user changes.
All the files needed to create or modify reports can be found in the directory
<epicenter_install_dir>/user/reports, where <epicenter_install_dir> is the
directory where the EPICenter software resides (by default epc3_1 in the Windows
operating environment, or /opt/epc3_1 on a Solaris system). There are two subdirectories
under the reports directory:
• The html directory contains the HTML files displayed by the EPICenter server. The
HTML files in the reports directory have the following functions:
— index.html sets up the various frames for the browser display. It references
menu.html to define the menu on the left-hand side, and body.html for the content
in the main panel of the window.
— menu.html defines the menu items for the predefined reports, and includes links to
the html files that generate the reports. This is a generated file.
— body.html defines the content that appears in the main panel of the window when
the Reports feature is requested, either from the EPICenter software Start-up
window, or from the icon on the Navigation Toolbar. Modify this file if you want to
change or add to the list of Reports and their descriptions.
— color1.html defines the color of the bar at the top of the main content window.
— epistylesheet.css contains the style definitions used in the menu and main body
frames.
— reportstylesheet.css contains the style definitions used in the reports
themselves. To change the look of all reports, you can modify this stylesheet.
— The remaining files, such as device_summary.html, and vlan_summary.html,
define a number of the actual reports available from the Reports module.
Note that some of the reports (the Interface Report and the four Log reports) are not
user-modifiable, and are not included in the HTML directory.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-21
Dynamic Reports
• The tcl directory contains the following:
— The Tcl methods available for creating new reports
— The source code for the existing reports
The information presented in the remainder of this chapter assumes you have a reasonably
thorough understanding of both HTML and Tcl scripting.
Creating or Modifying a Report
You can modify an EPICenter report HTML file in any HTML editor, such as Microsoft
FrontPage.
You can modify the existing HTML files to change the look and feel of the report, your
icons, etc. The device_summary.html file is a good example.
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//IETF//DTD HTML//EN">
<html>
<head>
<meta http-equiv="Content-Type"
content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
<meta name="GENERATOR" content="Microsoft FrontPage 2.0">
<title>Simple Report</title>
<LINK REL=STYLESHEET HREF="reportstylesheet.css" TYPE="text/css">
</head>
<BODY bgcolor="#ffffff" marginwidth="20" marginheight="0" leftmargin="20"
topmargin="0">
<TABLE border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" height="120px">
<TR valign="bottom"><TD>
<H2>Device Reports</H2>
</TD></TR>
<TR valign="top"><TD>
Reports are available for the following devices in EPICenter.<br>
Report generated on <extr>clock format [clock seconds]</extr></TD></TR>
<TR valign="bottom"><TD><P><img src="images/green.gif" width=650px
height=3px></P>
</TD></TR>
</TABLE>
16-22
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Creating New Reports
<BR>
<!-- xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx -->
<p><font size="3"><extr>ShowDeviceSummaryList</extr></font></p>
<p><font size="3"></font>&nbsp;</p>
<p><font size="3"></font>&nbsp;</p>
</body>
</html>
The device_summary.html file is just like a standard HTML file with one exception: it has
a new pair of tags, <extr> ... </extr> which are specific to the EPICenter report server.
The EPICenter report server treats everything defined between these tags as Tcl code. The
report server executes this code dynamically when it generates the report (upon a user
request through the browser).
You can use any standard Tcl constructs between these tags, and you can also use methods
defined in the “extr” package ( extr.tcl). extr.tcl defines a set of methods to obtain
information from the EPICenter software database. Appendix C “EPICenter Database
Views,” defines a number of database views that contain information that may be useful in
creating reports.
In addition, you can define new methods in any Tcl file in the
<epicenter_install_dir>/user/reports/tcl directory, and use those methods inside
the HTML file within the <extr> and </extr> tags.
A number of reports have been defined for use as examples. Look at the various HTML
files to understand how <extr> tags are used within HTML files.
Look at the methods defined in the file user/reports/tcl/examples.tcl for details on
using these methods to generate the data that will become a part of the generated report.
Some utility methods have been provided in commands.tcl to help parse the result that
comes back from the EPICenter software API.
In general, the Tcl methods defined here will generate well-formatted HTML. Everything
between the <extr> and </extr> tags is replaced by HTML code generated by the
embedded Tcl code. Using this method, you can generate lots of new reports quickly, and
without disrupting the EPICenter software server.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-23
Dynamic Reports
Adding a User-Defined Report to the Reports Menu
To add a new user-defined report to the report menu, simply place the HTML file into the
<epicenter_install_dir>/user/reports/html/userdefined directory. The EPICenter
server automatically creates a link on the Reports menu for files in the userdefined
directory. It will use the report file names as the report names. They will appear below the
heading User Defined Reports at the bottom of the left-hand panel of the Reports page.
The file names must conform to two restrictions:
• They must use .html as the extension. .htm is not supported.
• The file name may not contain spaces.
If you want to create a set of hierarchical reports, you can create a subdirectory under the
userdefined directory to contain subordinate HTML files that should not have a direct link
from the Reports menu.
If you put files into the userdefined directory that were originally in the
<epicenter_install_dir>/user/reports/html directory, be sure you also copy
the report stylesheet (reportstylesheet.css) into the userdefined directory.
Debugging
The EPICenter software provides a mechanism that you can use to debug any Tcl
procedures you write.
Debugging is done in the Tcl shell that is shipped with the EPICenter software. You do not
need to view your reports through a browser to debug them.
To debug Tcl code you have created or modified, follow these steps:
1 Run <epicenter_install_dir>/tcl/bin/tclsh83d.exe to invoke the Tcl shell.
2 Change to the <epicenter_install_dir>/user/reports/tcl directory.
3 Execute the command source extrdebug.tcl within the Tcl shell.
This sets up the Tcl packages required, and also establish a connection with the
database using the EPICenter software external API.
4 Now, run the command extr::ExecuteExtrCommand which parses your Tcl code and
displays the resulting HTML file.
ExecuteExtrCommand takes the following arguments:
— The name of the HTML file that will generate the report.
16-24
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Creating New Reports
— A string containing the parameter that should that should be available to the HTML
file. The values for the parameters can be obtained in the various Tcl methods using
extr::GetSessionParam
You must ensure that the appropriate environment variables are set to allow access to Tcl.
These should be set as follows:
For Windows NT, set variables as follows:
TCL-LIBRARY=<epicenter_install_dir>/tcl/lib/tcl8.3
PATH=$PATH:<epicenter_install_dir>/tcl/bin
For Solaris, set the LD_LIBRARY_PATH variable as follows:
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=<epicenter_install_dir>/tcl/lib/tcl8.3
Useful Methods for Debugging
The GetfromDB, ExecuteExtrCommand and GetSessionParam methods are defined as
follows:
#####################################################################
# extr::GetFromDB
#
Used to make any SQL query to the database through the
#
Epicenter server. The result is a SQL result table,
#
formatted within HTML tags.
#
# Arguments
#
A string representing an SQL query.
#
# Returns
#
The result table of an SQL query embedded in HTML tags.
#
#####################################################################
#####################################################################
# extr::ExecuteExtrCommand
#
This is the public method typically used during debugging.
#
When a user wants to run an HTML file through the reporting
#
engine, to generate dynamic html, s/he calls this method.
#
Users will need to use this method only during debugging.
#
# Arguments
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
16-25
Dynamic Reports
#
filePath
This is the fully specified path of where to
#
find the HTML file that has embedded <extr> tags.
#
params
A string containing params and their values that
#
should be available to the procedures in the HTML files.
#
The parameters are specified as in HTML. i.e. the param
#
is a string of type "param1=value1&param2=value2"
#
# Returns
#
The result of executing the command. Typically this is parsed HTML.
#
#####################################################################
#####################################################################
# extr::getSessionParam
#
Used in reports to get the value of a specific parameter
#
that was passed into the reporting system.
#
This method, along with GetFromDB form the two most
#
commonly used routines by users of the reporting system.
#
The params passed into ExecuteExtrCommand are available
#
through this method.
#
# Arguments
#
param
A param name. This should be one of the params
#
that was passed into ExecuteExtrCommand.
# Returns
#
The value of the parameter. Returns "" if param was not defined.
#
#####################################################################
16-26
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A
Troubleshooting
This appendix describes how to:
• Resolve problems you may encounter that are related to the EPICenter server
• Resolve problems you may encounter while using the EPICenter client application
Troubleshooting Aids
If you are having problems with EPICenter, there are several things you can do to help
prevent or diagnose problems.
Enable the Java Console
To facilitate problem diagnosis, you can attempt to duplicate the problem with the Java
Console enabled. To enable the Java Console, do the following:
1 From the Windows Start menu, select Programs, then Java Plug-in Control Panel and
launch the Control Panel.
Under Solaris, run ControlPanel, which resides in the netscape/j2pi directory.
2 On the Basic page, click the Show Java Console check box.
3 Click Apply.
The next time you launch the EPICenter client, the Java Console will start automatically.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-1
Running with the Java Console displayed may affect the performance of the
EPICenter client.
There is limited space for Java Console messages; once the console log file is filled, no more
messages will be recorded. If you are trying to duplicate a problem, clear the Java Console
log file periodically by clicking the Clear button at the bottom of the window.
You can close the Java Console by clicking the Close button at the bottom of the window.
However, once it is closed, it can only be restarted by closing and restarting the browser.
Restart the Browser and Clear Browser Cache
If you have experienced problems with an EPICenter applet, restarting the browser is
recommended to ensure that conditions are re-initialized. In addition, it is a good idea to
clear the browser’s cache.
EPICenter Client Initialization
Problem: Browser is unable to connect to the EPICenter server.
Verify that the EPICenter Server process is running.
Verify that the server is running on the specified port. You can use the Port Configuration
utility to determine the port on which the EPICenter server is running.
To run the Port Configuration utility, run the program from the Windows Start menu:
Select Programs, then EPICenter 3.1, then Port Configuration.
For more information on this utility, see Appendix B, “EPICenter Utilities.”
Problem: Browser does not bring up the Login page.
Verify the version of the browser you are using. See the system requirements in Chapter 1
or see the ExtremeWare EPICenter SE Release Note and Quick Start Guide shipped with the
software.
A-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
EPICenter Client Initialization
Problem: Client software loads and allows login, but data is missing or other
problems arise.
Clear your browser’s cache, exit the browser, and restart it. This frequently clears up
miscellaneous start-up problems in the client.
In Internet Explorer, clear cache by selecting Internet Options under the Tools Menu, then
clicking Delete Files under the Temporary Internet Files section of the General tab.
In Netscape, clear cache by selecting Preferences under the Edit menu, then click on
Advanced, and select Cache. Click each of the separate buttons for clearing memory cache
and disk cache.
Problem: After running for a while, the display disappears in some applets.
Under some conditions the Java Plug-in can run out of memory. If you are running with
the Java Console enabled, you may see “Out of Memory” errors recorded in the console log
file. To alleviate this problem, you can grant the plug-in more memory through the Java
Plug-in Control Panel.
1 From the Windows Start menu, run the Java Plug-in Control Panel.
Under Solaris, run ControlPanel, which resides in the netscape/j2pi directory.
The Plug-in Control Panel should appear with the Basic page displayed.
2 In the Java RunTime Parameters field, enter the following without any embedded
spaces:
-Xmxnnnm
nnn is the maximum number of megabytes of virtual memory available to the plug-in.
For example, entering -Xmx128m allows the plug-in to use up to 128 MBytes of virtual
memory, and should prevent out-of-memory problem.
For Solaris, due to a bug in the Control Panel, you must enter the command
without the initial X, and with a space between the small x and the memory
specification, as follows:
-mx nnnm
Note that Sun could fix this problem at any time. Check with Sun Microsystems
or look at the Extreme Networks web site to determine whether the problem has
been fixed.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-3
Problem: Colors in client interface are incorrect (Windows NT or Windows 2000).
The Color Palette must be set for 65536 colors (or True Color). If your display is set for only
256 colors, the colors in the left-hand panel (the Navigation Toolbar) and the EPICenter
applets themselves may be incorrect.
To change the color palette, double-click the Display icon in the Control Panel, select the
Settings tab, and use the drop-down list in the Color Palette field to select the appropriate
setting.
Problem: No prompt is given for the plug-in upgrade when a Netscape client is
started, and the plug-in is not installed.
When starting a Netscape 4.76 client for the first time, the upgrade prompt may not appear
even though the Java 1.3.1 Plug-in is not installed. As a result, an error message will be
displayed in the panel where the Navigation Toolbar icons should appear.
This may occur if the environment variable NPX_PLUGIN_PATH is set, even if it points to a
previous version of the plug-in. You can unset the variable, restart the browser, and the
prompt will appear. You can also download the plug-in by returning to the EPICenter
start-up page and selecting Get Java PlugIn.
EPICenter Server Issues
Problem: Cannot talk to a specific switch.
Verify that the switch is running ExtremeWare software version 2.0 or later.
Ping the switch's IP address to verify availability of a route. Use the ping command from
a MS DOS or Solaris command shell.
Verify that the read and write community strings used in the EPICenter match those
configured on the switch.
Problem: ExtremeWare CLI or ExtremeWare Vista changes are not reflected in
EPICenter.
Verify that the switch is running ExtremeWare software version 2.0 or later.
A-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
EPICenter Server Issues
From the Inventory Manager, click Sync to update the information from the switch. This
refreshes the switch specific data, validates the SmartTrap rules, and ensures that the
EPICenter server is added as a trap receiver (Extreme switches only).
If the problem persists, verify that the EPICenter workstation has been added in the list of
trap destinations on the given switch:
1 Telnet to the switch.
2 Log in to the switch.
3 Type show management to verify that the system running the EPICenter is a trap
receiver.
An Extreme switch can support a maximum of 6 trap destinations in ExtremeWare 2.0, and
up to 16 trap destinations with ExtremeWare 4.1 or greater. If EPICenter is not specified as
a trap destination, then no SmartTraps are sent, and the data is not refreshed. If you need
to remove a trap receiver, use the command:
config snmp delete trapreceiver <ipaddress>
For details, see the ExtremeWare Software User Guide.
Problem: Need to change polling interval, SNMP request time-out, or number of
SNMP request retries.
You can change the default values for the SNMP polling interval, the SNMP request
time-out, or the number of SNMP request retries, through the Administration applet,
Server Properties page. You must stop and restart the EPICenter server to have your
changes take effect.
See Chapter 15 for information on the EPICenter Administration applet. See Chapter 3 for
instructions on stopping and starting the EPICenter server.
Problem: Need to change the Telnet or HTTP port numbers used to communicate
with managed devices.
You can change the port numbers for all managed switches through the Administration
applet, Server Properties page. You must stop and restart the EPICenter server to have
your changes take effect.
See Chapter 15 for information on the EPICenter Administration applet. See Chapter 3 for
instructions on stopping and starting the EPICenter server.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-5
Problem: Telnet polling messages can fill up a device’s syslog file.
For switches running older versions of ExtremeWare (prior to 6.0), the EPICenter server
uses telnet polling to get EDP topology and ESRP information. However, each telnet
login and logout message is logged to the switch’s log file, and will eventually fill up
the log.
You can disable EDP and ESRP logging through the EPICenter Administration applet,
Server Properties page. This will also avoid the syslog messages.
See Chapter 15 for information on the EPICenter Administration applet. See Chapter 3
for instructions on stopping and starting the EPICenter server.
Problem: Traps may be dropped during a trap “storm.”
The EPICenter server limits its processing of traps in order to be able to reliably handle trap
storms from a single or multiple devices. EPICenter limits its trap processing to 21 traps
every 28 seconds from an individual device, and a total of 275 traps every 55 seconds
system-wide. Any traps that occur beyond these limits will be discarded, but will be noted
in the log.txt file.
This situation is rare and should be considered abnormal behavior in the managed devices.
If it does occur, the managed devices should be diagnosed and corrected.
VLAN Manager
Problem: Multiple VLANs have the same name.
A VLAN is defined by the name, its tag value, and its protocol filter definition. EPICenter
allows multiple VLANs of the same name if one of the defining characteristics of one
VLAN is different from the other.
Problem: Multiple protocols have the same name.
EPICenter allows multiple protocols of the same name if one of the defining characteristics
of one protocol is different from the other.
A-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Alarm System
Problem: Created a new protocol in VLAN Manager, but the protocol does not appear
on any switch.
When a new protocol is created, it is stored in the EPICenter database. EPICenter only
creates the protocol on a switch when the new protocol is used by a VLAN on that switch.
Problem: Can only access one of the IP addresses on a VLAN configured with IP
multinetting.
EPICenter does not currently support IP multinetting.
Problem: Configuration fails when attempting to configure a VLAN with a modified
protocol definition.
EPICenter does not have a mechanism to modify protocols. When a VLAN is configured
through EPICenter to use a protocol that does not exist on the switch, the protocol is first
created on the switch. However, if a protocol with the same name but a different definition
already exists on the switch, the operation will fail.
Problem: An untagged port has disappeared from its VLAN.
Check to see if the port has been added as an untagged port to a different VLAN. In
EPICenter, adding an untagged port to a VLAN automatically removes the port from its
previous VLAN if the port was an untagged port, and the new and old VLANs used the
same protocol. This is different behavior from the ExtremeWare CLI, where you must first
delete the port from the old VLAN before you can add it to the new VLAN.
Alarm System
Problem: Device is in a fault state that should generate a trap, and an alarm is
defined to detect it, but the alarm does not appear in the EPICenter Alarm Log.
There are several possible reasons this can occur. Check the following:
• Make sure that the alarm is enabled.
• Check that the device is in your alarm scope.
• Check that SNMP traps are enabled on the device.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-7
• For a non-Extreme device, make sure you have set EPICenter as a trap receiver on the
device (see Chapter 8).
• For an RMON alarm, make sure you have RMON enabled on the device.
Problem: The “Email to:” field is greyed-out in the Actions tab of the New Alarm
Definition dialog
You need to specify an e-mail server in order to send e-mail. Click the Settings... button
next to the Email to field to set up your mail server.
Problem: An RMON rule is defined to monitor a counter variable, and to cause an
alarm when the counter exceeds a certain value. The counter has exceeded the
threshold value but no alarm has occurred.
There are several things to check:
• Make sure the RMON rule and the alarm definition are set up correctly
• If the value of the counter was already above the threshold value when you set up the
RMON rule, and you have the Sample Type set to Absolute, no alarm will ever be
generated. This because the value must fall below the Falling Threshold value before
the before another Rising Threshold trap will be sent, and this will never occur. You
should consider using the Delta Sample Type instead.
Problem: When creating an RMON rule in the RMON Rule Configuration window,
the MIB variable I want to use is missing from the list of variables displayed when I
click “Lookup...”
The MIB Variable list displays only the MIBs shipped with the EPICenter software. In
addition, within those MIBs the variable list will not display variables that are indexed by
an index other than (or in addition to) ifIndex. You can still use variables that do not appear
in the Lookup... list, but you must type the complete OID into the MIB Variable field, in
numeric notation. If the variable is a table variable, you will need to append the specific
index and apply the variable to each target device, one at a time.
Problem: A program specified as an action for an alarm (in the Run Program field)
does not get executed. It includes output to the desktop among its functions.
If you are running the EPICenter server as a service, you must specifically tell it to allow
output to the desktop. To do this you must stop and restart the EPICenter server, as
follows:
A-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
ESRP Manager
1 In the Services properties window, select EPICenter 3.1 Server and click Stop. (To find
the Services window, from the Start menu select Settings, then Control Panel, the
double-click the Services icon).
2 When the EPICenter 3.1 Server service has be stopped, select it again and the click the
Startup.... This displays a pop-up window where you can specify start-up options.
3 In the lower part of the window, in the Log On As: area, click the box labeled Allow
Service to Interact with Desktop. Then click OK.
After the EPICenter server restarts, the program you have specified as an alarm action
should execute correctly.
ESRP Manager
Problem: None of the member VLANs of an ESRP group are appearing in the ESRP
Manager applet.
Make sure that all members of the ESRP group use the same election algorithm. If there is
an election algorithm mismatch between any of the ESRP-enabled switches in any of the
ESRP-enabled VLANs in the ESRP group, this causes a misconfiguration scenario, and
ESRP will not function. As a result, none of the members of the ESRP group will appear in
the ESRP Manager applet.
Problem: Some of the switches in an ESRP-enabled VLAN are missing from the
ESRP Manager applet.
Make sure that the Hello Timer (ESRP Timer) is set to the same interval for all
ESRP-enabled switches. If there is a timer mismatch, ESRP will not function correctly, and
the ESRP Manager applet will not be able to detect ESRP switch neighbors that are not
being managed by the EPICenter software.
Inventory Manager
Problem: Discovery hangs if a large number of addresses is specified.
A very large discovery can cause the discovery process to hang because there is insufficient
memory available to the browser to process the number of addresses. This is a limitation of
the browser.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-9
To recover, restart the browser. Then split your discovery request into multiple requests
that involve a smaller number of addresses. Discovery displays a warning if your request
involves more than 1500 IP addresses. The actual number of addresses you can
successfully poll will depend on the amount of memory available at that time in your
browser (browser memory is shared among the various running applets).
Problem: Multiple switches have the same name.
This is because the sysName of those switches is the same. Typically, Extreme Networks
switches are shipped with the sysName set to the type of the switch “Summit48,”
“Summit1i,” “Alpine3808,” and so on, depending on the type of switch. You should
change these names to unique names using the ExtremeWare CLI or ExtremeWare Vista.
Problem: Discovery does not display MAC address for some devices in discovery
results list. In addition, may not add the device to inventory (primarily happens with
workstations).
If the MAC address is not found in the first instance of ifPhysAddress, it is not displayed
in the discovery results table. However, when the device is selected to be added to the
EPICenter inventory, the Inventory applet searches all the ifPhysAddress entries for the
device, and will use the MAC address found in this manner. If no MAC address is found
in any ifPhysAddress entry, the device will not be added to the EPICenter database.
Problem: Attempted to add a switch in the Inventory Manager after rebooting the
switch, and received an “SNMP not responding” error.
If a switch has recently been powered on, it may take some time (a number of minutes)
before the device is completely initialized. This will be especially true of chassis devices
with many blades, or devices with a large number of VLANs configured on the device. It
the device has not completed its initialization, the Inventory Add process may return an
error. You can simply wait until the device has finished initializing and try the Add
function again.
A-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
ExtremeView
ExtremeView
Problem: For a device selected under Status, the Device Information panel shows
incorrect information, and the device image is not displayed correctly.
This can be caused by a device IP address that is in conflict with another device on the
network (a duplicate IP address). Remove the problem device from the EPICenter
inventory, and add it in again with the correct IP address.
Problem: While looking at a device in ExtremeView, the device view was suddenly
replaced by the top-level ExtremeView page.
This will happen if another EPICenter user removes the device from the database while
you are viewing it. If you are running with the Java Console enabled you may see an error
message indicating the device has been removed (as long as your console log has not been
filled up).
Problem: When device information is not displayed completely (for example, only a
generic image is displayed) no messages explaining the problem seems to appear.
These types of messages for ExtremeView are displayed as error messages in the Java
Console error log. These messages are really informational errors, but must be displayed
as errors in order to appear under the normal Java Console settings. To see these messages,
you must be running the Java Console (see “Enable the Java Console” on page A-1). Also,
there must still be room left in the console log, as it stops displaying messages when it fills
up.
Problem: After initiating a switch reboot from the switch configuration page in
ExtremeView, the browser times out with an error.
You can initiate a switch reboot from the Switch configuration page in the ExtremeView
applet However, because the switch is rebooting, it does not respond to the browser’s
forms submission, and the browser will time out and report an error (Error: 504) instead of
refreshing the configuration page. Once the switch has successfully finished rebooting,
you can select it again in the Component Tree and the page will refresh correctly.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-11
Grouping Manager
Problem: Cannot import users from NT Domain Controller
The ExtremeWare EPICenter Server must be running with permissions that enable it to get
user information from a Domain Controller. To verify and change permissions for the Web
Server, do the following:
1 From the Start menu, highlight Settings, pull right, and click on the Control Panel. This
displays the Control Panel folder.
2 Double-click on Services to display the Services Properties window.
3 Highlight “EPICenter 3.1 Server” in the list of services, and click the Startup... button.
4 In the “Log On As:” section of the pop-up window, enter the account name and
password for a user who has the appropriate permissions to access the Domain
Controller.
5 Stop and restart the Web Server service to have the new user logon take effect.
Printing
Problem: When printing a topology map or a report, the browser can appear to freeze.
Printing a report or a topology map can cause the browser utilization to become very high
(approaching 100%) and can spool a very large amount of memory. There is no current
solution other than to wait, and the process will eventually finish.
Problem: After printing an HTML report, the Navigation Toolbar is not refreshed.
Although printing from the browser is not supported in most EPICenter applets, you can
print the HTML reports using the browser print button. However, you should first click in
the panel where the report is displayed to ensure that only that panel will be printed. If you
print without doing this, the Navigation Toolbar may not be refreshed. If this happens you
will need to refresh the browser manually.
A-12
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Topology
Topology
Problem: Created a new view with the Auto Populate option turned on. However, no
devices are placed on the map.
The Auto Populate option causes new devices to be added to your view, on the appropriate
map, when they are added to the EPICenter inventory database. Therefore, if you create a
new view after you have added devices to the inventory, any devices already in inventory
are not added to the map.
Note that if you updated from an earlier version of the EPICenter software (or
ExtremeWare Enterprise Manager 2.0 or 2.1) this means that none of devices that were
already in the old database are added to the map.
Problem: Links get “stuck” when nodes are dragged to new positions on the map.
Normally when you drag a node to a new position on the map, the link is repositioned to
run directly as a straight line between the nodes it connects. However, very infrequently
(due to a toolkit error) the links may get “stuck” at the node’s previous position, causing
the link to turn into a two-part angled line instead of a straight line. You can eliminate this
problem by closing and restarting your browser.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
A-13
B
EPICenter Utilities
This appendix describes several utilities and scripts shipped with the ExtremeWare
EPICenter software:
• The DevCLI utility, that can be used to add and delete devices from the EPICenter
database using the devcli command
• The Inventory Export scripts, that can be used to extract information from the
EPICenter inventory and output it to the console or to a file
• The SNMPCLI utility, that can be used to inspect the contents of device MIBs
• The Port Configuration utility, a Windows-only utility you can use to change the ports
used by the EPICenter server
The DevCLI Utility
The DevCLI utility allows you to add devices to and remove devices from an EPICenter
database using a command line statement, rather than through the EPICenter client user
interface. You can add devices individually or in groups, and can specify arguments such
as community strings and login and passwords for both the EPICenter server and the
devices. You can specify a list of devices in a file and have them added in a single
operation.
The DevCLI is useful for updating the EPICenter inventory database quickly when large
numbers of devices are added or removed, or if changes occur frequently. It can also be
useful when you want to duplicate the device inventory across multiple installations of the
EPICenter server.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
B-1
Using the DevCLI Commands
The utility is located in the root EPICenter install directory, by default \epc3_1 or
/opt/epc3_1 (in a UNIX environment).
The DevCLI utility supports the following two commands:
• devcli add <options> to add a device.
For example, to add device 10.205.0.99 to the EPICenter database on the local host,
using the default device user name and password, enter the following command at the
prompt:
devcli add -a 10.205.0.99
• devcli del <options> to remove a device.
For example, to remove the same device from the EPICenter database, enter the
command:
devcli del -a 10.205.0.99
These commands support a set of options for specifying device information such as
passwords and community strings, as well as information about the EPICenter server, such
as host name or IP address, port, and user name and password. You can also specify
multiple IP addresses in a file to have them added or removed as a group, as long as they
all use the same user name, password, and community strings.
Table B-1 specifies the options you can use with these commands:
Table B-1: DevCli command options
Option
Value
Default
-a
Device IP address. This option can be specified more than
once.
None
-c
Cisco enable password.
“”
-d
Device password.
“”
-f
Input file name. This specifies an ascii file that contains a
list of IP addresses, one per line. No other information can
be included in this file.
None
This option can be specified more than once.
-g
B-2
Device group to which devices should be added. Case
sensitive. The device group must already exist.
Default
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The DevCLI Utility
Table B-1: DevCli command options
Option
Value
Default
-l
(Letter l) User name to use for device login
admin
-n
EPICenter server port number
80
-p
EPICenter user password
“”
-r
Read community string (only needed for adding devices;
not needed for deleting them).
public
-s
EPICenter server hostname or IP address
localhost
-u
EPICenter user name
admin
-w
Write community string (only needed for adding devices;
not needed for deleting them).
“private”
Options such as the user login names and passwords and community strings, apply to all
devices specified in the command. You can specify multiple devices in one command as
long as they use the same options. If you have devices with different access parameters,
you must add or delete them in separate commands. The exception is when removing
devices, you don’t need to specify community strings, so you can remove multiple devices
in a single command even it their community strings are different.
Most options default to the values equivalent to those used by default on Extreme
Networks devices or in the EPICenter software.
You can specify only one EPICenter server (database) in a command. If you want to add
the same devices to multiple EPICenter databases, you must use a separate command for
each server. The command by default adds or removes devices from the EPICenter
database running on the local host at port 80.
DevCLI Examples
The following examples illustrate the usage of these commands.
• To add a device with IP address 10.205.0.99 to the EPICenter database running on
server snoopy on port 81, with EPICenter login “master” and password “king,” enter
the following command:
devcli add -a 10.205.0.99 -s snoopy -n 81 -u master -p king
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
B-3
• To add two devices (10.205.0.98 and 10.205.0.99) to the EPICenter database on the local
host, with read community string “read” and write community string “write,” enter the
following command:
devcli add -a 10.205.0.98 -a 10.205.0.99 -r read -w write
• To delete a set of devices specified in the file “devList.txt” with device login “admin2”
and password “purple,” enter the following command:
devcli del -f devList.txt -l admin2 -d purple
The file devList.txt must be a plain ASCII text file containing only IP addresses, such
as:
10.205.0.95
10.205.0.96
10.205.0.97
Inventory Export Scripts
There are three scripts you can run to export information about the devices or occupied
slots known to the EPICenter inventory. The scripts let you export information on devices
known to a single EPICenter installation, on slots known to a single EPICenter installation,
or on devices known to multiple EPICenter servers. The information will be output in
comma-separated (CSV) format suitable for importing into a spreadsheet.
• For a device report, the information reported includes the device name and type, IP
address, location, serial and board numbers. If you use the multi-server version of this
report, the name of the EPICenter server that manages the device will also be included.
• For a slot report, it includes the device name and IP Address, slot number, slot name
and slot type, and the serial number of the blade in the slot.
Using the Inventory Export Scripts
The three scripts are located in the EPICenter user\scripts\bin directory under the
EPICenter install directory (by default \epc3_1 under Windows, or /opt/epc3_1 under
Solaris). You must have the user\scripts\bin directory as your current directory in order
to run these scripts.
There are three inventory export scripts you can use:
• inv.bat <options> exports device information from the EPICenter database.
B-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Inventory Export Scripts
For example, to export device information to file devinfo.csv, enter the following
commands at the prompt:
cd epc3_1\user\scripts\bin
inv.bat -o devinfo.csv
• slots.bat <options> exports slot information from the EPICenter database.
For example, to run the command as user “user1,” and export slot information to file
slotinfo.csv, enter the command:
cd epc3_1\user\scripts\bin
slots.bat -u user1 -o slotinfo.csv
• msinv.bat <options> exports device information from the databases of multiple
EPICenter servers. You must provide a list of EPICenter servers in a file.
For example, the following command exports device information from the databases of
EPICenter servers listed in file servers.txt (in the scripts\config directory) to file
alldevinfo.csv, without prompting for a password:
cd epc3_1\user\scripts\bin
msinv.bat -d -o alldevinfo.csv -s ..\config\servers.txt
The server file defaults to the file servers.txt in the user\scripts\config directory.
You can edit this file to include the names or IP addresses of the servers where the
EPICenter server and databases are running. You can also provide your own file. The
format of the file entries are:
<servername or IP>:<port>
For example:
iceberg:80
10.2.3.4:81
Table B-2 specifies the options you can use with these commands:
Table B-2: Inventory script command options
Option
Value
Default
-d
None
If -p option not present, prompts
for password
If present, the command will use the default
EPICenter password (“”) and will not prompt
for a password.
-o
Name of file to receive output. If you don’t
specify a path, the file will be placed in the
current directory (user\scripts\bin).
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
output written to console (stdout)
B-5
Table B-2: Inventory script command options
Option
Value
Default
-p
EPICenter user password
“”
-u
EPICenter user name
admin
-s
For the msinv.bat command only: Name (and
path) of file containing EPICenter server list
<epc_install_dir>\user\scripts\
config\servers.txt
Inventory Export Examples
The following examples illustrate the usage of these commands.
• To export slot information to the file slotinventory.csv from the EPICenter database
whose login is “admin123” and password is “sesame” enter the following command:
slots.bat -u admin123 -p sesame -o slotinventory.csv
This will not prompt for a password, and will output the results to the specified file.
• To export device information to the console, after prompting for a password, enter the
following command:
inv.bat
This command will login with the default user name (admin), will prompt for the
password, and will output the results to the console.
• To export device information to the console, using the default login and default
password, enter the following command:
inv.bat -d -o output.csv
This command will login using the default user name (admin) and the default
password, and will output the results to the file output.csv in the user\scripts\bin
directory.
• To export device information from the EPICenter databases on the multiple servers,
edit the servers.txt file in the user\scripts\config directory, then enter the
following command:
msinv.bat -d -o devices.csv -s serverlist2.txt
This command logs in to each of the EPICenter servers specified in the file
serverlist2.txt, using the default login and password, and output the device
information from these servers to the file devices.csv. The devices.scv file is created in
the user\scripts\bin directory.
B-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The SNMPCLI Utility
The SNMPCLI Utility
The SNMPCLI utility provides three basic SNMP query capabilities, that can be used to
access the values of MIB objects kept by the SNMP agents of the devices you are managing.
Accessing these variable may be helpful in diagnosing problems with a device or its
configuration, if its behavior as seen through the EPICenter software is not as expected.
Use of this utility assumes you are familiar with SNMP MIBs, and can determine the OID
the variable you want to retrieve, as well as the meaning of the results that are returned.
Using the SNMPCLI Utility
The three scripts are located in the EPICenter user\scripts\bin directory under the
EPICenter install directory (by default \epc3_1 under Windows, or /opt/epc3_1 under
Solaris). You must have the user\scripts\bin directory as your current directory in order
to run these scripts.
The SNMPCLI utility supports the following three commands:
• snmpcli snmpget <options> returns the value of a specified OID.
For example, to get the value of the object (the variable
extremePrimaryPowerOperational in the Extreme Networks MIB) whose OID is
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.10.0 on the device at 10.205.0.99, enter the following
command:
snmpcli snmpget -a 10.205.0.99 -o .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.10.0
• snmpcli snmpnext <options> returns the value of the next OID (subsequent to the
OID you specify) in the MIB tree.
For example, you can use this command to get the value of the object whose OID is
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.10.0 on the device at 10.205.0.99, by entering the
following command:
snmpcli snmpnext -a 10.205.0.99 -o .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.10
• snmpcli snmpwalk <options> returns the value of the entries in a table.
For example, to get the value of the entries in the extremeFanStatusTable, which is
OID .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9 on the device at 10.205.0.99, enter the following
command:
snmpcli snmpget -a 10.205.0.99 -o .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
B-7
Table B-3 specifies the options you can use with these commands:
Table B-3: SnmpCli command options
Option
Value
Default
-a
Device IP address. This option can be specified more than
once. This option is required.
None
-o
Object Identifier (OID) of the MIB object whose value you
want to retrieve, or that is the starting point for the values
you want. This option is required.
None
-r
Read community string
public
-t
Timeout value for SNMP request, in milliseconds.
500 ms
SNMPCLI Examples
The following examples illustrate the usage of these commands.
• To retrieve the values of the extremePrimaryPowerOperational and
extremeRedundantPowerStatus variables for the Extreme Networks device with IP
address 10.205.0 99, with read community string “purple” and a timeout of 1000 ms,
enter the following command:
SnmpCli snmpget -a 10.205.0.99 -r purple -t 1000 -o
.1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.10.0 -o .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.11.0
This returns the following:
IP Address: 10.205.0.99
Read community string: purple
Timeout(ms): 1000
OUTPUT:
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.10.0 ;
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.11.0 ;
VALUE: 1
VALUE: 1
• To retrieve the values from the extremeFanStatusTable variables for the Extreme
Networks device with IP address 10.205.0.99, with the default read community string
(public) and a default timeout, enter the following command:
SnmpCli snmpwalk -a 10.205.0.99 -o .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9
This returns the following:
IP Address: 10.205.0.99
Read community string: public
B-8
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Port Configuration Utility
Timeout(ms): 500
OUTPUT:
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9.1.1.1
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9.1.1.2
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9.1.1.3
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9.1.2.1
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9.1.2.2
OID: .1.3.6.1.4.1.1916.1.1.1.9.1.2.3
;
;
;
;
;
;
VALUE:
VALUE:
VALUE:
VALUE:
VALUE:
VALUE:
1
2
3
2
2
2
Port Configuration Utility
The Port Configuration utility is a stand-alone utility that runs on the Windows NT 4.0 or
Windows 2000 platform.
The EPICenter Port Configuration utility provides a way for an EPICenter administrator to
change some of EPICenter’s logical TCP/IP port numbers, in the event that there are
conflicts between these port numbers and those used by other software products running
on the same system. Because these port conflicts may prevent EPICenter from running, the
port configuration capability needs to be accessible outside of EPICenter. The Port
Configuration application runs on the same system as the EPICenter Database Server and
Web Server.
You can run the utility from the Programs menu. You do not need to shut down the
ExtremeWare EPICenter services (Web Server or database) in order to change the port
configurations. However, the new configurations will not take effect until you restart the
affected server(s).
To run the Port Configuration utility, do the following:
1 Run the program from the Windows Start menu:
Select Programs, then EPICenter 3.1, then Port Configuration.
The EPICenter Port Configuration window appears, as shown in Figure B-1.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
B-9
Figure B-1: ExtremeWare EPICenter Port Configuration Utility
2 Type in new port values for the ports you want to change.
You can use the standard Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste functions from the Edit menu,
or use the keyboard shortcuts ([Ctrl]+X, [Ctrl]+C, and [Ctrl]+V) to move values among
the fields.
The Apply button is enabled when there is text in some edit field.
3 Click Apply to record the settings you have entered.
Click the Reset button for a specific port to reset that port to its default value. The Reset
button for a field is enabled when the corresponding values in the “Current port value”
field is something other than the default.
Click Done when you have finished making and applying changes. Any new text in the
edit fields, that has not been applied, is discarded.
The utility checks to see if it can open the requested new port number(s). If the new port
number is in use, the utility reports this fact and asks if you want to keep the new value
anyway.
4 To have the new port settings take effect, restart the server(s) whose ports you have
changed.
Changes do not take effect until the corresponding service is stopped and restarted.
However, after applying the new values, the entries under “Current port value” are
updated. This information can be misleading if you have not yet restarted the
corresponding services. In particular, if you dismiss and re-run the Port Configuration
B-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Port Configuration Utility
utility before you restart the affected services, the “Current port value” fields will
reflect the changed values which are not yet in effect.
If the servers are running as system services, you can restart your system, or stop and
restart the servers using the Services utility from the Windows Control Panel.
If the EPICenter servers are not running as NT system services, you must manually
stop and restart the servers.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
B-11
C
EPICenter Database Views
This appendix describes the most useful views in the EPICenter database for the purpose
of creating Tcl scripts for use in Reports or as Alarm actions.
The variables in these views can be accessed using the methods defined in the file
extr.tcl found in the <epicenter_install_dir>/user/reports/tcl directory, where
<epicenter_install_dir> is the directory where the EPICenter software resides. They
can also be used by external applications.
Device Report View
Table C-1: EPICenter Database Device Report View
Extreme_Device_Report
Extreme_Device_Report is a database view that has one row for each device that is being
managed by the EPICenter server. Some of the columns in the view contain Extreme specific
information. If a device is not an Extreme device, the Extreme specific columns contain empty
values, such as an empty string.
Column Name
Column
Type
device_id
integer
A database unique id identifying a device. (This
column can be used as the primary key.)
enterprise_oid
integer
The enterprise id, e.g. 1916 for extreme networks.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Description
C-1
Column Name
Column
Type
Description
system_oid
string
The partial system oid, e.g. “1916.2.7” for Summit 24.
device_group_name
string
The EPICenter device group name of the device group
in which this device belongs to.
ip
string
The IP address of the device, e.g. “10.205.0.1”.
mac
string
The MAC address of the device, e.g.
“00:e0:2b:00:5e:00”.
sysName
string
The sysName of the device.
sysDescription
string
The sysDescription of the device.
sysLocation
string
The sysLocation of the device.
sysContact
string
The sysContact of the device.
read_write_community
string
The read/write SNMP community string.
read_only_community
string
The read-only SNMP community string.
clilogin
string
The CLI/Telnet login name of the device.
clipassword
string
The CLI/Telnet password for the above login.
status
string
The status of the device: “operational”, “marginal”, or
“not responding”.
boot_time
string
The boot time of the device in GMT, e.g. “2000-11-13
21:05:28”.
hardware_id
string
The vendor specific hardware id of the device (not all
device have a hardware id).
reserved
string
Reserved field, only used by a Cisco device to store
Cisco specific information.
ip_forwarding
string
“true” if the device is a router, “false” otherwise.
current_software
string
The software version of the device.
the following columns are Extreme specific
primary_image
C-2
string
The primary software image version on the device, e.g.
“4.1.9 (2)”.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Device Report View
Column Name
Column
Type
secondary_image
string
The secondary software image version on the device,
e.g. “6.1.5b20”.
image_after_reboot
string
The image to use after a switch reboot: “primary”,
“secondary”, “neither”, or “unknown”.
board_number
string
The hardware board number.
other_numbers
string
Other hardware board numbers.
serial_numbers
string
The serial number of the device.
fan_status
string
The status of all fans on the device, e.g. “fan 1 OK; fan
2 OK; fan 3 OK”.
selected_configuration
string
The currently selected configuration on the device:
“primary” or “secondary”.
power_status
string
The status of the primary power supply of the device:
“fan/temperature alarm”, “not present”, “OK”, “failed”, or
“unknown”.
rps_status
string
The status of the redundant power supply of the device:
“fan/temperature alarm”, “not present”, “OK”, “failed”, or
“unknown”.
voltage
string
The voltage of the power supplied to the device: “110
AC”, “220 AC”, “48 DC”, or “unknown”.
temperature
integer
The current operating temperature of the device in
centigrade, e.g. 48.
default_gateway
string
The default gateway of the device, e.g. “10.205.0.1”.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Description
C-3
Interface Report View
Table C-2: EPICenter Database Interface Report View
Extreme_Interface_Report
Extreme_Interface_Report is a database view that has one row for each interface that is being
managed by the EPICenter server. Some of the columns in the view contain Extreme specific
information. For interface that is not on an Extreme device, the Extreme specific columns are
empty, such as an empty string.
Column Name
Column
Type
device_id
integer
A database unique id identifying a device. (This
column and the ifIndex column below can be used as
the primary key.)
ifIndex
integer
The ifIndex of the interface. (This column and the
device_id column above can be used as the primary
key.)
ifType
integer
The ifType of the interface.
ifPhysicalAddress
string
The ifPhysicalAddress (MAC address) of the interface.
ifDescription
string
The ifDescription of the interface.
conigured_media
string
The configured media information of the interface, e.g.
“100BaseTX, full duplex”.
actual_media
string
The actual media information of the interface, e.g.
“10BaseTX, half duplex”.
auto_negotiation
string
The status of auto negotiation of the interface: “true” or
“false”.
admin_status
string
The admin status of the interface: “enabled” or
“disabled”.
operation_status
string
The operational status of the interface: “active”,
“ready”, or “failed”.
Description
the following columns are Extreme specific
IP_Address
C-4
string
The IP address of the device, to which this interface
belongs to, e.g. “10.205.0.31”.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Database Event Log View
Column Name
Column
Type
port_number
string
The Extreme specific representation for the interface,
e.g. “1:3” or “12”.
redundant_media
string
Specify which media is active, for interfaces without
any redundant media, the value is always “primary”.
For interfaces with redundant media, the value can be
either “primary or redundant”.
algorithm
string
When the interface is in load-sharing mode, specify the
port sharing algorithm: “none”, “port based”, “address
based”, “round robin”, or “unknown”.
member_port_number
string
When the interface is in port sharing mode, specify all
members of the port sharing group, e.g. “1:1, 2:1, 2:2,
2:3”.
unsignedIPInt
integer
The IP address number of the device, to which the
interface belongs. This is the same IP address as in
the IP_Address column, except that the address is
represented using a unsigned 32-bit integer: e.g. the IP
Address “10.205.0.1” is represented as 181207041.
Description
Database Event Log View
Table C-3: EPICenter Database Event Log View
Event_Log_View
Event_Log_View is a database view that shows the EPICenter alarm event log, but making the
data from each column into a human readable format.
Column Name
Column
Type
event_log_id
integer
An unique id for the event log entry. (This column can
be used as the primary key.)
event_timeticks
integer
The time when the event happened. This time is
shown as milliseconds since 1970-01-01 00:00:00
GMT.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Description
C-5
Column Name
Column
Type
event_time
string
The time when the event happened. This is the same
time as the event_timeticks column except that the
time is shown as a string. E.g. “2000-10-21 14:20:21
GMT”
event_source
string
The IP (and the ifIndex, if appropriate) of the source,
from which the event is generated. E.g. “10.205.0.31”,
“10.205.0.31, port 2:1”, or “10.205.0.2, ifIndex 10”.
event_type
string
The type of the event, e.g. “SNMP Trap: Cold Start”
event_ip
string
The IP address of the source, from which the event is
generated. E.g. “10.205.0.31”
event_generic
integer
For SNMP trap based event, this is the generic field of
the trap.
event_specific
integer
For SNMP trap based event, this is the specific field of
the trap.
event_enterprise
string
For SNMP trap based event, this is the enterprise field
of the trap.
event_varbinds
string
For SNMP trap based event, this is the varbinds of the
trap.
unsignedIPInt
integer
The IP address number of the device, from which the
event originates. This is the same IP address as in the
event_ip column, except that the address is
represented using a unsigned 32-bit integer: e.g. the IP
Address “10.205.0.1” is represented as 181207041.
C-6
Description
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Database Alarm Log View
Database Alarm Log View
Table C-4: EPICenter Database Alarm Log View
Alarm_Log_View
Alarm_Log_View is a database view that shows the EPICenter alarm log, but making the data
from each column into a human readable format.
Column Name
Column
Type
alarm_time
integer
The time when the event happened. This time is
shown as milliseconds since 1970-01-01 00:00:00
GMT. This time is unique for all alarm logs. (This
column can be used as the primary key.)
alarm_name
string
The name of the alarm definition, to which this alarm
instance belongs.
alarm_category
string
The alarm category as defined in the alarm definition.
source
string
The IP (and the ifIndex, if appropriate) of the source,
from which the event that triggered the alarm is
generated. E.g. “10.205.0.31”, “10.205.0.31, port 2:1”,
or “10.205.0.2, ifIndex 10”.
severity
string
The severity of the alarm as defined in the alarm
definition.
msg
string
The alarm message as defined in the alarm definition.
acked
byte
A byte value in hexadecimal representation specifying
whether the alarm is ack’ed or not, 00 – not ack’ed; 01
– ack’ed.
event_log_id
integer
The event log id of the event that triggers the alarm.
unsignedIPInt
integer
The IP address number of the device, from which the
event that triggers the alarm originates. This is the
same IP address as in the event_ip column, except
that the address is represented using a unsigned 32-bit
integer: e.g. the IP Address “10.205.0.1” is
represented as 181207041.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Description
C-7
D
Event Types for Alarms
This appendix describes the events that can be detected through the EPICenter Alarm
System:
• SNMP traps
• RMON Rising and Falling traps
• EPICenter events
SNMP Trap Events
Table D-1: SNMP Trap Events
ExtremeWare
Version
Event
Definition
Cold Start
This trap indicates that the device is rebooted by
power recycling. Extreme switches always send out
this trap after a reboot.
All
Warm Start
Trap indicates that the device has been rebooted
without power recycling. An Extreme switch never
sends out this trap.
All
Link Up
This trap indicates that a port becomes active from
previous inactive state.
All
Link Down
This trap indicates that a port becomes inactive from
previous active state.
All
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
D-1
Table D-1: SNMP Trap Events
ExtremeWare
Version
Event
Definition
Authentication Failed
This trap indicates that a SNMP request with an invalid All
community string is issued to the device.
Overheat
Extreme Networks proprietary trap.
All
This trap indicates that the on board temperature
sensor has reported an overheat condition. This
indicates the temperature has reached the Overheat
threshold. The switch will continue to function until it
reaches its shutdown threshold. The system will then
shutdown until the unit has sufficiently cooled such
that operation may begin again. A cold start trap will
be issued when the unit has come back on line. This
trap is sent repetitively every 30 seconds until the
temperature goes back to normal.
Fan Failed
Extreme Networks proprietary trap.
All
This trap indicates one or more of the cooling fans
inside the device has failed. A fan OK trap will be sent
once the fan has attained normal operation. This trap
is sent repetitively every 30 seconds until all the fans
are back to normal condition.
Fan OK
Extreme Networks proprietary trap.
All
This trap indicates that a fan has transitioned out of a
failure state and is now operating correctly.
Invalid Login
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. This trap indicates All
that a user attempted to login to console or by telnet
but was refused access due to incorrect user name or
password. The trap is issued after three consecutive
failure of log in.
Power Supply Failed
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. This trap indicates All
that one or more sources of power have failed.
Presumably a redundant power-supply has taken
over. This trap is sent repetitively every 30 seconds
until all the power supplies are back to normal
condition.
Power Supply OK
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. This trap indicates All
that one or more previously bad sources of power
have come back to life without causing the device to
restart.
D-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Table D-1: SNMP Trap Events
ExtremeWare
Version
Event
Definition
Redundant Power Supply
Failed
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. This trap indicates All
that the attached redundant power supply device is
indicating an alarm condition. This trap is sent
repetitively every 30 seconds until the redundant
power supply is back to normal condition.
Redundant Power Supply
OK
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. This trap indicates All
that the attached redundant power supply device is no
longer indicating an alarm condition.
ESRP State Changed
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. This trap indicates 6.0 or later
that the ESRP state (master or slave) of a VLAN has
changed on the device.
EDP Neighbor Added
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. A new neighbor
has been discovered through the Extreme Discovery
Protocol (EDP).
EDP Neighbor Removed
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. No EDP updates 6.1 or later
have been received from this neighbor within the
configured timeout period, and this neighbor entry has
been aged out by the device.
BGP Established
The BGP Established event is generated when the
BGP FSM enters the ESTABLISHED state.
6.1 or later
6.1.9 or later
BGP Backward Transition The BGPBackwardTransition Event is generated
when the BGP FSM moves from a higher numbered
state to a lower numbered state.
6.1.9 or later
Ping Probe Failed
Generated when a probe failure is detected when the
corresponding pingCtlTrapGeneration object is set to
probeFailure(0) subject to the value of
pingCtlTrapProbeFailureFilter. The object
pingCtlTrapProbeFailureFilter can be used to specify
the number of successive probe failures that are
required before this notification can be generated.
6.1.9 or later
Ping Test Failed
Generated when a ping test is determined to have
6.1.9 or later
failed when the corresponding pingCtlTrapGeneration
object is set to testFailure(1). In this instance
pingCtlTrapTestFailureFilter should specify the
number of probes in a test required to have failed in
order to consider the test as failed.
Ping Test Completed
Generated at the completion of a ping test when the
corresponding pingCtlTrapGeneration object is set to
testCompletion(4).
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6.1.9 or later
D-3
Table D-1: SNMP Trap Events
ExtremeWare
Version
Event
Definition
OSPF Interface State
Change
An ospfIfStateChange trap signifies that there has
6.1.9 or later
been a change in the state of a non-virtual OSPF
interface. This trap should be generated when the
interface state regresses (e.g., goes from Dr to Down)
or progresses to a terminal state (i.e., Point-to-Point,
DR Other, Dr, or Backup).
OSPF Virtual Interface
State Change
An ospfVirtIfStateChange trap signifies that there has
been a change in the state of an OSPF virtual
interface. This trap should be generated when the
interface state regresses (e.g., goes from Pointto-Point to Down) or progresses to a terminal state
(i.e., Point-to-Point).
OSPF Neighbor State
Change
An ospfNbrStateChange trap signifies that there has 6.1.9 or later
been a change in the state of a non- virtual OSPF
neighbor. This trap should be generated when the
neighbor state regresses (e.g., goes from Attempt or
Full to 1-Way or Down) or progresses to a terminal
state (e.g., 2-Way or Full). When an neighbor
transitions from or to Full on non-broadcast
multi-access and broadcast networks, the trap should
be generated by the designated router. A designated
router transitioned to Down will be noted by
ospfIfStateChange.
OSPF Virtual Neighbor
State Change
An ospfVirtNbrStateChange trap signifies that there
has been a change in the state of an OSPF virtual
neighbor. This trap should be generated when the
neighbor state regresses (e.g., goes from Attempt or
Full to 1-Way or Down) or progresses to a terminal
state (e.g., Full).
OSPF Interface Config
Error
An ospfIfConfigError trap signifies that a packet has
6.1.9 or later
been received on a non-virtual interface from a router
whose configuration parameters conflict with this
router’s configuration parameters. Note that the event
optionMismatch should cause a trap only if it prevents
an adjacency from forming.
OSPF Virtual Interface
Config Error
An ospfVirtIfConfigError trap signifies that a packet
6.1.9 or later
has been received on a virtual interface from a router
whose configuration parameters conflict with this
router’s configuration parameters. Note that the event
optionMismatch should cause a trap only if it prevents
an adjacency from forming.
D-4
6.1.9 or later
6.1.9 or later
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Table D-1: SNMP Trap Events
ExtremeWare
Version
Event
Definition
OSPF Interface
Authentication Failure
An ospfIfAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has
6.1.9 or later
been received on a non-virtual interface from a router
whose authentication key or authentication type
conflicts with this router’s authentication key or
authentication type.
OSPF Virtual Interface
Authentication Failure
An ospfVirtIfAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet
has been received on a virtual interface from a router
whose authentication key or authentication type
conflicts with this router’s authentication key or
authentication type.
6.1.9 or later
OSPF Interface Receive
Bad Packet
An ospfIfRxBadPacket trap signifies that an OSPF
packet has been received on a non-virtual interface
that cannot be parsed.
6.1.9 or later
OSPF Virtual Interface
Receive Bad Packet
An ospfVirtIfRxBadPacket trap signifies that an OSPF 6.1.9 or later
packet has been received on a virtual interface that
cannot be parsed.
OSPF TX_Retransmit
An ospfTxRetransmit trap signifies than an OSPF
packet has been retransmitted on a non- virtual
interface. All packets that may be retransmitted are
associated with an LSDB entry. The LS type, LS ID,
and Router ID are used to identify the LSDB entry.
6.1.9 or later
OSPF Virtual Interface TX An ospfVirtIfTxRetransmit trap signifies than an OSPF 6.1.9 or later
Retransmit
packet has been retransmitted on a virtual interface.
All packets that may be retransmitted are associated
with an LSDB entry. The LS type, LS ID, and Router ID
are used to identify the LSDB entry.
OSPF Originate LSA
An ospfOriginateLsa trap signifies that a new LSA has 6.1.9 or later
been originated by this router. This trap should not be
invoked for simple refreshes of LSAs (which happens
every 30 minutes), but instead will only be invoked
when an LSA is (re)originated due to a topology
change. Additionally, this trap does not include LSAs
that are being flushed because they have reached
MaxAge.
OSPF Max_Age LSA
An ospfMaxAgeLsa trap signifies that one of the LSA
in the router’s link-state database has aged to
MaxAge.
OSPF LSDB Overflow
An ospfLsdbOverflow trap signifies that the number of 6.1.9 or later
LSAs in the router’s link-state database has exceeded
ospfExtLsdbLimit.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
6.1.9 or later
D-5
Table D-1: SNMP Trap Events
Event
ExtremeWare
Version
Definition
OSPF LSDB Approaching An ospfLsdbApproachingOverflow trap signifies that
6.1.9 or later
Overflow
the number of LSAs in the router’s link-state database
has exceeded ninety percent of ospfExtLsdbLimit.
Health Check Failed
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. The CPU
HealthCheck has failed
6.1.5 or later
CPU Utilization Rising
Threshold
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. CPU Utilizations
Rising trap is generated when the value of
extremeCpuAggregateUtilization touches/crosses
extremeCpuUtilRisingThreshold.
6.2 or later
CPU Utilization Falling
Threshold
Extreme Networks proprietary trap. CPU Utilization
Falling Trap is generated when the
extremeCpuAggregateUtilization falls below 80% of
the extremeCpuUtilRisingThreshold.
6.2 or later
RMON Rising Trap Events
This trap indicates that the value of the MIB variable being monitored has risen to or above
the rising threshold value. RMON rules need to be configured on a device for it to send out
this trap. See “Event Configuration” in Chapter 5 for more information.
RMON Falling Trap Events
This trap indicates that the value of the MIB variable being monitored has fallen to or
below the falling threshold value. RMON rules need to be configured on a device for it to
send out this trap. See “Event Configuration” in Chapter 5 for more information.
EPICenter Events
An EPICenter event is generated by the EPICenter server based on the results of its
periodic polling. In some cases, an EPICenter event may result from the same condition
that could generate an SNMP or other trap. An EPICenter event has the advantage that it
guarantees that the condition will be detected (by polling) even if the corresponding trap
is missed.
D-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
EPICenter Events
Table D-2: EPICenter Events, Detected Through Polling
Event
Definition
SNMP Unreachable
The EPICenter server generates this event when it fails to
communicate with a device following a previously
successful communication. In other words, this event is
generated when the state of communication with the device
transitions from reachable to unreachable.
SNMP Reachable
The EPICenter server generates this event when the state
of communication with the device transitions from
unreachable to reachable.
Configuration Upload Failed
The EPICenter server generates this event when it fails to
upload configuration information from a device. This event
occurs ONLY when the upload is attempted from
EPICenter, not if it was attempted from Telnet,
ExtremeWare Vista or any other method.
Configuration Upload OK
The EPICenter server generates this event when it
successfully uploads configuration from a device. This
event occurs ONLY when the upload is done from
EPICenter, not from Telnet, ExtremeWare Vista or any
other method.
Overheat
For Extreme Networks devices only. The EPICenter server
generates this event for an Extreme device when it detects
a transition from normal temperature to overheat condition
on the device. Unlike the SNMP overheat trap event, this
event is based on a state transition, and will be generated
only once. As an alternative, you can detect an Overheat
condition by using the SNMP Overheat trap, which will be
generated every 30 seconds until the condition is corrected.
Fan Failed
For Extreme Networks devices only. The EPICenter server
generates this event for an Extreme device when it detects,
via polling, a transition from fan OK to fan failed condition on
the device. Unlike the SNMP Fan Failed trap event, this
event is generated only once, based on a state transition.
As an alternative, you can detect a Fan Failed condition by
using the SNMP Fan Failed trap, which will be generated
every 30 seconds until the condition is corrected.
Device Reboot
The EPICenter server generates this event for a device
when it detects a device reboot (cold start or warm start).
Unlike the cold start or warm start SNMP trap, EPICenter
generates this event by polling the device.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
D-7
E
EPICenter Backup
This chapter describes the following:
• The EPICenter Alarm Log and Event Log backup files
• The DBVALID command-line database validation utility
• The DBBACKUP command-line database backup utility
EPICenter Log Backups
Both the EPICenter Event Log and Alarm Log files are kept in tables in the EPICenter
database. These tables can contain approximately 50,000 entries.
The EPICenter server checks once every 24 hours to determine is either of these logs has
reached its maximum size. When one reaches its maximum, EPICenter moves the oldest
10% of the entries to a backup file, and clears those entries from the table.
The backup files are created in the directory <install_dir>/user, where <install_dir>
is the root directory of the EPICenter install, by default epc3_1.
• The Alarm Log is backed up to the file Alarm_Log.txt
• The Event Log is backed up to the file Event_Log.txt
Each primary backup file is in turn backed up to a secondary file when it reaches its
maximum size of approximately 30MB.
• Alarm_Log.txt is backed up to the file Alarm_Log.sav
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
E-1
• Event_Log.txt is backed up to the file Event_Log.sav
The primary file is then emptied.
When the primary file becomes full for the second time, the secondary backup file will be
overwritten with the new contents of the primary backup file.
If you want to maintain a complete set of log file backups over time, you should save the
*_Log.txt and *_Log.sav files periodically.
Database Utilities
Sybase database validation and backup utilities are shipped with the ExtremeWare
EPICenter software.
The Validation utility validates all indexes and keys on some or all of the tables in the
database. The Validation utility scans the entire table and looks up each record in every
index and key defined on the table. This utility can be used in combination with regular
backups to give you confidence in the security of the data in your database.
The Backup utility makes a backup copy of all data in the database, except for user names
and passwords, which are kept in separate files. Backing up your database regularly will
ensure that you will not need to re-enter or recreate all the switch, VLAN, Topology, and
Alarm information in the event that the database is corrupted or destroyed.
Both database utilities are found in the <install_dir>\database directory.
<install_dir> is the directory where you installed the EPICenter software. Substitute the
name of the actual directory for <install_dir> when you run these commands.
In the Solaris environment, you must ensure that the EPICenter database path is
set in the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable. This should be set to
<install_dir>/database where <install_dir> is the root directory of the
EPICenter install, for example opt/epc3_1.
The Validation Utility
The Validation utility validates all indexes and keys on some or all of the tables in the
database. Access the Validation utility from the MS DOS or Solaris command line using the
E-2
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The Validation Utility
dbvalid command. This convention also allows incorporation into batch or command
files.
Using the DBVALID Command-line Utility
To validate the EPICenter database running under Windows NT, use the command:
<install_dir>\database\dbvalid -c “uid=dba;pwd=sql;dbf=<install_dir>\basecamp.db”
Under Solaris, use the command:
<install_dir>/database/dbvalid -c “uid=dba;pwd=sql;dbf=<install_dir>/basecamp.db”
This example assumes a database user ID of dba, with password sql. These are the
defaults used when the database server is installed through the EPICenter installation
process. If you have changed your database user ID and password, substitute your actual
user ID and password in the command.
<install_dir> is the directory where the EPICenter software is installed. Substitute the
actual directory name in the command.
This operation should report no errors. If there are errors, the system should be stopped
and a backup database copied into place. See “Installing a Backup Database” on page E-6.
If there are no backups, the EPICenter software must be re-installed.
Syntax:
dbvalid [switches]
Table E-1: dbvalid Command Switches
Switch
Description
-c “keyword=value; ...”
Supply database connection
parameters
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
E-3
Database Connection Parameters
These are the parameters for the -c command-line switch. If the connection parameters are
not specified, connection parameters from the SQLCONNECT environment variable are
used, if set.
Table E-2: Database Connection Parameters for dbvalid Utility
uid=<user name>
The user name used to login to the database. Default is dba.
The user ID must have DBA authority.
pwd=<password>
The password used to login to the database. Default is sql.
dbf=<database_file>
The name of the file that stores the data. This is the file to be
validated.
The connection parameters are separated by semicolons, and the entire set must be quoted.
For example, under Windows NT, the following validates the EPICenter, connecting as
user ID dba with password sql:
<install_dir>\database\dbvalid -c “uid=dba;pwd=sql;dbf=<install_dir>\basecamp.db”
The Backup Utility
The Backup utility makes a backup copy of all data in the database, except for user names
and passwords. Access the Backup utility from the MS DOS or Solaris command line using
the dbbackup command. This convention also allows incorporation into batch or
command files.
The DBBACKUP Command-line Utility
To back up the EPICenter database running under Windows NT, use the command:
<install_dir>\database\dbbackup -c
“uid=dba;pwd=sql;dbf=<install_dir>\basecamp.db” <backup_dir>
Under Solaris, use the command:
<install_dir>/database/dbbackup -c
“uid=dba;pwd=sql;dbf=<install_dir>/basecamp.db” <backup_dir>
E-4
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
The Backup Utility
This example assumes a database user ID of dba, with password sql. These are the
defaults used when the database server is installed through the EPICenter installation
process. If you have changed your database user ID and password, substitute your actual
user ID and password in the command.
<install_dir> is the directory where the EPICenter software is installed. Substitute the
actual directory name in the command.
<backup_dir> is the directory where the backup copy of the database should be stored.
Substitute an actual directory name in the command.
This command generates a backup of the database in the specified backup directory. The
backup consists of two files, basecamp.db and basecamp.log. All database files are
backed up. These files should be saved so they can be used to replace the original files in
the event of a problem.
Syntax:
dbbackup [switches] directory
Table E-3: dbbackup Command Switches
Switch
Description
-c “keyword=value; ...”
Supply database connection parameters
-y
Replace files without confirmation
Database Connection Parameters
These are the parameters for the -c command-line switch. If the connection parameters are
not specified, connection parameters from the SQLCONNECT environment variable are
used, if set.
Table E-4: Database Connection Parameters for dbbackup Utility
uid=<user name>
The user name used to login to the database. Default is dba. The
user ID must have DBA authority.
pwd=<password>
The password used to login to the database. Default is sql.
dbf=<database_file>
The name of the file that stores the data. This is the file to be
backed up.
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
E-5
The connection parameters are separated by semicolons, and the entire set must be quoted.
For example, under Windows NT, the following backs up the EPICenter database
basecamp.db, connecting as user ID dba with password sql:
<install_dir>\database\dbbackup -c
“uid=dba;pwd=sql;dbf=<install_dir>\basecamp.db” c:\tmp
Installing a Backup Database
The backup database is named basecamp.db, and is kept in the directory you specified
when you ran the dbbackup command (c:\tmp in the example).
To replace a damaged database with the backup copy, follow these steps:
1 Shut down the EPICenter software following the instructions for your operating system
in the ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide.
2 Move or delete the old copy of basecamp.db found in the EPICenter installation
directory.
3 Copy the backup copy of basecamp.db to the EPICenter installation directory.
4 Restart the EPICenter software following the instructions in the ExtremeWare EPICenter
Software Installation and User Guide for your operating system environment.
E-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Index
Numerics
802.1Q tag
13-2, 13-7
A
access levels
Ack button
actions
E-mail
execute script
for alarms
run program
sound alert
activation key
Active Ports (ESRP)
Add All button
in Add Relationship to Group
in Add Resources
Add Attribute to Resource button
Add button
in Add Attribute to Resource
in Add Relationship to Group
in Add Resource
in Alarm Category
in Alarm Definition
in Discovery
in Event Configuration
in Grouping Manager
in Grouping Manager search
in Inventory Manager
in VLAN Manager
Add/Modify Filter button
adding
alarm category
1-7, 15-2
5-5
5-16
5-17
5-15
5-17
5-16
2-5, 2-8, 2-14
14-5
8-18
8-14
8-11
8-21
8-18
8-14
5-21
5-10
4-12
5-26
8-12, 8-16
8-25
4-5, 4-15
13-7
5-8
5-21
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
alarm definition
CPU Utilization rule
devices
map background images
nodes to a map
protocol filters
relationships to resource
resource as child
RMON rule
user accounts
VLANs
address ranges
in discovery
Admin button
Admin Port
Administration page
Administrator
adding users
changing password
default password
deleting a user account
ExtremeWare
modifying users
Administrator access level
Enterprise Manager
Alarm Browser
from topology map
Alarm button
buttons
Alarm
Alarm Definition tab
alarm events
Extreme proprietary traps
from EPICenter
from SNMP traps
SNMP traps
5-10
5-26
4-14
12-25
12-12
13-14
8-16
8-12
5-26
15-6
13-6
4-9
3-13
2-8
15-4
15-6
15-5
15-3
15-7
15-2
15-6
1-8
15-2
12-26
5-2
3-13
5-9
5-4, 5-8
5-4, 5-8
5-8
5-3
i
Alarm Log Browser
5-3
Alarm Log report
16-17
alarm scope
select group
5-15
source type
5-14
alarms
acknowledging
5-5
actions
5-15
Basic parameters
5-11
categories
5-21
creating a filter
5-7
Default category
5-21
defining
5-8
definition examples
5-18
deleting
5-5
detail view
5-5, 5-6
E-mail alarm action
5-16
execute script action
5-17
filtering
5-6
predefined
5-3, 5-8
run program action
5-17
scope
5-13
setting up e-mail
5-17
sound alert action
5-16
unacknowledging
5-5
variables
5-12
All Device Groups page
4-4
All ESRPs view
14-2
architecture
Enterprise Manager software
1-9
Archive button (Configuration Manager)
6-7
archiving configuration settings
6-7
Attribute Name field
8-22
Attribute Type field
8-22
attributes of resources
8-8
DLCS ID type
8-10, 8-20, 8-22
generic type
8-10, 8-19, 8-22
IP/subnet type
8-10, 8-20, 8-22
Attributes tab
8-20
Authentication Failure Alarms report
16-8
Auto populate view
12-10
placement algorithm
12-4
B
background map image
baseline configuration
creating
Basic Alarm parameters
button
Groups
buttons
Ack
Add (Add Attribute)
Add (Add Resources)
Add (Alarm Category)
Add (Alarm Definition)
ii - Index
12-24
6-12
5-11
8-4
3-18
5-5
8-21
8-14
5-21
5-10
Add (Discovery)
Add (Event Configuration)
Add (Grouping Manager search)
Add (Grouping Manager)
Add (Inventory Manager)
Add (Relationship to Group)
Add (VLAN Manager)
Add All (Add Resources)
Add All (Relationship to Group)
Add Attribute to Resource
Add/Modify Filter
Admin
Alarm
Archive (Configuration Manager)
Config
Config (Configuration Manager)
Configure (Inventory Manager)
Create new decorative map node
Create new device
Create new map
Create new map link
Create new view
Cut nodes from map
Delete (Alarm Category)
Delete (Alarm Definition)
Delete (Alarm System)
Delete (Event Configuration)
Delete (Inventory Manager)
Delete (VLAN Manager)
Destroy
Detail
Discover
Download (Configuration Manager)
ESRP
EView
Filter
Find (Grouping Manager)
8-8,
Find IP/MAC
Group
Home
Import
Incremental (Configuration Manager)
Inventory
Layout
Logoff
Modify (Alarm Category)
Modify (Alarm Definition)
Modify (Event Configuration)
Modify (Inventory Manager)
New
Paste nodes into map
Print map
Query
Remove (Add Attribute)
Remove (Add Resources)
Remove (Grouping Manager)
Remove (Relationship from Group)
4-12
5-26
8-25
8-12, 8-16
4-5, 4-15
8-18
13-7
8-14
8-18
8-11
5-8
3-13
5-2
6-7
3-13
6-2
4-5
12-12
12-12
12-10
12-14
12-10
12-17
5-21
5-20
5-5
5-36
4-5
13-9
8-8, 8-11
5-5
4-5
6-8
3-13, 14-1
3-13
5-7
8-14, 8-23
3-13
3-13
3-12, 16-2
8-8, 8-29
6-10
3-13
12-19
3-13
5-21
5-20
5-35
4-5, 4-18
8-8, 8-9
12-18
12-22
8-26
8-22
8-14
8-15, 8-19
8-18
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Remove All (Add Resources)
8-15
Remove All (Relationships from Group)
8-18
Remove Attribute from Resource button
8-11
Remove Filter(s)
5-8
Reports
3-13
Reset (Grouping Manager search)
8-26
RT Stats
3-13, 11-3
Save
8-15, 8-18, 8-19, 8-22
Server (Configuration Manager)
6-16
Settings... (Alarm Definition)
5-17
Sync (Event Configuration)
5-37
Sync (Inventory Manager)
4-5, 4-24
Telnet
3-13
Topology
3-13, 12-2
unack
5-5
Upgrade (Configuration Manager)
6-13
Upload (Configuration Manager)
6-5
Variables... (Alarm Definition)
5-17
Versions (Configuration Manager)
6-15
VLAN
3-13
Zoom map in
12-21
Zoom map out
12-21
C
categories for alarms
changing password
for Administrator
user
children of resource
Children tab
Cisco device requirements
client
browser requirements
installation
starting
starting for first time
columns
sorting
community string
in Discovery
Component Tree
moving the boundary
Compress Map menu selection
Config button
Config button (Configuration Manager)
configuration files
archiving
download incremental
downloading
Configuration Management Log report
Configuration tab
Configure button
conventions
notice icons, About This Guide
text, About This Guide
copy (Telnet)
5-21
15-5
15-8
8-7
8-12
1-10
1-11, 2-3
2-17
3-5
15-3
3-18
4-10
3-15, 3-16
3-18
12-20
3-13
6-2
6-7
6-10
6-8
16-20
5-22
4-5
xxiv
xxiv
7-5, 7-10
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
CPU Utilization
alarm event generation
event configuration rules
MIB variable
Rising Threshold
rule definition
rule display
Sample Type
Startup Alarm
Create new decorative map node button
Create new device button
Create new map button
Create new map link button
Create new view button
creating
device groups
new device node (Topology)
new topology map
new topology view
port groups
resources
search task (IP/MAC Finder)
VLANs
Critical Alarms Defined report
Critical Alarms report
Cut Map Nodes menu selection
Cut nodes from map button
cutting map nodes
5-32
5-23
5-31
5-31
5-31
5-24
5-32
5-32
12-12
12-12
12-10
12-14
12-10
4-16
12-12
12-10
12-10
4-18
8-9
9-4
13-6
16-6
16-6
12-17
12-17
12-17
D
database backup utility
database validation utility
dbbackup utility
dbvalid utility
decorative node
Default alarm category
Default device group
Deflate Nodes menu selection
Delete button
in Alarm Category
in Alarm Definition
in Alarm System
in Event Configuration
in Inventory Manager
in VLAN Manager
Delete Map Links menu selection
Delete Map menu selection
Delete Map Nodes menu selection
Delete View menu selection
deleting
a user account
alarm category
alarm definition
alarms
device groups
Event configuration
E-4
E-2
E-4
E-2
12-6
5-21
4-4
12-21
5-21
5-20
5-5
5-36
4-5
13-9
12-19
12-16
12-18
12-16
15-7
5-21
5-20
5-5
4-23
5-36
Index - iii
map elements
12-18
map links
12-18
map view
12-16
protocol filters
13-13
submaps
12-16
VLANs
13-9
Destroy button
8-8, 8-11
Detail button
5-5
Detailed ESRP Information view
14-5
Detailed Task View (IP/MAC FInder)
9-7
device
download incremental configuration
6-10
download saved configuration
6-8
modifying information
4-18
scheduled configuration upload
6-7
uploading configuration from
6-5
Device Alarms... menu selection
12-26
Device Browse... menu selection
12-26
Device Discovery set up window
4-9
device group
8-2
device groups
4-2
creating
4-16
default
4-4
deleting
4-23
modifying
4-19
Device Inventory r
16-4
Device Inventory report
16-13
device node
12-4
Device Statistics... menu selection
12-27
device status
Inventory Manager
4-6
Device Status report
16-14
Device Summary report
16-3, 16-4
Device Telnet... menu selection
12-27
Devices Not Responding report
16-5
dialog boxes
3-19
Discover button
4-5
Discovery
1-3, 4-2, 4-8
Add button
4-12
address range
4-9
community string
4-10
subnet mask
4-10
Discovery Results window
4-11
display mode, real-time statistics
11-9
download
ExtremeWare software image
6-13
incremental configuration
6-10
saved device configuration
6-8
Download button (Configuration Manager)
6-8
E
EEM 2.x
upgrading from
election algorithm (ESRP)
E-mail
alarm action
iv - Index
setting up for alarms
Enterprise Manager
architecture
client
components
logging in
server components
EPICenter telnet
from topology map
ESRP
active ports
All ESRPs view
detailed information view
election algorithm
Hello timer
Master switch
priority
state
ToMaster
ToSlave
TrackedActivePorts
TrackedIPRoutes
TrackedPings
ESRP button
evaluation copy
updating to full license
event configuration
CPU utilization rule display
CPU utilization rules
other SNMP traps
RMON rule example
RMON rules
rule target
Event Configuration page
Event Log report
EView button
Execute script alarm action
Expand Map menu selection
Extreme switch
updating status
Extreme switch requirements
ExtremeView
from topology map
switch configuration information
switch statistics
switch status
Telnet
ExtremeWare software image
downloading to device
specifying current version
ExtremeWare Vista
from topology map
2-3
14-3
F
5-16
Falling Threshold
file import
5-17
1-9
2-17
1-8
3-7
2-2, 3-2
12-27
14-5
14-2
14-5
14-3
14-3
14-2
14-5
14-5
14-5
14-5
14-5
14-5
14-5
3-13, 14-1
2-10
5-22
5-24
5-23
5-38
5-34
5-23
5-33
5-22
16-19
3-13
5-17
12-20
4-24
1-10
1-5
12-27
10-8
10-10
10-3
1-4
6-13
6-15
12-26
5-28
8-29
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Filter button
filtering
in reports
resources
Find button
in Grouping Manager
Find IP/MAC button
Find Map Node... menu selection
16-10
8-8, 8-13
8-8, 8-14, 8-23
3-13
12-22
G
group
Group button
Groups button
8-1
3-13
8-4
H
heartbeat check
Hello Timer (ESRP)
Home button
host
HTTP port
hyper node
caveats
creating search task
search results
tasks list
5-7
1-10
14-3
3-12, 16-2
8-2
2-8
12-6
12-12
I
Import button
8-8, 8-29
import resources
from NT Domain controller
8-29, 8-36
import source
8-2, 8-3
importing resources
8-28
from file
8-29
from LDAP directory
8-29, 8-30
from NIS
8-29, 8-36
Incremental button (Configuration Manager) 6-10
individual errors graph
11-2
Inflate Nodes menu selection
12-20
installing the client
2-17
installing the server
as a service (Windows NT)
2-9
under Solaris
2-11
Interface report
16-15
Invalid Login Alarms report
16-7
Inventory button
3-13
Inventory Manager
1-3
adding devices
4-14
Discovery
4-8
Inventory Manager page
4-3
IP address
modifying for a VLAN
13-12
IP forwarding
13-8
disabling
13-12
enabling
13-12
IP/MAC Address Finder
1-5
IP/MAC Finder
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
9-4
9-8
9-4
L
L2 cloud node
caveats
Layout button
Layout Map menu selection
LDAP directory, importing from
license key
activation key
licensing
obtaining a permanent license
obtaining an evaluation license
link (topology)
deleting
logging in
Login page
Logoff button
12-5
12-12
12-19
12-19
8-29, 8-30
2-7, 2-14
2-5
2-5
2-4
12-7
12-18
3-7
3-7, 15-4
3-13
M
macros (Telnet)
Play command
record/play
Start Record command
Stop Record command
variables
Manager access level
Map
auto populate
creating
map element description panel
map elements
decorative node
device node
hyper node
L2 cloud node
link
submap node
text node
map hierarchy tree
map nodes
adding
cutting
deleting
laying out
map properties
background image
link text color
map name
node gradient background
node text color
RMON statistics
7-11
7-3
7-11
7-11
7-5
1-8, 15-2
12-3
12-4, 12-10
12-10
12-4, 12-8
12-6
12-4
12-6
12-5
12-7
12-5
12-7
12-3
12-12
12-17
12-18
12-19
12-24
12-24
12-25
12-24
12-25
12-25
12-25
Index - v
Map Properties... menu selection
Master switch
Modify button
in Alarm Category
in Alarm Definition
in Event Configuration
in Inventory Manager
in VLAN Manager
Modify button (Inventory Manager)
modifying
alarm category
alarm definition
device groups
device information
Event Configuration
IP address for VLAN
map properties
user accounts
VLANs
Monitor access level
12-24
14-2
5-21
5-20
5-35
4-5
13-10
4-18
5-21
5-20
4-19
4-18
5-35
13-12
12-24
15-6
13-10
1-8, 15-2
N
Navigation Toolbar
3-12
Network Summary report
16-2
New button
8-8, 8-9
New Decorative Map Node menu selection 12-12
New Device Map Node menu selection
12-12
New Map Link menu selection
12-13
New Map menu selection
12-10
New Text Map Node menu selection
12-13
New View menu selection
12-10
NIS, importing from
8-29, 8-36
NT Domain Controller, importing from 8-29, 8-36
P
passwords
changing for Administrator
default
users changing
paste (Telnet)
Paste Map Nodes menu selection
Paste nodes into map button
Play command (Telnet)
polling
Port Configuration utility
port group
port groups
creating
ports
changing configuration
correcting conflicts
removing from VLAN
predefined alarms
Print map button
vi - Index
15-5
15-3
15-8
7-5, 7-10
12-17
12-18
7-11
4-3
B-9
8-2
4-18
B-9
B-9
13-8, 13-11
5-3, 5-8
12-22
Print Map menu selection
Priority (ESRP)
protocol filters
adding
changing in VLAN
deleting
12-22
14-5
13-2, 13-7
13-14
13-11
13-13
Q
Query button
8-26
R
RADIUS server
administering
changing shared secret
disabling
enabling
Real Time Statistics
Real-Time Statistics
from topology map
graph preferences
11-9,
individual errors graph
total errors graph
utilization graph
related publications, About This Guide
Relationship tab
relationships of resources
Relationships tab
Release Notes
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
(RADIUS)
Remove All button
in Add Relationship to Group
Remove Attribute from Resource button
Remove button
in Add Attribute to Resource
in Add Relationship to Group
in Grouping Manager
remove children from a group
remove resource from results list
Remove Filter(s) button
removing a child resource
Rename Map menu selection
Rename View menu selection
report
Invalid Login Alarms
reports
Alarm Log report
Authentication Failure Alarms report
Configuration Management Log report
creating user-defined
Critical Alarms Defined report
Critical Alarms report
Device Inventory report
16-4,
Device Status report
15-3
15-10
15-11
15-11
15-11
1-5
11-1
12-27
11-11
11-2
11-2
11-2
xxv
8-19
8-7
8-16
xxiii
1-8
8-15
8-18
8-11
8-22
8-18
8-19
8-15
8-14
5-8
8-15
12-16
12-16
16-7
16-17
16-8
16-20
16-21
16-6
16-6
16-13
16-14
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Device Summary report
16-3, 16-4
Devices Not Responding report
16-5
Event Log report
16-19
filtering
16-10
Interface report
16-15
Network Summary report
16-2
printing
16-20
Resource to Attribute Mapping report
16-16
Server State Summary report
16-12
SNMP Unreachable Alarms report
16-7
Unacknowledged Critical Alarms report
16-6
User to Host Mapping report
16-17
VLAN Summary report
16-15
VLANs report
16-9
Reports button
3-13
Reset button
in Grouping Manager search
8-26
resizing
columns in status display
3-18
Component Tree
3-18
resource
8-1
adding as child
8-12
adding relationships
8-16
attributes
8-3, 8-8
children
8-7
Children tab
8-12
creating
8-9
deleting
8-11
filtering
8-8
importing
8-28
relationships
8-4, 8-7
Relationships tab
8-16
removing as a child
8-15
resource details display
8-6
Resource Results list
8-14
searching for
8-23
Select Resource to be Added panel
8-13
Resource Results list
8-14
Resource to Attribute Mapping report
16-16
resources
description
8-6, 8-10
DLCS ID attribute type
8-10, 8-20, 8-22
filtering
8-13
generic attribute type
8-10, 8-19, 8-22
IP/subnet attribute type
8-10, 8-20, 8-22
name
8-6, 8-10
source
8-6
type
8-6, 8-10
unique name
8-7
resynchronize (RMON)
5-37
Rising Threshold
5-28, 5-31
RMON
alarm event generation
5-30
configuration
5-22
event configuration rules
5-23
Falling Threshold
5-28
MIB variables for rules
5-28
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
resynchronize
Rising Threshold
rule definition
rule display
Sample Type
Startup Alarm
traps
utilization on map links
RMON Statistics (Topology)
RT Stats button
rule
CPU utilization event configuration
RMON configuration example
RMON event configuration
target
Run program alarm action
running the client
5-37
5-28
5-27
5-24
5-28
5-29
5-1, 5-3
12-25
12-25
3-13, 11-3
5-31
5-34
5-27
5-33
5-17
3-5
S
Sample Type (CPU Utilization)
Absolute
5-32
Delta
5-32
Sample Type (RMON)
Absolute
5-28
Delta
5-28
Save button
8-15, 8-18, 8-19, 8-22
scheduled configuration upload
6-7
scope
for alarms
5-13
search results
Grouping Manager query
8-26
search results (IP/MAC Finder)
9-8
search task
creating
9-4
Searching for a resource
8-23
Select All Map Nodes menu selection
12-19
Select Resources to be Added panel
8-13, 8-17
Server button (Configuration Manager)
6-16
server installation
under Solaris
2-11
Server State Summary report
16-12
setting
graph preferences (RT Stats)
11-11
setting root directory path
6-16
Settings... button (Alarms)
5-17
SmartTraps
1-10, 4-2
SNMP
4-2
configuring trap events
5-38
traps
5-1, 5-3
SNMP Unreachable Alarms report
16-7
software architecture
1-9
software components
1-8
software licensing
licensing
2-4
Solaris
server installation
2-11
Index - vii
starting the server
3-4
stopping the server
3-4
uninstalling the server
2-19
sorting columns
3-18
sound alert alarm action
5-16
Source Name field
8-29
source of resource
8-6
Start Record (Telnet)
7-11
starting the server
under Solaris
3-4
under Windows NT
3-2
Startup Alarm (CPU Utilization)
5-32
Startup Alarm (RMON)
5-29
State (ESRP)
14-5
statistics
display mode, real-time
11-9
graph preferences (RT Stats)
11-11
in ExtremeView
10-10
individual port real-time
11-7
multi-port real-time
11-3
real-time
11-1
Status/Detail Information panel
3-16
Stop Record (Telnet)
7-11
stopping the server
under Solaris
3-4
under Windows NT
3-2
submap node
12-5
subnet mask
in Discovery
4-10
switch configuration information (ExtremeView)
10-8
switch polling
4-3
switch statistics (ExtremeView)
10-10
switch status (ExtremeView)
10-3
Sync button
4-3, 4-5, 4-24
in Event Configuration
5-37
T
tagged ports
Telnet
copy
macro variables
macros
paste
third-party devices
Telnet button
terminology, About This Guide
text node
TFTP server
enabling/disabling
Third-Party Device Requirements
third-party device support
Telnet
ToMaster (ESRP)
topology
decorative node
viii - Index
13-8
1-4
7-5, 7-10
7-5
7-3
7-5, 7-10
7-11
3-13
xxiii
12-7
6-16
6-16
1-10
7-11
14-5
device node
hyper node
L2 cloud node
link
map
map element description panel
map hierarchy tree
submap node
text node
view
Topology button
Topology views
ToSlave (ESRP)
total errors graph
TrackedActivePorts (ESRP)
TrackedIPRoutes (ESRP)
TrackedPings (ESRP)
traps
Extreme proprietary
RMON
setting EPICenter to receive
SNMP
12-4
12-6
12-5
12-7
12-3
12-4, 12-8
12-3
12-5
12-7
12-3
3-13, 12-2
12-1
14-5
11-2
14-5
14-5
14-5
5-4, 5-8
5-1, 5-3
5-38
5-1, 5-3
U
Unack button
Unacknowledged Critical Alarms report
Undo Map Edit menu selection
uninstalling the server
under Solaris
under Windows NT
unique name of resource
untagged ports
Unzoom Map menu selection
updating switch information
Upgrade button (Configuration Manager)
upgrading
from a previous release
license (evaluation to permanent)
upload
device configuration
scheduled
Upload button (Configuration Manager)
User
ExtremeWare
user
User Administration page
User to Host Mapping report
user-defined reports
users, adding
users, modifying
utilities
database backup
database validation
utilization graph
5-5
16-6
12-22
2-19
2-18
8-7
13-8
12-22
4-24
6-13
2-3, 2-6
2-5
6-5
6-7
6-5
15-2
8-2
15-4
16-17
16-21
15-6
15-6
E-4
E-2
11-2
12-6
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
V
Variables... button (Alarms)
Versions button (Configuration Manager)
view (topology)
viewing
alarm details
Virtual LANs. See VLANs
VLAN button
VLAN Manager
VLAN Manager page
VLAN Summary report
VLANs
adding
adding protocol filters
adding tagged ports
adding untagged ports
criteria
deleting
deleting protocol filters
disabling IP forwarding
displaying
enabling IP forwarding
modifying
modifying IP address
remove a port
removing a port
VLANs report
5-17
6-15
12-3
5-5
3-13
1-6
13-3
16-15
1-6
13-6
13-14
13-8
13-8
13-2
13-9
13-13
13-12
13-4
13-12
13-10
13-12
13-8
13-11
16-9
W
wildcards
in Discovery addresses
Windows NT
starting the server
stopping the server
uninstalling the server
4-9
3-2
3-2
2-18
Z
Zoom
Zoom
Zoom
Zoom
map in button
Map In menu selection
map out button
Map Out menu selection
12-21
12-21
12-21
12-21
ExtremeWare EPICenter Software Installation and User Guide
Index - ix
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising